Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 676

DocuPrint C1110/C1110B

Service Manual 1st Edition

DocuPrint C1110/C1110B
Service Manual 1st Edition
This service manual covers the following modelsFUJI XEROX Co. Ltd. Color Laser Printer DocuPrint C1110/C1110B Related Materials No other related materials issued other than this service manual. Confidentiality This service manual is issued intending use by maintenance service personnel authorized by FUJI XEROX Co. Ltd. Copying, transferring or leasing this manual without prior consent by FUJI XEROX Co. Ltd. is prohibited. When a page becomes irrelavant (e.g. superceded by a replacement page), destroy the page by burning or shredding it.

Issued: October 2007


Handle with care to avoid loss or damage of the manual. Revision and Modification Information When design changes or revisions relating to this service manual occur, the overseas technical information or overseas service bulletin may be issued as supplementary information until such changes are accomodated in the updated version of this service manual.

CAUTION

Important changes including revisions of spare part numbers and adjustment specifications must immediately be reflected on the respective pages of this

Edited by:

Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. CS&S TSC SDEG KSP R&D Business Park Bldg 6A7 3-2-1, Sakado, Takatsu-ku, Kawasaki-shi, Kanagawa, JAPAN 213-8508 TEL 044-812-7637 [XEROX] [The Document Company] are registered trademarks. PRINTED IN JAPAN

Company Name Department Name Telephone No. Full Name Employee No.

Introduction
Getting to know the Service Manual How to use the Service Manual Terms and Symbols Abbreviations

Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure Chapter 2 Troubleshooting Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments Chapter 5 Parts List Chapter 6 General Chapter 7 Wiring Data Chapter 8 Accessories Chapter 9 BSD (Block Schematic Diagram) Not yet issued Chapter 10 Machine Overview

Preface

Preface
Table of Contents

Table of Contents
1 2 3 4 Getting to know the Service Manual .............................................................. Preface-1 How to use the Service Manual ..................................................................... Preface-1
2.1 2.2 Contents of Manual ......................................................................................................Preface-1 Information on Updating ...............................................................................................Preface-2

Terms and Symbols ....................................................................................... Preface-3 Abbreviations ................................................................................................. Preface-4

Introduction
1. Getting to know the Service Manual

1.

Getting to know the Service Manual


This manual is used as the standard service manual for the DocuPrint C1110/C1110B. Publication Comment Sheet Enter any comments and/or corrections regarding the DocuPrint C1110/C1110B service manual into the Publication Comment Sheet, and send it to FX/CSS/IBS through the OpCo TS or CS department.

2.

How to use the Service Manual


This manual describes the standard procedures for the servicing of the DocuPrint C1110/C1110B. Refer to Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure for efficient and effective servicing during maintenance calls.

2.1

Contents of Manual
Hardware This manual summarizes all technical information on the DocuPrint C1110/C1110B. Chapters This manual is divided into ten chapters as described below. Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure This chapter describes the general work and servicing procedures for the maintenance of the DocuPrint C1110/C1110B. Chapter 2 Troubleshooting This chapter describes the troubleshooting procedures other than image quality troubleshooting of the DocuPrint C1110/C1110B. It also describes how to use the diagnostics and some programs. Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting This chapter describes the image quality troubleshooting procedures of DocuPrint C1110/ C1110B. Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments This chapter describes the disassembly, assembly, adjustment and replacement procedures for components of the DocuPrint C1110/C1110B. Chapter 5 Parts List This chapter contains spare parts list for DocuPrint C1110/C1110B. Chapter 6 General This chapter contains the following general information on DocuPrint C1110/C1110B. 6.1 Configuration of Printer 6.2 Electrical Properties 6.3 Mechanical Properties 6.4 Functions 6.5 Consumables 6.6 Operating Environment 6.7 Safety / Environment Conditions 6.8 Print Image Quality 6.9 Option 6.10 ESS Specification 6.11 Tools and Service Consumables 6.12 Installation Procedure DocuPrint C1110 6.13 Installation Procedure DocuPrint C1110B 6.14 Printer Environment Settings

Preface-1

Introduction
2. How to use the Service Manual
6.15 Control Panel Menu Tree

Chapter 7 Wiring Data This chapter describes the wiring data of DocuPrint C1110/C1110B. 7.1 Connectors [P (Plug)/J (Jack)] 7.2 Connection Wiring Diagram 7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts Chapter 8 Accessories This chapter provides information on accessories and options specific to DocuPrint C1110/ C1110B. 8.1 Network Expansion Card 8.2 Additional Memory Chapter 9 BSD (Block Schematic Diagram) (Not yet issued) Chapter 10 Machine Overview This chapter gives an overview of the functions of the main components of DocuPrint C1110/ C1110B.

2.2

Information on Updating
This manual will be revised and sent to each customer engineer as specified below. Revisions must be incorporated correctly to keep the manual up-to-date. Updating Procedure When the entire manual is revised, "1st Edition" on the front cover will be renewed to 1st Edition, 2nd Edition, 3rd Edition and so on. When this manual is partially revised, revisions will be sequentially indicated as Revision A, Revision B, Revision C, etc. All revised pages will be marked accordingly with "Revision A", "Revision B", "Revision C" and so on. Revision Sidebar When any paragraph, table or figure has been added or amended, a revision sidebar will be added to indicate where the revision was made.

(Example) If the same page is changed again due to a subsequent revision, revision sidebars associated with the previous revision(s) will be deleted.

Preface-2

Introduction
3. Terms and Symbols

3.

Terms and Symbols


Specific terms and symbols used in any particular chapter are described in the Preface for that section. The terms and symbols described here are used throughout this manual. The terms and symbols used at the beginning of a text are defined as follows:

DANGER

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation, such as death or serious injury if operators do not handle the machine correctly by disregarding the statement. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, such as death or serious injury if operators do not handle the machine correctly by disregarding the statement. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, such as injury or property damage if operators do not handle the machine correctly by disregarding the statement. Indicates that the printer or its components may be damaged if the instructed procedure is not strictly observed. Used to emphasize the procedure, servicing, and regulation. Used to describe the technical terminology and supplementary explanations. Used to explain purpose of adjustment. Indicates the disassembly/assembly procedure for reference. Indicates the adjustment procedure for reference. Indicates the parts list for reference. Means Assembly.

WARNING

CAUTION

INSTRUCTION NOTE REFERENCE OBJECTIVE


REP ADJ PL ASSY : : : :

Safety Critical Components (SCC) Control of the safety of components that are designated Safety Critical Components shall conform to Fuji Xerox Co. Ltd-stipulated rules and regulations on Safety Critical Components. Important Information Stored Component (ISC) Important Information Stored Components store customers important information they have entered after machine installation. When replacing Important Information Stored Components, you must replace and discard them, following the procedure described in Chapter 4 Adjustments. Take care never to let customer information leak out.

Preface-3

Introduction
4. Abbreviations

4.

Abbreviations
Abbreviations This manual contains abbreviations that are specific to this manual, as well as general abbreviations, which include: ADC AG APS ARC ASSY ATS B BCR Bk BLK BLU BRN BTR C CLN CRU CRUM CTRG DET DEVE. DIAG. DISP dpi DTS DUP ESB ESS F FEED, FDR FIP GND GRN GRY HT HUM HVPS ICDC ID IBT INTL, INLK IOT K L L/H LD LDD LED LEF LH LV LVPS M Automatic Density Control Analog Ground Auto Paper Select Auto Registration Control Assembly Auto Tray Switching Black Bias Charge Roll Black Black Blue Brown Bias Transfer Roll Cyan Cleaner Customer Replaceable Unit CRU Monitor Cartridge Detoner Roll Developer Diagnostic Dispense dots per inch Detack Saw Duplex Electro Static Brush Electric Subsystem Front Feeder Fault Isolation Procedure Ground Green Gray Half Tone Humidity High Voltage Power Supply Image Count Dispense Control Image Density, or Identification Intermediate Belt Transfer Interlock Image Output Terminal Black Left Left Hand Laser diode Lightly Doped Drain Light-emitting diode Long Edge Feed Left Hand Low Voltage Low Voltage Power Supply Magenta MAG MCU MOB MOT MSI N/P NVM OEM Mag. Roll Machine Control Unit Marks On Belt Motor Multi Sheet Inserter No Paper Non Volatile Memory Original Equipment Manufacuring OHP Overhead Project OP Operation OPC Organic Photo Conductor ORN ORANGE PC Personal Computer PCDC Pixel Count Dispense Control PH Paper Handling PHD Printer Head PNK Pink POP Paper On Photoreceptor PPM Prints Per Minute PR,P/R Process PV Print Volume PWB(A) Printed Wiring Boad (Assembly) R Right R Rear R/H Right Hand REF Refresher REGI. Registration RH Right Hand ROS Raster Output Scanner ROT Rotary RTC Rubber Tube Charger RTN Return SEF Short Edge Feed SG Signal Ground SMH Special Material Handler SNR Sensor SOL. Solenoid SOS Start Of Scan STM Single Tray Module SW Switch TEMP. Temperature TM Tray Module TNER, TNR Toner TP Thermopile TR Transfer VIO Violet WHT White XERO Xerographic Y Yellow YEL Yellow

Preface-4

Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure

Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure


Table of Contents

Table of Contents
1.1 Before Starting the Servicing ....................................................................................1-1
1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 Safety ..................................................................................................................................... 1-1 Notes on the Handling of Customer Information .................................................................... 1-2 Other Things to Note .............................................................................................................. 1-3

1.2 Servicing Call Procedure ..........................................................................................1-4 1.3 TRIM Servicing .........................................................................................................1-5


1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 TRIM Servicing Procedure ..................................................................................................... 1-5 Machine Consumables and Periodic Replacement Parts ...................................................... 1-6 TRIM Check List ..................................................................................................................... 1-7

Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure


1.1 Before Starting the Servicing

1.1
1.1.1

Before Starting the Servicing


Safety
To prevent any accident that may occur during maintenance servicing, any WARNING or CAUTION regarding the servicing must be strictly observed. Do not perform any hazardous operation. 1. Power Supply To prevent electrical shocks, burns, or injury, etc., be sure to switch OFF the machine and disconnect the plug before starting the maintenance servicing. If the machine has to be switched ON, such as when measuring the voltage, take extra care to prevent an electrical shock. 2. Drive Area Never inspect or lubricate the drive area such as the gears during the machine operation. 3. Heavy Parts The weight of the machine is 18kg. When moving the machine to ensure sufficient working space, take extra care to prevent back pain. 4. Safety Device See that safety devices for preventing mechanical accidents, such as fuses, circuit breakers, interlock switches, etc., and those for protecting customers from injury, such as panels and covers, function properly. Modifications that hinder the function of any safety devices are strictly prohibited. 5. Installing and removing the parts The edge of parts and covers may be sharp, take care not to touch them. If the oil gets onto your hand, wipe it off before getting on with the servicing. When removing parts or cables, do not pull them out by force but remove them slowly. 6. Specified Tools Follow the instruction when a tool is specified. 7. Organic Solvents When using an organic solvent such as the Drum Cleaner or Machine Cleaner, pay attention to the following: Ensure good ventilation in the room to prevent too much intake of the solvent. Do not use heated solvent. Keep away from fire. 8. Cleaning the Toner and Developer As the toner may cause a dust explosion, sweep the spilt toner into a waste container. When using a cleaner to clean the remaining toner, be sure to use the FX standard toner-proof cleaner and not a customer's cleaner. Also, as the developer also contains toner, exercise the same caution during cleaning. 9. Modifications If any modifications are deemed necessary for the printer, submit an Application for Approval of Modification prior to performing any work. 10.Other Safety Precautions For safety, you should also pay attention to precautions other than the above 1 to 9 items. Follow the SAFE WORKING PRACTICES FOR ENGINEERS issued by FXAP EH & S (Environmental Health and Safety) to ensure greater safety during servicing,

1-1

Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure


1.1 Before Starting the Servicing 1.1.2 Notes on the Handling of Customer Information
1. Handling electronic customer information such as copy/print/received Fax samples (paper information) and log files (activity report, etc.). When taking samples back to your base for the purpose of investigation/analysis, obtain consent from the customer without fail. Besides, be sure to tell him/her the samples will be used only for the primary purpose If asked by the customer to submit an application for taking samples out, use FX Security Code: separate document 15 Administration Table for Giving and Receiving Confidential/Personal Information (IS-019) or obtain consent in writing as directed by the customer. 2. Handling PWB and HDD storing customer information Take great care in handling PWB/HDD. Fax speed dial numbers and URLs the customer has entered in the machine are important customer information, which is stored in PWB/HDD in the machine. 1) At the time of replacement, be sure to transfer customer information onto the new PWB/HDD and clear the information from the old one before discarding it, in order never to let the information leak out. (Detailed in the prefaces to chapters 4 and 5.) 2) If the replacement of PWB/HDD proves that it is not the cause of a specific problem, be sure to reinstall it in the machine. (If having installed/removed PWB/HDD temporarily for diagnostics, clear information in Diag.) 3) If/When it is impossible to clear information electrically from HDD, shred the HDD (at a charge) as requested by the customer. 3. Rewritten-in-maintenance NVMs involving security concerns If having conducted a test by rewriting an NVM, such as polling, which involves security concerns, be sure to return the NVM to the former value after the work. (E.g.: For the details of polling, see FTO 2-202 common to all the models.) 4. If/When maintenance work requires that our device be connected to the customers network, be sure to obtain permission of the customers information system administrator through the person in charge (or of the person in charge), in order to do so. 5. Other notes on the handling of customer information You need to take many other precautions besides the above items 1 to 4 in handling customer information. Do the work, following rules and regulations on safety stipulated by your OpCo and taking great care not to let information leak out.

1-2

Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure


1.1 Before Starting the Servicing 1.1.3 Other Things to Note
Pay attention to the following when performing maintenance service to avoid wrong or redundant servicing: 1. Reference Materials Before performing maintenance servicing, read all relevant technical materials such as SB, FTI, or FTO for a systematic approach. 2. Disassembling Make sure to check the assembled condition before removing parts or disassembling the machine. 3. Installation/Adjustment After the installation or adjustment is complete, check that no parts or tools are left inside or on the assemblies before using the machine. 4. Handling of parts/consumables replaced Make sure that the replaced parts or consumables as well as the packaging materials are collected back to the Service Center.

NOTE

For the separation and processing methods for the collected items, refer to the Common Technical Information No. 2-138 for all machines.

If you have replaced the following consumables, affix the "U" sticker for the recyclable parts to be handled appropriately. Drum Cartridge Individual Color Toner Cartridge For recyclable parts, fill the necessary items in the "U-TAG" and perform collection. 5. General precautions Take care not to disturb the customer's daily work. Place the drip cloth or paper on the customer's floor during work in the machine because color toners may dirty the floor and are difficult to clean. Throw any trash generated during the maintenance service into the trash bag and bring them to the servicing office. Record the service details and the consumables and parts replaced at visit in the Machine Service Log.

DocuPrint C1110/C1110B weighs 18kg. Always have 2 people available to move the printer. Refer to the Installation Procedures for details.

1-3

Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure


1.2 Servicing Call Procedure

1.2

Servicing Call Procedure


1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Ask the operator(s) about the machine condition. Record the billing meter readings. Inspect any printing error, then check the machine. Check the Service Log.

Initial Actions

UM Call

Troubleshoot on Level 1. Troubleshoot. Check the print quality using the test patterns on the machine. Feed paper from the respective trays and, if necessary, clean or replace the Feed Roll. 5. Repair all the secondary problems. 6. Perform TRIM servicing. 1. Check the print quality using the test patterns on the machine. 2. Feed paper from the respective trays and, if necessary, clean or replace the Feed Roll. 3. Repair all the secondary problems. 4. Perform TRIM servicing. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check overall operation/features. Check the machine exterior and consumables. Train the operator as required. Complete the Service Log and Service Report. Keep the print sample with the Service Log.

SM Call

Final Actions

1-4

Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure


1.3 TRIM Servicing

1.3

TRIM Servicing
TRIM Servicing for DocuPrint C1110/C1110B is performed in all SM/UM to maintain the performance of the machine. Independent visits for TRIM Servicing does not take place.

1.3.1

TRIM Servicing Procedure


1. Check overall operation before servicing Make prints with a test pattern containing 20% color pattern for each color, gradation pattern and grid pattern. 1. 20% color pattern for each color: Checks for any scratches on the Transfer Assy and Drum, and for fusing failure. 2. Gradation pattern : Checks for improper low-density reproducibility, color balance and fusing failure. 3. Grid pattern : Checks for color misalignment and fusing failure. * Refer to Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6.7.8 Test Print on executing test print.

2. Clean the interior of the machine Clean toner residues and paper powder etc. in the paper delivery system. (Clean especially the operation section of the operator.) 3. Inspect parts that require periodic replacement (consumables) and replace them if necessary. 4. Safety Precautions Check the connection of the power plug and any damage on the cord and the plug. 5. Check the overall operation after servicing as follows: Check machine operation. Check the print quality. Check the billing meter reading.

1-5

Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure


1.3 TRIM Servicing 1.3.2 Machine Consumables and Periodic Replacement Parts
Check the total number of copies printed during TRIM Servicing before replacing the machine consumables. Machine Consumables Product Name Print Cartridge 2K (Black) *1 Print Cartridge 2K (Cyan) *1 Print Cartridge 2K (Magenta) *1 Print Cartridge 2K (Yellow) *1 PHD Unit * Use Conditions *1 Image Coverage Ratio = 5% Country AP/Korea/Taiwan China AP/Korea/Taiwan China AP/Korea/Taiwan China AP/Korea/Taiwan China AP/Korea/Taiwan China Product Code CT201114 CT201118 CT201115 CT201119 CT201116 CT201120 CT201117 CT201121 CT350604 Expected yield 2kPV 2kPV 2kPV 2kPV 2kPV 2kPV 2kPV 2kPV 20kPV

Periodic Replacement Parts Product Name Fuser Unit-110V *1 Fuser Unit-220V *1 Feed Roller Unit Product Code EL300690 EL300689 EL300691 Note 50kPV Includes Fuser Unit 50kPV Includes Fuser Unit 50kPV

*1 Fuser Unit are CRU and can be ordered as product. This items are not registered as spare part.

1-6

Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure


1.3 TRIM Servicing 1.3.3 TRIM Check List

A ------ Perform checking. Clean, replace or supply if necessary. B ------ Always perform cleaning and checking. C ------ Always perform replacement service at the specified interval. * Refer to "Test Print" in 2.6.6 Menu Tree and 2.6.7.8 Test Print on how to output test patterns. Removal/ Replacement No.

No

Servicing Items

Every time

100K

Service Details Activate the machine and check that abnormal noise is not heard. Output the Built-in Test Pattern to check the print quality. Clean any paper dust and toner residue in the paper path and on the jam sensor. Especially, clean the operation section of the operator carefully. Check and clean the Feed Roll/ Retard Roll for every Tray and SSI.

1.1

Check Items before Servicing (Check the machine operation) Check Items before Servicing (Output test patterns)

1.2

Clean the interior of the machine (Clean the paper transport system) Feed Roll/Retard Roll

3.1 Fuser Assy

C: 50K

REP 6.1

Check that Heat Roll/Pressure Roll are not scratched. Replace where necessary. Visual check only. Do not touch with hand. Make sure that the power plug is plugged in properly. Make sure that the power cords are not cracked and no wires are exposed. Make sure that no extension cord with insufficient length or power cord outside the specification, such as an offthe-shelf power strip, is being used. Make sure that a single socket does not have multiple power plugs plugged to it. Print built-in test patterns to confirm that the print quality satisfies the specification. Check the paper feed and abnormal noise. Create the Service Log and Service Report.

3.2 PHD Assy

C: 20K

Safety Precautions

5.1

Check Items after Servicing (Print Quality Check) Check Items after Servicing (Check the machine operation)

5.2

A A

5.3 Post-servicing check (meter)

1-7

Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure


1.3 TRIM Servicing
CAUTION
Do not touch the Drum/Toner Cartridges with hand. Do not use solvents such as Drum cleaner. (Long time is required for recovery.)

1-8

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting

CONTENTS
2.1 Progressing with the Troubleshooting ........................................................................2-1
2.1.1 Flow of Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................. 2-1 2.1.2 Confirms Installation Status ............................................................................................................ 2-1 2.1.3 Cautions for Service Operations ..................................................................................................... 2-2 2.1.4 Cautions for FIP Use....................................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.5 Items to Be Confirmed Before Going to FIP Troubleshooting......................................................... 2-4 2.1.5.1 Basic Printer Problems ........................................................................................................... 2-4 2.1.5.2 Display Problems .................................................................................................................... 2-4 2.1.5.3 Printing Problems.................................................................................................................... 2-4 2.1.5.4 Print Media Guidelines............................................................................................................ 2-6

2.2 FIP ............................................................................................................................2-10


2.2.1 FIP ................................................................................................................................................ 2-10 2.2.2 Flow of FIP.................................................................................................................................... 2-10 2.2.3 Status Code and Error Message................................................................................................... 2-11

2.3 ERROR CODE FIP...................................................................................................2-23


2.3.1 Level 1 FIP.................................................................................................................................... 2-23 FIP-1.1 Erase Flash Err 016-500/Write Flash Err 016-501/Verify Flash Err 016-502/ Format Error 016-737/Invalid ID 016-742/Range Chk Error 016-743/ Check Sum Error 016-744/Header Error 016-745 ................................................................ 2-23 FIP-1.2 Out of Memory 016-718 ........................................................................................................ 2-24 FIP-1.3 PDL Error 016-720 ................................................................................................................ 2-25 FIP-1.4 Network Error 018-319,018-320,116-350,116-351,116-352,116-35/ Font ROM Error 116-310/MACaddress Error 116-314/RAM Error 116-315/ Controller Error 116-317,116-327,116-328/NV RAM Error 116-326,116-390/ ASIC Error 116-343 .............................................................................................................. 2-26 FIP-1.5 PAGEC Time Error 024-362 ................................................................................................. 2-27 FIP-1.6 RAM Error 116-316/116-320................................................................................................. 2-28 FIP-1.7 Insert Yellow Cartridge/Insert Magenta Cartridge/Insert Cyan Cartridge/ Insert Black Cartridge ........................................................................................................... 2-29 FIP-1.8 Non-Xerox Toner (Y)............................................................................................................. 2-30 FIP-1.9 Non-Xerox Toner (M) ............................................................................................................ 2-31 FIP-1.10 Non-Xerox Toner (C)........................................................................................................... 2-32 FIP-1.11 Non-Xerox Toner (K)........................................................................................................... 2-33 FIP-1.12 Replace Yellow/Replace Magenta/Replace Cyan/Replace Black/ Yellow Low/Magenta Low/Cyan Low/Black Low................................................................. 2-34 FIP-1.13 Waste Full ........................................................................................................................... 2-35 FIP-1.14 Check Manual Feed ............................................................................................................ 2-36 FIP-1.15 Jam at Front (MPT Insert Jam) ........................................................................................... 2-38 FIP-1.16 Jam at Front (Regi On Off Jam).......................................................................................... 2-39 FIP-1.17 Jam at Exit .......................................................................................................................... 2-41 FIP-1.18 Jam at Exit .......................................................................................................................... 2-43 FIP-1.19 Jam at Manual Feed ........................................................................................................... 2-45 FIP-1.20 Jam at Reg. Roll.................................................................................................................. 2-49 FIP-1.21 Jam at Tray ......................................................................................................................... 2-53 FIP-1.22 MPC Error 016-738,016-739,016-740................................................................................. 2-58

FIP-1.23 MPC Error 018-310,018-311,018-312,018-313,018-314,018-315,018-316,018-317,116-333 ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-59 FIP-1.24 CTD Sensor Error 092-310 ................................................................................................. 2-60 FIP-1.25 DTB Life Over 094-330/Transfer Life .................................................................................. 2-61 FIP-1.26 Check Unit/CTD Sensor/PHD ASSY Life............................................................................ 2-62 FIP-1.27 Insert PHD ASSY ................................................................................................................ 2-63 FIP-1.28 Low Density Yellow Cartridge ............................................................................................. 2-64 FIP-1.29 Low Density MagentaCartridge........................................................................................... 2-66 FIP-1.30 Low Density Cyan Cartridge ............................................................................................... 2-68 FIP-1.31 Low Density Black Cartridge ............................................................................................... 2-70 FIP-1.32 Replace PHD ASSY/PHD CRUM Error 091-916 ................................................................ 2-72 FIP-1.33 Insert Output ....................................................................................................................... 2-73 FIP-1.34 Load Manual Feed (Size Mismatch) ................................................................................... 2-74 FIP-1.35 Load Manual Feed (No Suitable Paper).............................................................................. 2-75 FIP-1.36 Load Tray ............................................................................................................................ 2-77 FIP-1.37 Load Tray/Tray Empty......................................................................................................... 2-78 FIP-1.38 Insert Fuser 010-317........................................................................................................... 2-80 FIP-1.39 Replace Fuser 010-351/Fuser Life...................................................................................... 2-82 FIP-1.40 Fuser Error 010-397............................................................................................................ 2-83 FIP-1.41 Fan Motor Error 042-313..................................................................................................... 2-85 FIP-1.42 Motor Error 042-325............................................................................................................ 2-87 FIP-1.43 Motor Error 042-326............................................................................................................ 2-88 FIP-1.44 Check Unit........................................................................................................................... 2-89 FIP-1.45 Front Cover Open ............................................................................................................... 2-90 FIP-1.46 Side Door Open .................................................................................................................. 2-92 FIP-1.47 MCU Firmware Err 024-340 ................................................................................................ 2-93 FIP-1.48 MCU NVRAM Error 041-340............................................................................................... 2-94 FIP-1.49 Laser Error 061-370 ............................................................................................................ 2-95 FIP-1.50 MCU Comm. Error 024-371 ................................................................................................ 2-96 FIP-1.51 Invalid User 016-757 ........................................................................................................... 2-97 FIP-1.52 Disabled Func 016-758 ....................................................................................................... 2-98 FIP-1.53 Limit Exceeded 016-759 ..................................................................................................... 2-99 FIP-1.54 Invalid Job 016-799........................................................................................................... 2-100 FIP-1.55 Download Mode 024-360 .................................................................................................. 2-101 FIP-1.56 K Mode Sol Error 042-372 ................................................................................................ 2-102 FIP-1.57 Env Sensor Error 092-661 ................................................................................................ 2-104

2.4 Abnormal Noise Trouble.........................................................................................2-105


2.4.1 Entry Chart for Abnormal Noise Troubleshooting ....................................................................... 2-105 2.4.2 Operation Mode Table ................................................................................................................ 2-106 FIP-1.N1 When Power is Turned On ............................................................................................. 2-106 FIP-1.N2 During Standby............................................................................................................... 2-108 FIP-1.N3 During Printing................................................................................................................ 2-109

2.5 Other FIP ................................................................................................................2-111


FIP-Electrical Noise ......................................................................................................................... 2-111 FIP-AC ............................................................................................................................................. 2-112 FIP-DC ............................................................................................................................................. 2-113 FIP-Multiple Feed............................................................................................................................. 2-114

2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode ....................................................................................2-115


2.6.1 Roles of the control panel in Diag. .............................................................................................. 2-115 2.6.2 Entering diag. CE mode.............................................................................................................. 2-115 2.6.3 Selecting Diag. item .................................................................................................................... 2-116 2.6.4 Change method parameters value.............................................................................................. 2-116 2.6.5 Executing/Exiting Diag. mode ..................................................................................................... 2-116 2.6.6 Diag. mode menu tree ................................................................................................................ 2-117 2.6.7 Contents of a Test....................................................................................................................... 2-121 2.6.7.1 CE Mode Diag..................................................................................................................... 2-121 2.6.7.2 Executing CE Mode diagnosis ............................................................................................ 2-121 2.6.7.3 ESS Diag ............................................................................................................................ 2-121 2.6.7.4 IOT Diag.............................................................................................................................. 2-125 2.6.7.5 Print Info ............................................................................................................................. 2-142 2.6.7.6 Installation........................................................................................................................... 2-143 2.6.7.7 Exit Mode ............................................................................................................................ 2-143 2.6.7.8 Test Print............................................................................................................................. 2-144 2.6.7.9 Parameter ........................................................................................................................... 2-152

2.7 NVM Access ...........................................................................................................2-155


2.7.1 NVM List ..................................................................................................................................... 2-157

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.1 Progressing with the Troubleshooting

2.1 Progressing with the Troubleshooting


After making sure of actual condition of a trouble, proceed with the troubleshooting process efficiently making use of the Fault Isolation Procedure (FIP), 2.6 How to use Diag. CE Mode, Wiring Data (Chapter 7), and Machine Overview (Chapter 10).

2.1.1 Flow of Troubleshooting


Flow of the troubleshooting is as follows:

Installation status check

Trouble status check

How to use Diag. CE Mode Wiring Data Machine Overview

Execute FIP Reference information Trouble recovery check

End

2.1.2 Confirms Installation Status


Be sure to check the following items before starting the troubleshooting procedures. 1 2 Voltage of the power supply is within the specifications. Power cord is free from breakage, short-circuit, disconnected wire, or incorrect connection in the power cord. 3 4 The laser printer is properly grounded. The laser printer is not installed at a place subjected to too high temperature, too high humidity, too low temperature, too low humidity or rapid change of temperature. 5 The laser printer is not installed close to water service, humidifier, heat generating unit, or fire, in very dusty place, or a place exposed to air flow from the air conditioning system. 6 7 8 The laser printer is not installed in a place where volatile gas or inflammable gas is generated. The laser printer is not installed under direct sunbeams. The laser printer is installed in a well-ventilated place.

2-1

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.1 Progressing with the Troubleshooting
9 10 11 12 The laser printer is installed on a stout and stable plane. Paper used meets specifications (standard paper is recommendable). The laser printer is handled properly. Parts which should be periodically replaced are replaced each time when specified number of sheets has been printed.

2.1.3 Cautions for Service Operations


1 Be sure to remove the power cord except when it is specifically required.

If the printer is kept ON, never touch the conductive parts while it is not specifically required. The power switch and inlet are live even while the power supply is cut off. Never touch the live parts. 2 When checking some parts with covers removed and with the interlock and safety and power switches ON, disconnect the connectors (P/J411 and P/J412) on the ROS ASSY except when it is specifically required.

When checking some parts with covers removed and with the interlock and safety and power switches ON, laser beams may be irradiated from the ROS ASSY. Since it is dangerous, be sure to disconnect the connectors (P/J411 and P/J 412) while it is not required. 3 When checking some parts with the Front Cover removed and power ON, be sure to disconnect the connector (P/J16) on the PWBA MCU while it is not required.

When checking some parts with the Front Cover removed and power ON, high voltage may be applied by the PWBA HVPS. Be sure to disconnect the connector (P/J16) on the PWBA MCU. When connecting the connector (P/J16) on the PWBA MCU according to the instructions of the FIP, never touch the PWBA HVPS and parts of high voltage. 4 When using Diag. tools or other tools of high voltage, be sure to keep them covered except when otherwise specified.

When using Diag. Tool or other tools of high voltage, never touch parts of high voltage. When using Diag. Tool or other tools of high voltage, be sure to follow the procedures in this manual.

2-2

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.1 Progressing with the Troubleshooting
5 When operating the driving units using the Diag or other tools, be sure to keep them covered unless otherwise specified.

When operating the driving units using the Diag or other tools, never touch the driving units. When operating the driving units using Diag or other tools, be sure to follow the procedures in this manual. 6 7 When touching hot parts, be careful not to get burnt. Workers should wear a wrist band or the like to prevent static electricity from their body, grounding their body while working.

2.1.4 Cautions for FIP Use


1 When troubleshooting according to the FIP, normal PWBA MCU, PWBA HVPS, PWBA LVPS, FUSER ASSY, TRANSFER ASSY and so no may be necessary for isolation of failed parts. Prepare them in advance. 2 3 In the initial check according to the FIP, check only items which can be simply checked. In the initial check according to the FIP, check the constitutive parts of the major check parts and related parts, as well as major check parts. 4 5 When working with the printer, be sure to remove the power cord except when required specifically. Connector condition is denoted as follows: [P/J12] -> Connector (P/J12) is connected. [P12] -> Plug side with the connector (P/J12) disconnected (except when attached directly to the board). [J12] -> Jack side with the connector (P/J12) disconnected (except when attached directly to the board). 6 [P/J1-2PIN <=> P/J3-4PIN] in the FIP means measurement with the plus side of the measuring instrument connected to [2PIN] of [P/J1] and the minus side to [4PIN] of [P/J3]. 7 [P/J1<=> P/J2] in the FIP means measurement for all terminals corresponding between [P/J1] and [P/J2] referring to "Wiring Diagrams". 8 In [P/J1-2PIN <=> P/J3-4PIN] in the FIP where voltage is measured, [P/J3-4PIN] on the rear minus side is always at the AG (analog ground), SG (signal ground), or RTN (return). Therefore, after checking of proper conductivity between AGs, SGs, or RTNs respectively, the rear minus side can be connected to the PIN of AG, SG or RTN instead of [P/J3-4PIN]. However, care should be taken not to mistake since [AG], [SG], and [RTN] are not on the same level. 9 Measure the voltage of small connectors with the special tool. Handle the tool with care, as the leading edge of the tool is pointed. 10 When measuring the voltage, set the TRANSFER ASSY, TONER CARTRIDGEs and Paper Cassette, close the COVERs and power ON if not required specifically. 11 Numerical values in the FIP are only for standard. If numerical values are approximate, they should be considered permissible.

2-3

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.1 Progressing with the Troubleshooting
12 Parts which are always removed to check as indicated in the FIP and procedures for that purpose are not specifically referred to here. They should be handled carefully. 13 "Replacement" in the FIP indicates replacement of parts which are considered to be the source of trouble to be checked after replacing those parts, assemblies containing them (HIGH ASSY). 14 In the FIP, procedures are differentiated depending on specifications. Correct troubles according to the instructions in the FIP. 15 For optional parts, some troubleshooting procedure may follow the manual for those options, of which you should take note. Keep those manuals for the optional parts when required.

2.1.5 Items to Be Confirmed Before Going to FIP Troubleshooting


2.1.5.1 Basic Printer Problems
Some printer problems can be easy to resolve. If a problem occurs, check each the following: If a message is displayed on the personal computer connected with the printer, see "2.2.3 Status Code and Error Message". The printer power cable is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet. The printer power is ON. If you have checked all of the above and still have a problem, turn off the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and then turn on the printer. This often solves the problem.

2.1.5.2 Display Problems


If the operation panel is blank, check and try the action below. 1 2 Turn off the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and turn on the printer. When an error has occurred, the error display mode and detailed error display mode can be switched by holding "Continue" key. In the detailed error display mode, detailed error status can be displayed on your PC.

If the menu settings changed from the personal computer have no effect, check and try the actions below. Settings in the software program, the printer driver, or the printer utilities are overriding the settings made on the personal computer. 1 2 Change the menu settings from the printer driver, the printer utilities, or the software program. b) Disable the settings in the printer driver, the printer utilities, or the software program so you can change settings on the personal computer.

2.1.5.3 Printing Problems


If a job did not print correct or incorrect characters were printed, check and try the actions below. 1 2 Make sure the green LED of "Ready/Data" on the operation panel lights before sending a job to print. Make sure print media is loaded in the printer, then make sure the green LED of the "Tray" or "SSI" on the operation panel lights

2-4

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.1 Progressing with the Troubleshooting
3 4 Verify that you are using the correct printer driver. Make sure you are using the correct Ethernet or USB cables and it securely connected at the back of the printer. 5 6 7 Verify that the correct print media size is selected. If using a print spooler, verify that the spooler has not stalled. Check the printer interface from the "Configuration Page". Determine the host interface you are using. Print a Panel Setting page to verify that the current interfaces settings are correct. 8 Output fonts will not print correctly using the PCL driver in its default mode. To correct this problem, use PostScript driver when using the PCL driver.

If secure print is not available or not printing, refer to the requirements below. 1 2 64 MB is required. The number of secure print jobs your printer can store is dependent on the job size including number of pages, graphics, color attributes, and the amount of memory installed. Decrease this number.

If print media misfeeds or multiple feeds occur, check and try the actions below. 1 Make sure the print media you are using meets the specifications for your printer. Refer to Print Media Guidelines of this section. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Flex print media before loading it. Make sure the print media is loaded correctly. Make sure the width and length guides on the print media sources are adjusted correctly. If the print media are overfilled in sources, reduce the amount of media. Load the recommended print side correctly for the type of print media you are using. Turn the print media over or around and try printing again to see if feeding improves. Check the print media type loaded in the source, and refill only one type of print media, if print media types are mixed. 9 10 11 Refill a new ream of print media, if some reams are mixed. Remove the top and bottom sheets of a ream before loading the print media. Load a print media source only when it is empty.

If envelope misfeeds or multiple feeds occur, check and try the action below. 1 Load an envelope from the SSI.

If page breaks in unexpected places, check and try the action below. 1 Check the print data.

2-5

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.1 Progressing with the Troubleshooting
2 Check the status on your PC.

If a job prints from the wrong source or on the wrong print media, check and try the action below. 1 Check the "Paper Size" and "Paper Type" in the Tray Settings menu in the printer driver.

If print media does not stack neatly in the output tray, check and try the action below. 1 Turn the print media stack over in the tray.

2.1.5.4 Print Media Guidelines


Print media is paper, labels, envelopes, coated paper among others. Your printer provides high-quality printing on a variety of print media. Selecting the appropriate print media for your printer helps avoid printing troubles. This section describes how to select print media, how to care for print media, and how to load the print media in the standard 250sheet tray module. Paper For the best print quality in color, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb.) xerographic, grain long paper. For the best print quality in black and white, use 90 g/m2 (24 lb.) xerographic, grain long paper. Before buying large quantities of any print media, it recommends trying a sample first. When loading paper, identify the recommended print side on the paper package, and load the paper accordingly. See "Loading Print Media in Tray" and "SSI for detailed loading instructions. Paper Characteristics The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. It recommends that you follow these guidelines when evaluating new paper stock. Weight The tray automatically feeds paper weights from 60 to 216 g/m2 (16 to 58 lb. bond) grain long. The single sheet inserter automatically feeds paper weights from 60 to 216 g/m2 (16 to 58 lb. bond) grain long. Paper lighter than 60 g/m2 (16 lb.) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, and could cause paper jams. For best performance, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb. bond) grain long paper. Curl Curl is the tendency of print media to curve at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl usually occurs after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in humid conditions, even in the paper tray, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and cause feeding problems. Smoothness The degree of paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If the paper is too rough, the toner does not fuse to the paper properly, resulting in poor print quality. If the paper is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding problems.

2-6

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.1 Progressing with the Troubleshooting
Moisture Content The amount of moisture in the paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper properly. Leave the paper in its original packaging until you are ready to use it. This limits the exposure of the paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance. Grain Direction Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper. For 60 to 135 g/m2 (16 to 36 lb. bond) paper, grain long fibers are recommended. For papers heavier than 135 g/m2 (36 lb. bond), grain short is preferred. Fiber Content Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically pulped wood. Paper containing fibers such as cotton possess characteristics that can result in degraded paper handling. Recommended Paper To ensure the best print quality and feed reliability, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb.) xerographic paper. Business papers designed for general business use also provide acceptable print quality. Always print several samples before buying large quantities of any type of print media. When choosing any print media, you should consider the weight, fiber content, and color. Only use paper able to withstand these temperatures without discoloring, bleeding, or releasing hazardous emissions. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the paper you have chosen is acceptable for laser printers. Unacceptable Paper The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer: 1 Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers, carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper 2 3 4 Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ?0.09 in., such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms In some cases, you can adjust registration with your software program to successfully print on these forms. 5 6 7 8 9 Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers Recycled papers containing more than 25% post-consumer waste that do not meet DIN 19 309 Multiple-part forms or documents Label paper with Cut

2-7

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.1 Progressing with the Troubleshooting
Unacceptable Paper The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer: 1 Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers, carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper 2 3 4 Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than 0.09 in., such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms. In some cases, you can adjust registration with your software program to successfully print on these forms. 5 6 7 8 Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers Multiple-part forms or documents Label paper with Cut

Selecting Paper Proper paper selection helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing. To help avoid jams or poor print quality: 1 2 Always use a new, undamaged paper. Before loading the paper, identify the recommended print side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on the paper package. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Do not use paper that you have cut or trimmed yourself. Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same source. This may result in a paper jam. Do not remove trays while a job is printing. Make sure the Paper Type and Paper Size settings are correct. Make sure the paper is properly loaded in the tray. Flex paper back and forth, and then fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface. When curl is excessive, with plain paper, turn it over and reset it.

2-8

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.1 Progressing with the Troubleshooting
Identifying Print Media Sources and Specifications Table 2-1 Print Media Sizes and Support Y: Yes N: No

250-sheet Tray A4 A5 B5 Letter Executive Folio (8.5" x13") Legal (8.5" x14") Com-10 Monarch DL C5 User-specified print media Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Table 2-2 Print Media Supported

Y: Yes 250-sheet Tray

N: No

Plain Paper Light (60-76gsm) Plain Paper Normal (80gsm) Plain Paper Thick (82-98gsm) Labels Covers Normal (106-163gsm) Covers Thick (164-216gsm) Envelope Postcard Coated Normal (106-163gsm) Coated Thin (95-105gsm) Coated Thick (164-216gsm)

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

2-9

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.2 FIP

2.2 FIP
2.2.1 FIP
The FIP is the first step for trouble diagnosis. The FIP isolates the presence of various troubles including error codes, and guides the troubleshooting procedure.

2.2.2 Flow of FIP

Ask the operator about trouble status. Is operator's operating method correct? Y

Turn off and turn on the Power.

Instruct how to operate

Does error still occur when print is done by the problem mode?

N End of work

Refer to "2.2.3 Status Code and Error Message" When status code is displayed: Refer to "2.3 ERROR CODE FIP"

When image quality trouble is occurred:

Refer to "3.1.1 Entry Chart for Image Quality Troubleshooting"

Refer to "3.1.4 Image Quality FIP"

When abnormal noise is occurred:

Refer to "2.4.1 Entry Chart for Abnormal Noise Troubleshooting"

Refer to "2.4.2 Operation Mode Table"

2-10

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.2 FIP

2.2.3 Status Code and Error Message


Problem Error Message Erase Flash Err Restart Printer Error Contents Relevant FIP

Flip Error 016-500 Restart Printer


Write Flash Err Restart Printer

<DOWNLOAD DELETE ERROR> The flash memory error is detected.

FIP-1.1

Flip Error 016-501 Restart Printer


Verify Flash Err Restart Printer

<DOWNLOAD WRITE ERROR> The flash memory error is detected.

FIP-1.1

Flip Error 016-502 Restart Printer


Out of Memory Press Ok Button

<DOWNLOAD VERIFY ERROR> The flash memory error is detected.

FIP-1.1

Flip Error 016-718 Press Ok Button


PDL Error Press Ok Button ESS

<Memory Overflow> Exceeds the memory capacity.

FIP-1.2

Flip Error 016-720 Press Ok Button


Format Error Press Ok Button

<PDL Error> PDL error occurs.

FIP-1.3

Flip Error 016-737 Press Ok Button


Invalid ID Press Ok Button

<DOWNLOAD FORMAT ERROR> The download file is broken, or communication error is detected.

FIP-1.1

Flip Error 016-742 Press Ok Button


Range Chk Error Press Ok Button

<DOWNLOAD ID ERROR> The ID of the downloaded file is invalid.

FIP-1.1

Flip Error 016-743 Press Ok Button


Check Sum Error Press Ok Button

<DOWNLOAD RANGE ERROR> The wrong address is detected.

FIP-1.1

Flip Error 016-744 Press Ok Button

<DOWNLOAD CHECKSUM ERROR> The checksum is invalid.

FIP-1.1

2-11

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.2 FIP
Problem Error Message Header Error Press Ok Button Error Contents Relevant FIP

Flip Error 016-745 Press Ok Button


Network Error Restart Printer

<DOWNLOAD HEADER ERROR> The header information is invalid.

FIP-1.1

Flip Error 018-319 Restart Printer


Network Error Restart Printer

<On Board Network OS Error> The error is detected by On Board Network OS.

FIP-1.4

Flip Error 018-320 Restart Printer


PAGEC Time Error Restart Printer

<On Board Network VxWorks Error> The error is detected by On Board VxWORKS.

FIP-1.4

Flip Error 024-362 Restart Printer


Font ROM Error Restart Printer ESS

<PAGEC Timeout Error> The PAGEC timeout error is detected.

FIP-1.5

Flip Error 116-310 Restart Printer


MACaddress Error Restart Printer

<ESS FontROM Error (Main)> Checksum error in main Font ROM is detected.

FIP-1.4

Flip Error 116-314 Restart Printer


RAM Error Restart Printer

<On Board Network MAC Address Checksum Error> Checksum error in Network MAC address is detected. MAC: Media Access Control

FIP-1.4

Flip Error 116-315 Restart Printer


RAM Error Restart Printer

<ESS On Board RAM W/R Check Fail> The failure is detected by RAM W/R check during initialization.

FIP-1.4

Flip Error 116-316 Restart Printer


Controller Error Restart Printer

<ESS DIMM Slot RAM W/R Check Fail> The error is detected by DIMM slot RAM W/R check during initialization.

FIP-1.6

Flip Error 116-317 Restart Printer

<ESS ROM Check (Main) Fail> Checksum error in the main program ROM.

FIP-1.4

2-12

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.2 FIP
Problem Error Message RAM Error Restart Printer Error Contents Relevant FIP

Flip Error 116-320 Restart Printer


NV RAM Error Restart Printer

<ESS DIMM Slot RAM Error> The error is detected by DIMM slot check during initialization.

FIP-1.6

Flip Error 116-323 Restart Printer


Controller Error Restart Printer

<ESS NVRAM1 W/R Check Fail> The failure is detected by NVRAM 1 W/R check during initialization.

FIP-1.4

Flip Error 116-324 Restart Printer


NV RAM Error Restart Printer

<ESS Illegal Exception> CPU illegal exception is detected.

FIP-1.4

Flip Error 116-326 Restart Printer


Controller Error Restart Printer ESS

<ESS NVRAM2 W/R Check Fail> The failure is detected by NVRAM 2 W/R check during initialization.

FIP-1.4

Flip Error 116-327 Restart Printer


Controller Error Restart Printer

<ESS Instruction Cash Error> Checksum error in the Instruction Cash.

FIP-1.4

Flip Error 116-328 Restart Printer


ASIC Error Restart Printer

<ESS Data Cache Error> Checksum error in the Data Cash.

FIP-1.4

Flip Error 116-343 Restart Printer


Network Error Restart Printer

<ASIC Fail> The error is detected by ASIC error.

FIP-1.4

Flip Error 116-350 Restart Printer


Network Error Restart Printer

<On Board Network Communication Fail> Communication error between CPU Network and ESS F/W is detected.

FIP-1.4

Flip Error 116-351 Restart Printer

<On Board Network Ethernet BIST parity/RAM R/W Error> The error is detected by Network Ethernet parity RAM R/W check.

FIP-1.4

2-13

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.2 FIP
Problem Error Message Network Error Restart Printer Error Contents Relevant FIP

Flip Error 116-352 Restart Printer


Network Error Restart Printer ESS

<On Board Network Internal Loopback Error> The error is detected by on board Network Internal Loopback check.

FIP-1.4

Flip Error 116-355 Restart Printer


NV RAM Error Restart Printer

<On Board Network Fatal Error> The fatal error is detected by on board Network check.

FIP-1.4

Flip Error 116-390 Restart Printer


Insert Yellow Cartridge Insert MagentaCartridge Insert Cyan Cartridge Insert Black Cartridge Non-Xerox Toner Invalid Yellow Non-Xerox Toner Invalid Magenta Non-Xerox Toner Invalid Cyan Toner Cartridge Non-Xerox Toner Invalid Black Replace Yellow Replace Magenta Replace Cyan Replace Black Replace Yellow Cartridge Replace MagentaCartridge Replace Cyan Cartridge

<ESS NVRAM1 SIZE And ID Check Fail> The error is detected by consistency check between NVRAM size required by the system and its actual size, and by consistency check of ID recorded when turning ON the power. <IOT Y CRU Detached> Yellow Cartridge detached is detected. <IOT M CRU Detached> Magenta Cartridge detached is detected. <IOT C CRU Detached> Cyan Cartridge detached is detected. <IOT K CRU Detached> Black Cartridge detached is detected. <IOT CRUM ID Error> CRUM ID error of Yellow Cartridge is detected. <IOT CRUM ID Error> CRUM ID error of Magenta Cartridge is detected. <IOT CRUM ID Error> CRUM ID error of Cyan Cartridge is detected. <IOT CRUM ID Error> CRUM ID error of Black Cartridge is detected. <IOT Y CRU Life Over> Yellow Cartridge reached the replacement time. <IOT M CRU Life Over> Magenta Cartridge reached the replacement time. <IOT C CRU Life Over> Cyan Cartridge reached the replacement time. <IOT K CRU Life Over> Black Cartridge reached the replacement time. <IOT Y CRU Life Over> Yellow Cartridge reached the replacement time. <IOT M CRU Life Over> Magenta Cartridge reached the replacement time. <IOT C CRU Life Over> Cyan Cartridge reached the replacement time.

FIP-1.4

FIP-1.7 FIP-1.7 FIP-1.7 FIP-1.7 FIP-1.8 FIP-1.9 FIP-1.10 FIP-1.11 FIP-1.12 FIP-1.12 FIP-1.12 FIP-1.12 FIP-1.12 FIP-1.12 FIP-1.12

2-14

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.2 FIP
Problem Error Message Replace Black Cartridge Yellow Low Replace Soon Magenta Low Replace Soon Cyan Low Replace Soon Black Low Replace Soon Waste Full Yellow Cartridge Waste Full MagentaCartridge Waste Full Cyan Cartridge Waste Full Black Cartridge Check Manual Feed Remove Paper Error Contents <IOT K CRU Life Over> Black Cartridge reached the replacement time. <IOT Y CRU Near Life> Yellow Cartridge is going to reach the replacement time. <IOT M CRU Near Life> Magenta Cartridge is going to reach the replacement time. <IOT C CRU Near Life> Cyan Cartridge is going to reach the replacement time. <IOT K CRU Near Life> Black Cartridge is going to reach the replacement time. <IOT Y CRU Waste Full> Waste Toner counter value is going to reach the replacement time. <IOT M CRU Waste Full> Waste Toner counter value is going to reach the replacement time. <IOT C CRU Waste Full> Waste Toner counter value is going to reach the replacement time. <IOT K CRU Waste Full> Waste Toner counter value is going to reach the replacement time. <IOT MPT Paper Pullout JAM> Though it tried to feed a paper from MPT, the paper was not loaded or it was pulled out forcibly from MPT. Relevant FIP FIP-1.12 FIP-1.12

FIP-1.12

FIP-1.12 FIP-1.12

Toner Cartridge

FIP-1.13

FIP-1.13

FIP-1.13

FIP-1.13

Flip Open and close Front Cover


Jam at Front Cover

FIP-1.14

Flip Open Front Cover and Remove Paper


Jam Jam at Front Cover

<IOT MPT Insert JAM> MPT No Paper Sensor detect when a paper is inserted from MPT.

FIP-1.15

Flip Open Front Cover and Remove Paper


Jam at Front Cover

<IOT Regi On early JAM> Regi sensor turned on earlier than specified time.

FIP-1.16

Flip Open Front Cover and Remove Paper


Jam at Exit Open Front Cover

<IOT Regi OFF Jam> Regi sensor turned off earlier than specified time.

FIP-1.16

<IOT Exit JAM> The paper remains at Exit Sensor.

FIP-1.17

2-15

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.2 FIP
Problem Error Message Jam at Exit Error Contents Relevant FIP

Flip Open Front Cover and Remove Paper


Jam at Exit

<IOT Exit Off early JAM> Exit sensor turned off earlier than specified time.

FIP-1.18

Flip Open Front Cover and Remove Paper


Jam at Exit

<IOT Exit On early JAM> Exit sensor turned on earlier than specified time.

FIP-1.18

Flip Open Front Cover and Remove Paper


Jam at Exit Jam

<IOT Exit Off JAM> The paper remains at Exit Sensor.

FIP-1.18

Flip Open Front Cover and Remove Paper


Jam at Manual Feed

<IOT Exit On JAM> The paper remains at Exit Sensor.

FIP-1.18

Flip Check Manual Feed Open Front Cover


Jam at Reg. Roll Open Front Cover Jam at Tray

<IOT MPT Misfeed JAM> Regi Sensor is not turned ON within the specified time after feeding a paper from MPT. <IOT Remain Registration JAM> The paper remains at Regi Sensor. <IOT CASSETTE1 Misfeed JAM> Regi Sensor is not turned ON within the specified time after feeding a paper from CASSETTE1. <Waiting for reseat paper of MPT> Regi Sensor is not turned ON within the specified time after feeding a paper from MPT.

FIP-1.19

FIP-1.20

Flip Check Tray Open Front Cover


Reseat paper of Manual Feed MPC Error Press Ok Button

FIP-1.21

FIP-1.19

Flip Error 016-738 Press Ok Button


Reseat MPC Press Ok Button MPC

<DOWNLOAD INITIAL ERROR> Failed to start MPC download mode at MPC download.

FIP-1.22

Flip Error 016-739 Press Ok Button


MPC Comm Error Press Ok Button

<DOWNLOAD INSERTION ERROR> MPC Download was attempted without MPC mounted.

FIP-1.22

Flip Error 016-740 Press Ok Button

<DOWNLOAD COMM ERROR> Communication error occurred ESS during download.

FIP-1.22

2-16

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.2 FIP
Problem Error Message MPC Error Restart Printer Error Contents Relevant FIP

Flip Error 018-310 Restart Printer


MPC Error Restart Printer

<MPC-ESS Communication Fail> Communication fail between MPC and ESS.

FIP-1.23

Flip Error 018-311 Restart Printer


MPC Error Restart Printer

<MPC Flash ROM Boot Module Checksum Error> Checksum error in MPC Flash ROM.

FIP-1.23

Flip Error 018-312 Restart Printer


MPC Error Restart Printer

<MPC RAM R/W Test Error> The error is detected by MPC RAM R/W check.

FIP-1.23

Flip Error 018-313 Restart Printer


MPC Error Restart Printer MPC

<MPC Flash ROM Application Module Checksum Error> Checksum error in MPC Flash ROM.

FIP-1.23

Flip Error 018-314 Restart Printer


MPC Error Restart Printer

<MPC MAC Address Checksum Error> Checksum error in the MPC MAC address.

FIP-1.23

Flip Error 018-315 Restart Printer


MPC Error Restart Printer

<MPC Ethernet BIST parity/RAM R/W Error> The error is detected by MPC Ethernet BIST parity RAM R/W check.

FIP-1.23

Flip Error 018-316 Restart Printer


MPC Error Restart Printer

<MPC Internal Loopback Error> The error is detected by Loopback test.

FIP-1.23

Flip Error 018-317 Restart Printer


MPC error Restart Printer

<MPC Fatal Error> The error is detected by MPC check.

FIP-1.23

Flip Error 116-333 Restart Printer

<PCI Option#0 Fail> Detection error of PCI option 0.

FIP-1.23

2-17

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.2 FIP
Problem Error Message CTD Sensor Error Restart Printer Error Contents Relevant FIP

<IOT CTD (ADC) Sensor Error> Shows detail of error code when pressing three keys "Down arrow", "Upper arrow", and "OK". 092-310 Code: 0801:fail 1/0802: Fail 2 FIP-1.24

Flip Error 092-310 Restart Printer Flip 092-310 Code: XXXX


DTB Life Over Restart Printer

Flip Error 094-330 Restart Printer


Check Unit CTD Sensor Transfer Belt CTD Sensor Insert PHD ASSY Low Density Yellow Cartridge Low Density MagentaCartridge Low Density Cyan Cartridge Low Density Black Cartridge Replace PHD ASSY Transfer Life Replace Soon Insert Output to Manual Feed Insert Output to Tray Load Manual Feed XX(Paper size) Paper Setting

<IOT DTB Life Over> PHD ASSY reached the replacement time.

FIP-1.25

<IOT CTD (ADC) Sensor Contamination> Contamination of the ADC Sensor is detected. <IOT CTD (ADC) Sensor Contamination> Contamination of the ADC Sensor is detected. <IOT PHD Detached> PHD ASSY detached is detected. <IOT Y Toner Low Density> Detects low density of yellow. <IOT M Toner Low Density> Detects low density of magenta. <IOT C Toner Low Density> Detects low density of cyan. <IOT K Toner Low Density> Detects low density of black. <IOT CRUM ID Error> CRUM ID error of PHD ASSY is detected. <IOT DTB Life Pre Warning> The PHD ASSY is going to reach the replacement time. < Paper Empty at Manual Duplex> Waiting for side 2 to be set for manual duplex print(SSI). < Paper Empty at Manual Duplex> Waiting for side 2 to be set for manual duplex print.

FIP-1.26 FIP-1.26 FIP-1.27 FIP-1.28 FIP-1.29 FIP-1.30 FIP-1.31 FIP-1.32 FIP-1.25 FIP-1.33 FIP-1.33

Flip Load Manual Feed YY(paper type)


Load Manual Feed XX(Paper size)

<IOT Paper Size Mismatch> The paper size mismatch in Tray 1 is detected.

FIP-1.34

Flip Load Manual Feed YY(paper type)

<No suitable paper> The paper empty is detected.

FIP-1.35

2-18

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.2 FIP
Problem Error Message Load Tray XX(Paper size) Error Contents Relevant FIP

Flip Load Tray YY(paper type)


Paper Setting Load Tray XX(Paper size)

<IOT Paper Size Mismatch> The paper size mismatch in CASSETTE1 is detected.

FIP-1.36

Flip Load Tray YY(paper type)


Tray Empty Insert Fuser 010-317

<No suitable paper> The paper empty is detected.

FIP-1.37

<No paper in Ready> The paper empty is detected.

FIP-1.37

Flip Insert Fuser Restart Printer


Replace Fuser 010-351

<IOT Fuser Detached> Fuser detached is detected.

FIP-1.38

Flip Replace Fuser Restart Printer

<IOT Fuser Life Over> Fuser has reached the replacement time.

FIP-1.39

Fuser Fuser Error Restart Printer

<IOT Fuser Failure> Fuser Failure is detected. Shows detail of error code when pressing three keys "Down arrow", "Upper arrow", and "OK" 010-397 Code: XX 01: NC circuit fail/02: NC Detect disconnection/03: NC Detect fail/04: NC Comp disconnection/05: NC Comp fail/06: NC Temp Over/07: STS Temp Over/08: NC Comp Table Fail/09: NC Overheat/0A: STS disconnection/0B: STS Overheat/0C: STS Lowtemp/0D: NC Lowtemp/0E: Cool Timeover/0F: Fuser Ready Time over ERR1/10: NC Warm up Time over ERR2/11: Fuser Ready Time over ERR2/12: Relay Off STS H/13: Relay Off NC H/14: Relay Other/15: Fuser Machine Code ERR/16: Fuser Ready Time over ERR3 <IOT Fuser Life Pre Warning> Fuser is going to reach replacement time.

Flip Error 010-397 Restart Printer Flip 010-397 Code: XX

FIP-1.40

Fuser Life Replace Soon Fan Motor Error Restart Printer

FIP-1.39

Flip Error 042-313 Restart Printer


Motor Motor Error Restart Printer

<IOT Fan Motor Failure> Rear Fan Motor error is detected

FIP-1.41

Flip Error 042-325 Restart Printer

<IOT Motor Failure> Main Motor failure is detected.

FIP-1.42

2-19

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.2 FIP
Problem Error Message Motor Error Restart Printer Motor Error Contents Relevant FIP

Flip Error 042-326 Restart Printer


PHD CRUM Error Restart Printer

<IOT Motor Failure> Sub Motor failure is detected.

FIP-1.43

PHD ASSY

Flip Error 091-916 Restart Printer


Check Unit PHD ASSY PHD ASSY Life Front Cover Open Close FrontCover

<IOT CRUM ID Error> CRUM ID error of PHD ASSY is detected.

FIP-1.32

<PHD Tape Staying> Detects the tape staying on the PHD ASSY. <IOT PHD Life Pre Warning> The PHD ASSY is going to reach the replacement time. <IOT Cover Front Open> Front cover is open. <IOT Side Cover Open> Side cover is open. <IOT Firmware Error> Firmware error occurs.

FIP-1.44 FIP-1.25 FIP-1.45 FIP-1.46

Cover Open Side Door Open Close Side Door

MCU Firmware Err Restart Printer

Flip Error 024-340 Restart Printer Flip 024-340 Code: XX


MCU

Shows detail of error code when pressing three keys "Down arrow", "Upper arrow", and "OK". 024-340 Code: XX FIP-1.47 01: Task Over/02: Time Over/03: NV Write Retry/04: NV Write Queue Over/05: LEISUS Send Over/06: CRUM Data/07: Pursuit Comp/08: Pursuit SUM/09: Fuser NV/0A: Dispense/0B: FSR SBY Mode/0C: Media ERR2/0D: Hanpa/0E: FSR SBY Mode/0F: FSR Print Mode/10: Continuous Heater/11: PPM Group ERR/12: CMODE ERR/13: Send CMD ERR <IOT NVRAM Error> IOT NVM Error occurs. Shows detail of error code and address when pressing three keys "Down arrow", "Upper arrow", and "OK". ADDR: XXXX Data: XX 1000 to 17FF: MCU PWBA/3000 to 30FF: Transfer Belt/3100 to 31FF: Yellow Toner Cartridge/3200 to 32FF: Magenta Toner Cartridge/3300 to 33FF: Cyan Toner Cartridge/3400 to 34FF: Black Toner Cartridge

MCU NVRAM Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 041-340 Restart Printer Flip ADDR: XXXX Data: XX

FIP-1.48

2-20

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.2 FIP
Problem Error Message Laser Error Restart Printer ROS Error Contents <IOT ROS Failure> ROS Failure is detected. Shows detail of error code when pressing three keys "Down arrow", "Upper arrow", and "OK". 061-370 Code: XX 01: SOS Rotating up defect/02: SOS Interval defect/03h: LD defect <IOT-ESS Communication Fail> Communication failure between IOT and ESS is detected. Relevant FIP

Flip Error 061-370 Restart Printer Flip 061-370 Code: XX


MCU Comm. Error Restart Printer

FIP-1.49

System

Flip Error 024-371 Restart Printer


Invalid User Press Ok Button

FIP-1.50

Flip Error 016-757 Press Ok Button


Disabled Func Press Ok Button

<Auditron - Invalid User> The user is not registered to any account.

FIP-1.51

Flip Error 016-758 Press Ok Button


Limit Exceeded Press Ok Button

<Auditron - Disabled Function> An invalid account was detected.

FIP-1.52

Flip Error 016-759 Press Ok Button


Other Invalid Job Press Ok Button

<Auditron - Reached Limit> The number of registered users exceeded its upper limit.

FIP-1.53

Flip Error 016-799 Press Ok Button


Download Mode Send FW Data

<Job Environment Violation> Detects violation data for the print condition.

FIP-1.54

Flip Error 024-360 Send FW Data


K Mode Sol Error Restart Printer

<MCU Firmware Down Load Error> The MCU downloaded file is invalid.

FIP-1.55

Flip Error 042-372 Restart Printer

<IOT K Mode Solenoid Error> K Mode Solenoid (Color Mode Switching Solenoid) error is detected.

FIP-1.56

2-21

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.2 FIP
Problem Error Message Env Sensor Error Restart Printer Other Error Contents <IOT Environment Sensor Error> Humid sensor error is detected. Shows detail of error code when pressing three keys "Down arrow", "Upper arrow", and "OK". 092-661 Code: XX 01: Humidity Sensor Error/10: Temperature Sensor Error/11: Humidity and Temperature Sensor Error Relevant FIP

Flip Error 092-661 Restart Printer Flip 092-661 Code: XX

FIP-1.57

2-22

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

2.3 ERROR CODE FIP


2.3.1 Level 1 FIP FIP-1.1 Erase Flash Err 016-500/Write Flash Err 016-501/Verify Flash Err 016-502/Format Error 016-737/Invalid ID 016-742/Range Chk Error 016-743/Check Sum Error 016-744/Header Error 016-745
Step Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9) 1 Checking the download file Was the file for 6130N downloaded? Go to step 2. Re-download the correct file. Check Remedy Yes No

Checking the connection between PC and printer Are your PC and the printer correctly connected by USB or LAN? Go to step 3. Disconnect and reconnect the USB or network cable. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after reseating the PWBA ESS Reseat the PWBA ESS. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking re-downloading the correct file for 6130N Re-download the correct file from Xerox web site. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Go to step 4. Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

End of work

End of work

End of work

2-23

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.2
Step

Out of Memory 016-718


Check Remedy Yes No

Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9) MEMORY CARD (OPTION) (PL8.1.12) 1 Checking the memory capacity for print Print the small size file (like a Windows test print). Does the error still occur when printing? Checking after reseating the MEMORY CARD Reseat the MEMORY CARD. Does the error still occur when printing? Checking the memory card capacity Is the memory capacity recognized normally? Checked by [Information Page] - [Configuration] in [Setup]. Checking after replacing the MEMORY CARD Replace the MEMORY CARD. Does the error still occur when printing? Go to step 2. Add the MEMORY CARD or divide the printing job. End of work Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) End of work

Go to step 3.

Go to step 4. Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

2-24

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.3
Step

PDL Error 016-720


Check Remedy Yes No

Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9) 1 Checking the printing job Print the small size file (like a Windows test print). Does the error still occur when printing? Checking after reseating the PWBA ESS Reseat the PWBA ESS. Does the error still occur when printing? Go to step 2. Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) End of work

End of work

2-25

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.4

Network Error 018-319,018-320,116-350,116-351,116-352,11635/Font ROM Error 116-310/MACaddress Error 116-314/RAM Error 116-315/Controller Error 116-317,116-327,116-328/NV RAM Error 116-326,116-390/ASIC Error 116-343

Step Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9) 1 2

Check

Remedy Yes No

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after reseating the PWBA ESS Reseat the PWBA ESS. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 2. Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

End of work End of work

2-26

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.5
Step

PAGEC Time Error 024-362


Check Remedy Yes No

Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9) 1 Checking the error Does the error still occur when turning off and on the power? Checking the PWBA ESS installation Reseat the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Does the error still occur when turning off and on the power? Go to step 2. End of work, if the error occurs again, go to step 2. End of work.

Replace the PWBA ESS.

2-27

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.6
Step

RAM Error 116-316/116-320


Check Remedy Yes No

Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL9.1.27) MEMORY CARD (OPTION) (PL8.1.12) 1 Checking the MEMORY CARD for installation Reseat the MEMORY CARD. Does the error still occur when the power is turned ON? Checking after replacing the MEMORY CARD Replace the MEMORY CARD. Does the error still occur when the power is turned ON? Go to step 2. Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) End of work

End of work

2-28

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.7

Insert Yellow Cartridge/Insert Magenta Cartridge/Insert Cyan Cartridge/Insert Black Cartridge

Step

Check Possible causative parts: TONER CARTRIDGE (K) (PL5.1.21) TONER CARTRIDGE (C) (PL5.1.22) TONER CARTRIDGE (M) (PL5.1.23) TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) (PL5.1.24) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

Remedy Yes No

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y/M/C/K) Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y/M/C/K), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y/M/C/K) Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y/M/C/K). (Refer to REP5.7) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the HARN ASSY TONER CRUM for continuity Disconnect J31 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J311 (Y), J312 (M), J313 (C) or J324 (K) from the connector CRUM. Is each cable of J31 <=> J311, J312, J313 or J324 continuous? Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 2.

End of work

Go to step 3.

End of work

Go to step 4.

End of work

Go to step 5.

Replace the HARN ASSY TONER CRUM

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

End of work

2-29

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.8
Step

Non-Xerox Toner (Y)


Check Remedy Yes No

Possible causative parts: CONNECTOR CRUM (PL5.1.14) TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) (PL5.1.24) HARN ASSY TONER CRUM (PL5.1.26) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) 1 2 Close the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR correctly. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the Toner Type Is the Xerox Toner seated? Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the connector for connection Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and CONNECTOR CRUM. Are P/J31 and P/J311 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector(s) P/J31 and/or P/J311 surly, then go to step 6. Go to step 2. Go to step 3. End of work Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y).

Go to step 4.

End of work

Go to step 5.

End of work

Go to step 7.

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the HARN ASSY TONER CRUM for continuity Disconnect J31 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J311 from the CONNECTOR CRUM. Is each cable of J31 <=> J311 continuous? Checking the power to CONNECTOR CRUM Disconnect J31 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P31-3pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC?

Go to step 7.

End of work Replace the HARN ASSY TONER CRUM. Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 8.

Replace the CONNECTOR CRUM. (Refer to REP5.6)

2-30

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.9
Step

Non-Xerox Toner (M)


Check Remedy Yes No

Possible causative parts: CONNECTOR CRUM (PL5.1.14) TONER CARTRIDGE (M) (PL5.1.23) HARN ASSY TONER CRUM (PL5.1.26) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) 1 2 Close the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR correctly. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the Toner Type Is the Xerox Toner seated? Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGE (M) Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGE (M), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (M) Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (M), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the connector for connection Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and CONNECTOR CRUM. Are P/J31 and P/J312 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector(s) P/J31 and/or P/J312 surly, then go to step 6. Go to step 2. Go to step 3. End of work Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (M).

Go to step 4.

End of work

Go to step 5.

End of work

Go to step 7.

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the HARN ASSY TONER CRUM for continuity Disconnect J31 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J312 from the CONNECTOR CRUM. Is each cable of J31 <=> J312 continuous? Checking the power to CONNECTOR CRUM Disconnect J31 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P31-7pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC?

Go to step 7.

End of work Replace the HARN ASSY TONER CRUM. Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 8.

Replace the CONNECTOR CRUM. (Refer to REP5.6)

2-31

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.10 Non-Xerox Toner (C)


Step Check Possible causative parts: CONNECTOR CRUM (PL5.1.14) TONER CARTRIDGE (C) (PL5.1.22) HARN ASSY TONER CRUM (PL5.1.26) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) 1 2 Close the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR correctly. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the Toner Type Is the Xerox Toner seated? Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGE (C) Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGE (C), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (C) Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (C), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the connector for connection Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and CONNECTOR CRUM. Are P/J31 and P/J313 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector(s) P/J31 and/or P/J313 surly, then go to step 6. Go to step 2. Go to step 3. End of work Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (C). Remedy Yes No

Go to step 4.

End of work

Go to step 5.

End of work

Go to step 7.

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the HARN ASSY TONER CRUM for continuity Disconnect J31 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J313 from the CONNECTOR CRUM. Is each cable of J31 <=> J313 continuous? Checking the power to CONNECTOR CRUM Disconnect J31 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P31-11pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC?

Go to step 7.

End of work Replace the HARN ASSY TONER CRUM. Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 8.

Replace the CONNECTOR CRUM. (Refer to REP5.6)

2-32

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.11 Non-Xerox Toner (K)


Step Check Possible causative parts: CONNECTOR CRUM (PL5.1.14) TONER CARTRIDGE (K) (PL5.1.21) HARN ASSY TONER CRUM (PL5.1.26) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) 1 2 Close the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR correctly. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the Toner Type Is the Xerox Toner seated? Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGE (K) Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGE (K), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (K) Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (K), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the connector for connection Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and CONNECTOR CRUM. Are P/J31 and P/J314 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector(s) P/J31 and/or P/J314 surly, then go to step 6. Go to step 2. Go to step 3. End of work Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (B). Remedy Yes No

Go to step 4.

End of work

Go to step 5.

End of work

Go to step 7.

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the HARN ASSY TONER CRUM for continuity Disconnect J31 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J314 from the CONNECTOR CRUM. Is each cable of J31 <=> J314 continuous? Checking the power to CONNECTOR CRUM Disconnect J31 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P31-15pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC?

Go to step 7.

End of work Replace the HARN ASSY TONER CRUM. Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 8.

Replace the CONNECTOR CRUM. (Refer to REP5.6)

2-33

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.12 Replace Yellow/Replace Magenta/Replace Cyan/Replace Black/Yellow Low/Magenta Low/Cyan Low/Black Low
Step Check Possible causative parts: TONER CARTRIDGE (K) (PL5.1.21) TONER CARTRIDGE (C) (PL5.1.22) TONER CARTRIDGE (M) (PL5.1.23) TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) (PL5.1.24) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) 1 Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y/M/C/K) Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y/M/C/K). Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11) End of work Remedy Yes No

2-34

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.13 Waste Full


Step Check Possible causative parts: TONER CARTRIDGE (PL5.1.21/5.1.22/5.1.23/5.1.24) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) Checking the waste toner counter Is the counter going to reach the replacement time? Checked by [Parameter] - [Life Y/M/C/K Waste Toner] in diagnosis. Checking the error Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE. Does the error still occur when turning of and on the power? Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE. Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11) Remedy Yes No

Go to step 2.

End of work.

2-35

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.14 Check Manual Feed


Step Check Possible causative parts: HARN ASSY L SIDE (PL3.1.18) ROLL ASSY REGI (PL3.2.9) ROLL REGI METAL (PL3.2.10) SENSOR PHOTO (PL3.2.13) ACTUATOR SSI (PL3.2.14) SPRING REGI R M (PL3.2.24) SPRING REGI L M (PL3.2.29) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) 1 2 Was a paper pulled out from SSI forcibly? Checking the printing Reload a paper to SSI. Does the error still occur when printing? Checking after opening and closing the COVER ASSY FRONT Open and close the COVER ASSY FRONT, and then latch correctly. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL for shape and operation Remove the PHD ASSY once to check the followings. Are ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL seated correctly? Are they not contaminated and/or damaged, and rotated smoothly? Check these items by turning with your finger. Checking the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL for contacting Is the ROLL REGI METAL surely contacted with the ROLL ASSY REGI by the spring force on both sides of the ROLL REGI METAL? Check this item with your finger. Checking the ACTUATOR SSI for shape and operation Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the operation. Are the shape and operation of the ACTUATOR SSI normal? Checking the SSI No Paper Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) for operation Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the operation. Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the actuator (ACTUATOR SSI) of the SSI No Paper Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) is operated? Checked by [Digital Input] - [Manual Feeder Sensor] in diagnosis. Go to step 2. Go to step 3. Go to step 3. End of work Remedy Yes No

Go to step 4.

End of work

Go to step 5.

Clean or replace the defective ROLL(s).

Go to step 6.

Replace the SPRING REGI R M and/or SPRING REGI L M. Reseat the ACTUATOR SSI. If broken or damaged, replace the ACTUATOR SSI.

Go to step 7.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 8.

2-36

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Step Check Checking the connectors of the SENSOR PHOTO (SSI No Paper Sensor) for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and SENSOR PHOTO. Are P/J23 and P/J233 connected correctly 8 Go to step 10. Remedy Yes No

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J23 and/or P/J233 correctly, then go to step 9.

Does the error still occur when printing? Checking the HARN ASSY L SIDE for continuity Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J233 from the SENSOR PHOTO. Is each cable of J23 <=> J233 continuous? Checking the power to the SENSOR PHOTO Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P23-6pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC? Checking the SENSOR PHOTO for operation Check the voltage across J23-8pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU. Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the operation. Does the voltage change, when the actuator of the SENSOR PHOTO is operated?

Go to step 10.

End of work Replace the HARN ASSY L SIDE.

10

Go to step 11.

11

Go to step 12.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

12

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Replace the SENSOR PHOTO.(Refer to REP3.10)

2-37

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.15 Jam at Front (MPT Insert Jam)


Step Check Possible causative parts: HARNESS ASSY L SIDE (PL3.1.18) SENSOR PHOTO (PL3.2.13) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) 1 Checking the customer operation Did the customer insert the paper to the SSI during print? Checking the SSI No Paper Sensor for operation Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the actuator (ACTUATOR SSI) is operated by paper. Checked by [Sensor Check] - [Tray 1 MPT Sensor] in diagnosis. Checking the error Does the error still occur when printing? Checking the connectors of the SSI No Paper Sensor for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and SSI No Paper Sensor. Are P/J23 and P/J233 connected correctly Reconnect the connector(s) P/J23 and/or P/J233 correctly, then go to step 5. After print completion, insert Go to step 2. the paper to the SSI. Remedy Yes No

Go to step 3.

Go to step 4.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

End of work

Go to step 6.

Does the error still occur when printing? Checking the HARN ASSY L SIDE for continuity Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J233 from the SENSOR PHOTO. Is each cable of J23 <=> J233 continuous? Checking the power to the SENSOR PHOTO Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P23-6pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC?

Go to step 6.

End of work Replace the HARN ASSY L SIDE.

Go to step 7.

Go to step 8.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Checking the SENSOR PHOTO for operation Check the voltage across J23-8pin <=> ground on the PWBA Replace the PWBA MCU. MCU. (Refer to Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the REP8.11) operation. Does the voltage change, when the ACTUATOR SSI is operated?

Replace the SENSOR PHOTO.(Refer to REP3.10)

2-38

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.16 Jam at Front (Regi On Off Jam)


Step Check Possible causative parts: CLUTCH ASSY DRV (PL3.1.1) HARN ASSY L SIDE (PL3.1.18) ROLL ASSY REGI (PL3.2.8) ROLL REGI METAL (PL3.2.10) SENSOR PHOTO (PL3.2.13) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HAR ASSY KSNR REGCL (PL9.1.9) 1 Checking the error Clear the jammed paper. Does the error still occur when printing? Checking the paper setting Was the paper correctly set to Tray? Does the error still occur when printing? Checking the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL for contacting Is the ROLL REGI METAL surely contacted with the ROLL ASSY REGI by the spring force on both sides of the ROLL REGI METAL? Check this item with your finger. Checking the Regi Clutch (CLUTCH ASSY DRV) for operation Does the Regi Clutch operate properly? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Regi Clutch] in diagnosis. Checking the Regi. Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) for operation Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the actuator (ACTUATOR REGI IN) of the Regi. Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) is operated? Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the operation. Checked by [Digital Input] - [Regi Sensor] in diagnosis. Checking the connectors of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV (Regi Clutch) for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and CLUTCH ASSY DRV (Regi Clutch). Are P/J26 and P/J262 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector(s) P/J26 and/or P/J262 correctly. Go to step 2. End of work. Set the paper correctly, and go to step 3. End of work. Replace the SPRING REGI R M and/or SPRING REGI L M. Remedy Yes No

2 3

Go to step 4. Go to step 4.

Go to step 5.

Go to step 6.

Go to step 7.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 11.

Go to step 8.

2-39

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Step Check Checking the HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL for continuity Disconnect J26 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect P262 from the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. Is each cable of J26 <=> P262 continuous? Checking the power to the CLUTCH ASSY DRV Disconnect J26 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P26-4pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the Interlock Switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed? Checking the CLUTCH ASSY DRV for resistance Disconnect P/J262 of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. Is the resistance across J262-1 and J262-2 approximately 280ohm? Checking the connectors of the SENSOR PHOTO (Regi Sensor) for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and SENSOR PHOTO. Are P/J23 and P/J232 connected correctly? Remedy Yes No Replace the HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL.

Go to step 9.

Go to step 10.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

10

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Replace the CLUTCH ASSY DRV.

11

Go to step 12.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J23 and/or P/J232 correctly.

12

Checking the HARN ASSY L SIDE for continuity Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J232 from the SENSOR PHOTO. Is each cable of J23 <=> J232 continuous? Checking the power to the SENSOR PHOTO Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P23-3pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC? Checking the SENSOR PHOTO for operation Check the voltage across 23-5pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU. Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the operation. Does the voltage change, when the actuator of the SENSOR PHOTO is operated?

Go to step 13.

Replace the HARN ASSY L SIDE.

13

Go to step 14.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

14

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Replace the SENSOR PHOTO.(Refer to REP3.12)

2-40

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.17 Jam at Exit


Step Check Possible causative parts: FUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1) HARN ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.2) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) 1 Checking the paper feeding Was a paper fed from SSI? Checking the paper setting Was the paper correctly set to SSI without slant? Does the error still occur when printing? Checking the paper condition Is the paper wrinkled or damaged? Does the error still occur when printing? Checking after reloading a new paper Reload a new paper. Does the error still occur when printing? Checking the COVER ASSY FRONT for latching Open and close the COVER ASSY FRONT, and then latch correctly. Does the error still occur when printing? Checking the FUSER ASSY Are there any remaining paper and/or foreign substance in the FUSER ASSY? Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Checking after reseating the FUSER ASSY Reseat the FUSER ASSY. Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Does the error still occur when printing? Checking the Exit Sensor for operation Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the actuator of the Exit Sensor in the FUSER ASSY is operated? Checked by [Digital Input] - [Exit Sensor] in diagnosis. Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Go to step 2. Go to step 4. Set the paper to SSI correctly, and go to step 3. End of work Remedy Yes No

2 3

Go to step 4. Go to step 4. Replace the paper with a new and dry one, then go to step 5. Go to step 7. Go to step 7.

Go to step 6.

5 6

End of work End of work

Go to step 8.

End of work

Remove the paper and/or substance, then go to step 9.

Go to step 9.

Go to step 10.

End of work

10

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 11.

2-41

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Step Check Checking the connectors of the Exit Sensor in the FUSER ASSY for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and FUSER ASSY. Are P/J17 and P/J171 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector(s) P/J17 and/or P/J171 correctly. Remedy Yes No

11

Go to step 12.

12

Checking the HARN ASSY FUSER for continuity Remove the FUSER ASSY. Disconnect J17 from the PWBA MCU. Is each cable of J17 <=> P171 continuous? NOTE: P171 is attached to the frame. Checking the power to the Exit Sensor in the FUSER ASSY Disconnect the connector of J17 on the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across J17-1pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC? Checking the Exit Sensor for operation Check the voltage across J17-3pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU. Does the voltage change, when the actuator of the Exit Sensor is operated?

Go to step 13.

Replace the HARN ASSY FUSER.

13

Go to step 14.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

14

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Replace the FUSER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.1)

2-42

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.18 Jam at Exit


Step Check Possible causative parts: FUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1) HARNESS ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.2) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) 1 Checking the error Clear the jammed paper. Does the error still occur when printing? Checking the paper setting Was the paper correctly set to SSI or CASSETTE1? Does the error still occur when printing? Checking the FUSER ASSY installation Reseat the FUSER ASSY. Does the error still occur when printing? Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Checking the FUSER ASSY Are there any remaining paper and/or foreign substance in the FUSER ASSY? Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Does the error still occur when printing? Checking the COVER ASSY FRONT for latching Open and close the COVER ASSY FRONT, and then latch correctly. Does the error still occur when printing? Checking the Exit Sensor for operation Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the actuator of the Exit Sensor in the FUSER ASSY is operated? Checked by [Digital Input] - [Exit Sensor] in diagnosis. Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Checking the connectors of the Exit Sensor in the FUSER ASSY for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and FUSER ASSY. Are P/J17 and P/J171 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector(s) P/J17 and/or P/J171 correctly. Go to step 2. End of work. Set the paper correctly, and go to step 3. End of work. Remedy Yes No

2 3

Go to step 4. Go to step 4.

Go to step 5.

End of work.

Remove the paper and/or substance, go to step 6. Go to step 7.

Go to step 7.

End of work.

Go to step 8.

End of work.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 9.

Go to step 10.

2-43

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Step Check Checking the HARN ASSY FUSER for continuity Remove the FUSER ASSY. Disconnect J17 from the PWBA MCU. Is each cable of J17 <=> P171 continuous? NOTE: P171 is attached to the frame. Checking the power to the Exit Sensor in the FUSER ASSY Disconnect the connector of J17 on the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across J17-1pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC? Checking the Exit Sensor for operation Check the voltage across J17-3pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU. Does the voltage change, when the actuator of the Exit Sensor is operated? Remedy Yes No

10

Go to step 11.

Replace the HARN ASSY FUSER.

11

Go to step 12.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

12

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Replace the FUSER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.1)

2-44

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.19 Jam at Manual Feed


Step Check Possible causative parts: CLUTCH ASSY DRV (PL3.1.1) HARN ASSY L SIDE (PL3.1.18) ACTUATOR REGI ROLL (PL3.2.8) SENSOR PHOTO (PL3.2.13) ACTUATOR SSI (PL3.2.14) DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HARN ASSY MAIN MOT (PL9.1.7) HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL (PL9.1.9) Checking the paper size Does the using paper size meet the specification? Does the error still occur when printing? Checking the paper condition Is the paper in the SSI wrinkled or damaged? Does the error still occur when printing? Checking after reloading a new paper Reload a new paper in the SSI. Does the error still occur when printing? Checking the COVER ASSY FRONT for latching Open and close the COVER ASSY FRONT, and then latch correctly. Does the error still occur when printing? Use the paper that meets the specifications, then go to step 2. End of work Remedy Yes No

Go to step 3.

Go to step 3. Replace the paper with a new and dry one, then go to step 4. Go to step 6. Go to step 6.

Go to step 5.

4 5

End of work End of work

Go to step 7.

End of work

Checking the paper lead edge staying position Does the paper lead edge stay before the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL?

Go to step 8.

The paper lead edge stay after the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL, then go to step 13. End of work

Checking after resetting the guide sides of the SSI Reset the side guides. Does the error still occur when printing? Checking the paper transfer path between the SSI paper loading window and Regi.Sensor Are there any obstacles on the paper transfer path? Does the error still occur when printing? Checking the ACTUATOR SSI for shape and operation Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the operation. Are the shape and operation of the ACTUATOR SSI normal?

Go to step 9. Remove the obstacles or stain from the paper transfer path, then go to step 10. Go to step 11.

Go to step 11.

10

End of work Reseat the ACTUATOR SSI. If broken or damaged, replace the ACTUATOR SSI.

11

Go to step 12.

2-45

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Step Check Checking the SSI No Paper Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) for operation Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the operation. Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the actuator (ACTUATOR SSI) of the SSI No Paper Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) is operated? Checked by [Digital Input] - [Manual Feeder Sensor] in diagnosis. Checking the Regi. Clutch (CLUTCH ASSY DRV) for operation, and ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL for rotation Enter the [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis, and then enter the [Regi Clutch]. Does the Regi. Clutch (CLUTCH ASSY DRV) operate properly, and the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL rotate? During this check, cheat the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK). Checking the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL for shape and operation Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the shape and operation. Are the shape and operation of the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL normal? Checking the Regi. Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) for operation Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL is operated? Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the operation. Checked by [Digital Input] - [Regi Sensor] in diagnosis. Checking the connectors of the SENSOR PHOTO (SSI No Paper Sensor) for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and SENSOR PHOTO (SSI No Paper Sensor). Are P/J23 and P/J233 connected correctly 16 Go to step 18. Remedy Yes No

12

Go to step 13.

Go to step 16.

13

Go to step 14.

Go to step 25.

14

Go to step 15.

Reseat the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL. If broken or deformed, replace it with a new one.

15

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 21.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J23 and/or P/J233 correctly, then go to step 17.

17

Does the error still occur when printing? Checking the HARN ASSY L SIDE for continuity Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J233 from the SENSOR PHOTO. Is each cable of J23 <=> J233 continuous? Checking the power to the SENSOR PHOTO Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P23-6pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC?

Go to step 18.

End of work Replace the HARN ASSY L SIDE.

18

Go to step 19.

19

Go to step 20.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

2-46

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Step Check Remedy Yes No Replace the SENSOR PHOTO.(Refer to REP3.10)

20

Checking the SENSOR PHOTO for operation Check the voltage across J23-8pin <=> ground on the PWBA Replace the PWBA MCU. MCU. (Refer to Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the REP8.11) operation. Does the voltage change, when the ACTUATOR SSI is operated? Checking the connectors of the SENSOR PHOTO (Regi Sensor) for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and SENSOR PHOTO. Are P/J23 and P/J232 connected correctly?

21

Go to step 22.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J23 and/or P/J232 correctly.

22

Checking the HARN ASSY L SIDE for continuity Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J232 from the SENSOR PHOTO. Is each cable of J23 <=> J232 continuous? Checking the power to the SENSOR PHOTO Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P23-3pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC? Checking the SENSOR PHOTO for operation Check the voltage across J23-5pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU. Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the operation. Does the voltage change, when the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL is operated?

Go to step 23.

Replace the HARN ASSY L SIDE.

23

Go to step 24.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

24

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Replace the SENSOR PHOTO.(Refer to REP3.12)

2-47

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Step Check Checking the connectors of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV (Regi Clutch) for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and CLUTCH ASSY DRV. Are P/J26 and P/J262 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector(s) P/J26 and/or P/J262 correctly. Remedy Yes No

25

Go to step 26.

26

Checking the HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL for continuity Disconnect J26 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect P262 from the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. Is each cable of J26 <=> P262 continuous? Checking the power to the CLUTCH ASSY DRV Disconnect J26 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P26-4pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the Interlock Switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed? Checking the CLUTCH ASSY DRV for resistance Disconnect P/J262 of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. Is the resistance across J262-1 and J262-2 approximately 280ohm?

Go to step 27.

Replace the HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL.

27

Go to step 28.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11) Replace the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. (Refer to REP3.1)

28

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

2-48

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.20 Jam at Reg. Roll


Step Check Possible causative parts: CLUTCH ASSY DRV (PL3.1.1) HARN ASSY L SIDE (PL3.1.18) ACTUATOR REGI ROLL (PL3.2.8) ROLL ASSY REGI (PL3.2.9) ROLL REGI METAL (PL3.2.10) ACTUATOR REGI IN (PL3.2.11) SENSOR PHOTO (PL3.2.13) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HARN ASSY MAIN MOT (PL9.1.7) HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL (PL9.1.9) Checking the paper size Does the using paper size meet the specification? Does the error still occur when printing? Checking the paper condition Is the paper wrinkled or damaged? Does the error still occur when printing? Checking after reloading a new paper Reload a new paper. Does the error still occur when printing? Checking the COVER ASSY FRONT for latching Open and close the COVER ASSY FRONT, and then latch correctly. Does the error still occur when printing? Checking around the Regi Sensor Are there any remaining paper and/or foreign substance around the Regi Sensor? Does the error still occur when printing? Use the paper that meets the specifications, then go to step 2. End of work Remedy Yes No

Go to step 3.

Go to step 3. Replace the paper with a new and dry one, then go to step 4. Go to step 6. Go to step 6.

Go to step 5.

4 5

End of work End of work

Go to step 7.

End of work

7 8

Remove the paper and/or substance, then go to step 8. Go to step 9. Remove the remaining paper. If the belt is damaged, replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3)

Go to step 9. End of work

Checking the TRANSFER ASSY Are there any remaining paper and/or damage on the belt of the TRANSFER ASSY?

Go to step 10.

10

Checking the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL for shape and operation Remove the PHD ASSY once to check the followings. Are ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL seated correctly? Also, are they not contaminated and/or damaged, and rotated smoothly? Check these items by turning with your finger.

Go to step 11.

Clean or replace the defective ROLL(s).

2-49

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Step Check Checking the ACTUATOR REGI IN and ACTUATOR REGI ROLL for shape and operation Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the following. Are the shape and operation of the ACTUATOR REGI IN and ACTUATOR REGI ROLL normal? Checking the Regi. Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) for operation Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the actuator (ACTUATOR REGI IN) of the Regi. Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) is operated? Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the operation. Checked by [Digital Input] - [Regi Sensor] in diagnosis. Remedy Yes No Reseat the ACTUATOR REGI IN and/or ACTUATOR REGI ROLL. If broken or deformed, replace it or they.

11

Go to step 12.

12

Go to step 13.

Go to step 16.

13

Checking the Main Motor (DRIVE ASSY MAIN) for operation Does the Main Motor (DRIVE ASSY MAIN) operate properly? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis. Go to step 14. During this check, cheat the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK). Checking the Regi. Clutch (CLUTCH ASSY DRV) for operation, and ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL for rotation Enter the [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis, and then enter the [Regi Clutch]. Does the Regi. Clutch (CLUTCH ASSY DRV) operate properly, and the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL rotate? During this check, cheat the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK). Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 24.

14

Go to step 15.

Go to step 20.

15

Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3)

End of work

2-50

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Step Check Checking the connectors of the SENSOR PHOTO (Regi Sensor) for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and SENSOR PHOTO. Are P/J23 and P/J232 connected correctly? Remedy Yes No

16

Go to step 17.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J23 and/or P/J232 correctly.

17

Checking the HARN ASSY L SIDE for continuity Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J232 from the SENSOR PHOTO. Is each cable of J23 <=> J232 continuous? Checking the power to the SENSOR PHOTO Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P23-3pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC? Checking the SENSOR PHOTO for operation Check the voltage across 23-5pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU. Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the operation. Does the voltage change, when the actuator of the SENSOR PHOTO is operated?

Go to step 18.

Replace the HARN ASSY L SIDE.

18

Go to step 19.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

19

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Replace the SENSOR PHOTO.(Refer to REP3.12)

2-51

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Step Check Checking the connectors of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV (Regi Clutch) for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and CLUTCH ASSY DRV (Regi Clutch). Are P/J26 and P/J262 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector(s) P/J26 and/or P/J262 correctly. Remedy Yes No

20

Go to step 21.

21

Checking the HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL for continuity Disconnect J26 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect P262 from the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. Is each cable of J26 <=> P262 continuous? Checking the power to the CLUTCH ASSY DRV Disconnect J26 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P26-4pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the Interlock Switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed? Checking the CLUTCH ASSY DRV for resistance Disconnect P/J262 of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. Is the resistance across J262-1 and J262-2 approximately 280ohm? Checking the connectors for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and DRIVE ASSY MAIN (Main Motor). Are P/J21 and P/J211 connected correctly?

Go to step 22.

Replace the HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL.

22

Go to step 23.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11) Replace the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. (Refer to REP3.1)

23

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

24

Go to step 25.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J21 and/or P/J211 correctly.

25

Checking the HARN ASSY MAIN MOT for continuity Disconnect J21 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J211 from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. Is each cable of J21 <=> J211 continuous? Checking the power to the DRIVE ASSY MAIN Disconnect J21 from the PWBA MCU. Are the voltages across J21-2pin/J21-4pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed?

Go to step 26.

Replace the HARN ASSY MAIN MOT.

26

Replace the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. (Refer to REP7.2)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

2-52

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.21 Jam at Tray


Step Check Possible causative parts: CASSETTE ASSY 250 (PL2.1.1) HOLDER ASSY RETARD (PL2.1.5) CLUTCH ASSY DRV (PL3.1.1) SOLENOID FEED (PL3.1.9) HARN ASSY L SIDE (PL3.1.18) ROLL ASSY FEED (PL3.2.4) ACTUATOR REGI ROLL (PL3.2.8) ACTUATOR REGI IN (PL3.2.11) SENSOR PHOTO (PL3.2.13) DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HARN ASSY MAIN MOT (PL9.1.7) HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL (PL9.1.9) Checking the paper condition Is the paper in the Tray 1 wrinkled or damaged? Does the error still occur when printing? Checking after reloading a new paper Reload a new paper in the Tray 1. Does the error still occur when printing? Checking the COVER ASSY FRONT for latching Open and close the COVER ASSY FRONT, and then latch correctly. Does the error still occur when printing? Replace the paper with a new and dry one, then go to step 2. Go to step 3. Go to step 4. Remedy Yes No

Go to step 3.

2 3

End of work End of work

Go to step 5.

End of work

Checking the Main Motor (DRIVE ASSY MAIN) for operation Does the Main Motor (DRIVE ASSY MAIN) operate properly? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis. Go to step 6. During this check, cheat the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK). Checking the DRIVE ASSY PH for operation Does the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL rotate properly? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Regi Clutch] and [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis. During this check, cheat the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK). Checking the paper feeding position Is the paper not fed from the CASSETTE1? Checking after resetting the Guide Sides and End Guide on the CASSETTE1 Reset the Guide Sides and End Guide, and reseat the CASSETTE1 to the printer correctly. Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 18.

Go to step 7.

Go to step 29.

Go to step 8.

Go to step 12.

Go to step 9.

End of work

2-53

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Step Check Checking the HOLDER ASSY RETARD on the Tray 1 for shape and rotation Pull the Tray 1 out from the printer. Is the HOLDER ASSY RETARD not contaminated and/or damaged, and rotated smoothly? Checking the ROLL ASSY FEED for shape and rotation Pull the CASSETTE1 out from the printer. Is the ROLL ASSY FEED not contaminated and/or damaged, and rotated smoothly? Checking the Cassette Feed Solenoid (SOLENOID FEED) for operation Does the Cassette Feed Solenoid (SOLENOID FEED) operate properly? Checked by [Digital Output] - [CASSETTE1 Feed SOLENOID (Auto OFF)] in diagnosis. During this check, cheat the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK). Remedy Yes No Replace the HOLDER ASSY RETARD. (Refer to REP2.3) Replace the ROLL ASSY FEED. (Refer to REP3.8)

Go to step 10.

10

Go to step 11.

11

Replace the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (Refer to REP2.1)

Go to step 21.

12

Checking the paper lead edge staying position Does the paper lead edge stay before the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL?

Go to step 13.

The paper lead edge stay after the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL, then go to step 16.

13

Checking the paper transfer path between the ROLL ASSY FEED and ROLL ASSY REGI. Are there any obstacles on the paper transfer path? Checking the ACTUATOR REGI IN for shape and operation Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the shape and operation. Are the shape and operation of the ACTUATOR REGI IN normal? Checking the Regi. Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) for operation Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the actuator (ACTUATOR REGI IN) is operated? Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the operation. Checked by [Digital Input] - [Regi Sensor] in diagnosis. Checking the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL for shape and operation Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the shape and operation. Are the shape and operation of the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL normal? Checking the Regi. Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) for operation Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the actuator (ACTUATOR REGI IN) is operated? Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the operation. Checked by [Digital Input] - [Regi Sensor] in diagnosis.

Remove the obstacles or stains from the paper transfer path.

Go to step 14.

14

Go to step 15.

Reseat the ACTUATOR REGI IN. If broken or deformed, replace it.

15

Go to step 16.

Go to step 25.

16

Go to step 17.

Reseat the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL. If broken or deformed, replace it with a new one.

17

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 25.

2-54

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Step Check Checking the connectors for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and DRIVE ASSY MAIN (Main Motor). Are P/J21 and P/J211 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector(s) P/J21 and/or P/J211 correctly. Remedy Yes No

18

Go to step 19.

19

Checking the HARN ASSY MAIN MOT for continuity Disconnect J21 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J211 from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. Is each cable of J21 <=> J211 continuous? Checking the power to the DRIVE ASSY MAIN Disconnect J21 from the PWBA MCU. Are the voltages across J21-2pin/J21-4pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed? Checking the connectors of the SOLENOID FEED (Cassette Feed Solenoid) for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and SOLENOID FEED. Are P/J23 and P/J231 connected correctly?

Go to step 20.

Replace the HARN ASSY MAIN MOT.

20

Replace the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. (Refer to REP7.2)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

21

Go to step 22.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J23 and/or P/J231 correctly.

22

Checking the HARN ASSY L SIDE for continuity Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect P231 from the SOLENOID FEED. Is each cable of J23 <=> P231 continuous? Checking the power to the SOLENOID FEED Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P23-1pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the Interlock Switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed? Checking the SOLENOID FEED for resistance Disconnect P/J231 of the SOLENOID FEED. Is the resistance across J231-1 and J231-2 about 96 ohm?

Go to step 23.

Replace the HARN ASSY L SIDE.

23

Go to step 24.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11) Replace the KIT SOLENOID FEED. (Refer to REP3.7)

24

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

2-55

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Step Check Checking the connectors of the SENSOR PHOTO (Regi Sensor) for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and SENSOR PHOTO. Are P/J23 and P/J232 connected correctly? Remedy Yes No

25

Go to step 26.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J23 and/or P/J232 correctly.

26

Checking the HARN ASSY L SIDE for continuity Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J232 from the SENSOR PHOTO. Is each cable of J23 <=> J232 continuous? Checking the power to the SENSOR PHOTO Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P23-3pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC? Checking the SENSOR PHOTO for operation Check the voltage across J23-5pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU. Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the operation. Does the voltage change, when the actuator (ACTUATOR REGI IN) is operated?

Go to step 27.

Replace the HARN ASSY L SIDE.

27

Go to step 28.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

28

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Replace the SENSOR PHOTO.(Refer to REP3.12)

2-56

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Step Check Checking the connectors of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV (Regi Clutch) for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and CLUTCH ASSY DRV. Are P/J26 and P/J262 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector(s) P/J26 and/or P/J262 correctly. Remedy Yes No

29

Go to step 30.

30

Checking the HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL for continuity Disconnect J26 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect P262 from the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. Is each cable of J26 <=> P262 continuous? Checking the power to the CLUTCH ASSY DRV Disconnect J26 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P26-4pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the Interlock Switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed? Checking the CLUTCH ASSY DRV for resistance Disconnect P/J262 of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. Is the resistance across J262-1 and J262-2 approximately 280ohm?

Go to step 31.

Replace the HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL.

31

Go to step 32.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11) Replace the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. (Refer to REP3.1)

32

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

2-57

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.22 MPC Error 016-738,016-739,016-740


Step Check Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9) MULTI PROTOCOL CARD (OPTION) (PL8.1.11) Checking the MPC Is the MPC installed on the PWBA ESS? Checking the download MULTI PROTOCOL CARD firmware Is the download firmware the 6130N? Checking the MPC installation Reseat the MPC. Does the error still occur when downloading the firmware? Checking the PWBA ESS installation Reseat the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Does the error still occur when downloading the firmware? Checking after replacing the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD Replace the MPC. Does the error still occur when downloading the firmware? Install the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD. (Refer to REP8.4) Redownload the correct firmware. End of work Remedy Yes No

Go to step 2.

Go to step 3.

Go to step 4.

Go to step 5. Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

End of work

End of work

2-58

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.23 MPC Error 018-310,018-311,018-312,018-313,018-314,018315,018-316,018-317,116-333


Step Check Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9) MULTI PROTOCOL CARD (OPTION) (PL8.1.11) Reseat the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD(Refer to REP8.4), then go to step 2. End of work End of work Remedy Yes No

Checking the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD for installation Is the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD installed correctly?

Go to step 2.

2 3

Does the error still occur when the power is turned ON? Checking after replacing the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD Replace the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD. Does the error still occur when the power is turned ON?

Go to step 3. Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

2-59

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.24 CTD Sensor Error 092-310


Step Check Possible causative parts: HARN ASSY L SIDE (PL3.1.18) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) Checking the ADC Sensor Window Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Is the ADC Sensor window dirty?
ADC Sensor window

Remedy Yes No

Go to step 2.

Go to step 3.

Wsb01012GA

Turn off the power, and gently wipe the ADC Sensor window with a clean dry cloth or cotton swab. After wiping the window, close the COVER ASSY FRONT. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the belt of the TRANSFER ASSY Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Is there any damage on the belt surface of the TRANSFER ASSY? Checking the connectors for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and TRANSFER ASSY. Are P/J28 and P/J281 connected correctly?

Go to step 3.

End of work

Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3)

Go to step 4.

Go to step 6.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J28 and/or P/J281 correctly, then go to step 5.

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the HARN ASSY L SIDE for continuity Disconnect J281 from the TRANSFER ASSY. Disconnect J28 from the PWBA MCU. Is each cable of J281 <=> J28 continuous? Checking the power to the ADC Sensor Disconnect J28 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P28-1pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +5 VDC?

Go to step 6.

End of work Replace the HARN ASSY L SIDE.

Go to step 7.

Replace the ADC Sensor or TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

2-60

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.25 DTB Life Over 094-330/Transfer Life


Step Possible causative parts: PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) 1 Checking the life counter value of the PHD ASSY Does the life count value show the near of the end? Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) CAUTION: Be sure to pull eight sealing tapes out from a new PHD ASSY before installation. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Go to step 3. Go to step 2. Check Remedy Yes No

End of work

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

End of work

2-61

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.26 Check Unit/CTD Sensor/PHD ASSY Life


Step Check Possible causative parts: HARN ASSY L SIDE (PL3.1.18) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) Turn OFF the power, and gently wipe the ADC Sensor window with a clean dry cloth or cotton swab. After wiping the window, close the COVER ASSY FRONT. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?
ADC Sensor window

Remedy Yes No

Go to step 2.

End of work

Wsb01012GA

Checking the connectors for connection Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and ADC Sensor. Are P/J28 and P/J281 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector(s) P/J28 and/or P/J281 correctly, then go to step 3.

Go to step 4.

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the HARN ASSY L SIDE for continuity Disconnect J28 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J281 from the TRANSFER ASSY. Is each cable of J28 <=> J281 continuous? Checking the surface of the belt on the TRANSFER ASSY Is the belt dirty? Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after replacing the TRANSFER ASSY Replace the TRANSFER ASSY or ADC Sensor. (Refer to REP6.3) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 4.

End of work Replace the HARN ASSY L SIDE.

Go to step 5.

5 6

Clean the belt with a clean dry cloth, then go to step 6. Go to step 7. Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 7. End of work

End of work

2-62

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.27 Insert PHD ASSY


Step Check Possible causative parts: PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HARN ASSY PHD XPRO (PL9.1.11) 1 Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the connectors for connection Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and PHD ASSY. Are P/J42 and P/J422 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector(s) P/J42 and/or P/J422 surly, then go to step 3. Go to step 2. End of work Remedy Yes No

Go to step 4.

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the HARN ASSY PHD XPRO for continuity Disconnect P422 from the PHD ASSY. Disconnect J42 from the PWBA MCU. Is each cable of P422 <=> J42 continuous? Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) CAUTION: Be sure to pull eight sealing tapes out from a new PHD ASSY before installation. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 4.

End of work Replace the HARN ASSY PHD XPRO.

Go to step 5.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

End of work

2-63

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.28 Low Density Yellow Cartridge


Step Check Possible causative parts: PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1) FRAME ASSY MOT (PL5.1.2) MOTOR ASSY DISP (PL5.1.3) GEAR IDLER (PL5.1.6) GEAR IDLER AUG (PL5.1.7) GEAR IDLER AGI (PL5.1.8) TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) (PL5.1.24) HARN ASSY TNR MOT (PL5.1.25) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) Checking the life count value of the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) Check the life count value of the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) in [Parameters] on the diagnosis. Does the remainder value shows the near of the end? (Refer to Chapter 2 for details of the life counter value.) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the sealing tapes for yellow toner of the PHD ASSY staying Turn off the power, and open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Remove the PHD ASSY. Has the sealing tapes for yellow toner been pulled out? After checking, reseat the PHD ASSY. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) Remove the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y), and shake it from side to side. Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the TNR (Y) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) for rotation Does the TNR (Y) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) function normally? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Yellow Toner Motor] in diagnosis. During this check, cheat the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK). Checking the gears of the DISPENSER ASSY for shape and operation Are the shape and operation of the gears of the DISPENSER ASSY normal? 7 Go to step 12. Replace the defective gear(s) or DISPENSER ASSY. (Refer to REP5.1) Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y), then go to step 2. (Refer to REP5.7) Go to step 3. Remedy Yes No

Go to step 3.

End of work

Go to step 5.

Pull the sealing tapes out, then go to step 4.

Go to step 5.

End of work

Go to step 6.

End of work

Go to step 7.

Go to step 8.

Gear
Wsb01014GA

2-64

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Step Check Checking the connector for connection Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and TNR (Y) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP). Are P/J18 and P/J181 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector(s) P/J18 and/or P/J181 surly, then go to step 9. Remedy Yes No

Go to step 10.

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the HARN ASSY TNR MOT for continuity Disconnect J18 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J181 from the TNR (Y) MOT. Is each cable of J18 <=> J181 continuous? Checking the power to TNR (Y) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) Disconnect J18 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P18-3pin <= > ground on PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed. Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 10.

End of work Replace the HARN ASSY TNR MOT.

10

Go to step 11.

11

Replace the MOTOR ASSY DISP or FRAME ASSY MOT. (Refer to REP5.3 and 5.2)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

12

Go to step 13.

End of work

13

Go to step 14. Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3)

End of work

14

End of work

2-65

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.29 Low Density MagentaCartridge


Step Check Possible causative parts: PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1) FRAME ASSY MOT (PL5.1.2) MOTOR ASSY DISP (PL5.1.3) GEAR IDLER (PL5.1.6) GEAR IDLER AUG (PL5.1.7) GEAR IDLER AGI (PL5.1.8) TONER CARTRIDGE (M) (PL5.1.23) HARN ASSY TNR MOT (PL5.1.25) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) Checking the life count value of the TONER CARTRIDGE (M) Check the life count value of the TONER CARTRIDGE (M) in [Parameters] on the diagnosis. Does the remainder value shows the near of the end? (Refer to Chapter 2 for details of the life counter value.) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the sealing tapes for magenta toner of the PHD ASSY staying Turn off the power, and open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Remove the PHD ASSY. Has the sealing tapes for magenta toner been pulled out? After checking, reseat the PHD ASSY. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGE (M) Remove the TONER CARTRIDGE (M), and shake it from side to side. Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGE (M), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (M), then go to step 2. (Refer to REP5.7) Go to step 3. Remedy Yes No

Go to step 3.

End of work

Go to step 5.

Pull the sealing tapes out, then go to step 4.

Go to step 5.

End of work

Go to step 6.

End of work

Checking the TNR (M) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) for rotation Does the TNR (M) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) function normally? Go to step 7. Checked by [Digital Output] - [Magenta Toner Motor] in diagnosis. During this check, cheat the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK).

Go to step 8.

2-66

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Step Check Checking the gears of the DISPENSER ASSY for shape and operation Are the shape and operation of the gears of the DISPENSER ASSY normal? 7 Go to step 12. Replace the defective gear(s) or DISPENSER ASSY. (Refer to REP5.1) Remedy Yes No

Gear
Wsb01016GA

Checking the connector for connection Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and TNR (M) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP). Are P/J18 and P/J182 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector(s) P/J18 and/or P/J182 surly, then go to step 9.

Go to step 10.

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the HARN ASSY TNR MOT for continuity Disconnect J18 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J182 from the TNR (M) MOT. Is each cable of J18 <=> J182 continuous? Checking the power to TNR (M) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) Disconnect J18 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P18-8pin <= > ground on PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed. Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (M) Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (M), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 10.

End of work Replace the HARN ASSY TNR MOT.

10

Go to step 11.

11

Replace the MOTOR ASSY DISP or FRAME ASSY MOT. (Refer to REP5.3 and 5.2)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

12

Go to step 13.

End of work

13

Go to step 14. Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3)

End of work

14

End of work

2-67

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.30 Low Density Cyan Cartridge


Step Check Possible causative parts: PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1) FRAME ASSY MOT (PL5.1.2) MOTOR ASSY DISP (PL5.1.3) GEAR IDLER (PL5.1.6) GEAR IDLER AUG (PL5.1.7) GEAR IDLER AGI (PL5.1.8) TONER CARTRIDGE (C) (PL5.1.22) HARN ASSY TNR MOT (PL5.1.25) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) Checking the life count value of the TONER CARTRIDGE (C) Check the life count value of the TONER CARTRIDGE (C) in [Parameters] on the diagnosis. Does the remainder value shows the near of the end? (Refer to Chapter 2 for details of the life counter value.) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the sealing tapes for cyan toner of the PHD ASSY staying Turn off the power, and open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Remove the PHD ASSY. Has the sealing tapes for cyan toner been pulled out? After checking, reseat the PHD ASSY. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGE (C) Remove the TONER CARTRIDGE (C), and shake it from side to side. Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGE (C), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the TNR (C) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) for rotation Does the TNR (C) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) function normally? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Cyan Toner Motor] in diagnosis. During this check, cheat the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK). Checking the gears of the DISPENSER ASSY for shape and operation Are the shape and operation of the gears of the DISPENSER ASSY normal? Replace the defective gear(s) or DISPENSER ASSY. (Refer to REP5.1) Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (C), then go to step 2. (Refer to REP5.7) Go to step 3. Remedy Yes No

Go to step 3.

End of work

Go to step 5.

Pull the sealing tapes out, then go to step 4.

Go to step 5.

End of work

Go to step 6.

End of work

Go to step 7.

Go to step 8.

Go to step 12.

Gear
Wsb01018GA

2-68

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Step Check Checking the connector for connection Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and TNR (C) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP). Are P/J19 and P/J191 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector(s) P/J19 and/or P/J191 surly, then go to step 9. Remedy Yes No

Go to step 10.

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the HARN ASSY TNR MOT for continuity Disconnect J19 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J191 from the TNR (C) MOT. Is each cable of J19 <=> J191 continuous? Checking the power to TNR (C) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) Disconnect J19 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P19-4pin <= > ground on PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed. Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (C) Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (C), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 10.

End of work Replace the HARN ASSY TNR MOT.

10

Go to step 11.

11

Replace the MOTOR ASSY DISP or FRAME ASSY MOT. (Refer to REP5.3 and 5.2)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

12

Go to step 13.

End of work

13

Go to step 14. Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3)

End of work

14

End of work

2-69

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.31 Low Density Black Cartridge


Step Check Possible causative parts: PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1) FRAME ASSY MOT (PL5.1.2) MOTOR ASSY DISP (PL5.1.3) GEAR IDLER (PL5.1.6) GEAR IDLER AUG (PL5.1.7) GEAR IDLER AGI (PL5.1.8) TONER CARTRIDGE (K) (PL5.1.21) HARN ASSY TNR MOT (PL5.1.25) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) Checking the life count value of the TONER CARTRIDGE (K) Check the life count value of the TONER CARTRIDGE (K) in [Parameters] on the diagnosis. Does the remainder value shows the near of the end? (Refer to Chapter 2 for details of the life counter value.) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the sealing tapes for black toner of the PHD ASSY staying Turn off the power, and open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Remove the PHD ASSY. Has the sealing tapes for black toner been pulled out? After checking, reseat the PHD ASSY. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGE (K) Remove the TONER CARTRIDGE (K), and shake it from side to side. Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGE (K), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the TNR (K) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) for rotation Does the TNR (K) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) function normally? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Black Toner Motor] in diagnosis. During this check, cheat the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK). Checking the gears of the DISPENSER ASSY for shape and operation Are the shape and operation of the gears of the DISPENSER ASSY normal? 7 Go to step 12. Replace the defective gear(s) or DISPENSER ASSY. (Refer to REP5.1) Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (K), then go to step 2. (Refer to REP5.7) Go to step 3. Remedy Yes No

Go to step 3.

End of work

Go to step 5.

Pull the sealing tapes out, then go to step 4.

Go to step 5.

End of work

Go to step 6.

End of work

Go to step 7.

Go to step 8.

Gear
Wsb01020GA

2-70

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Step Check Checking the connector for connection Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and TNR (K) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP). Are P/J19 and P/J192 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector(s) P/J19 and/or P/J192 surly, then go to step 9. Remedy Yes No

Go to step 10.

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the HARN ASSY TNR MOT for continuity Disconnect J19 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J192 from the TNR (K) MOT. Is each cable of J19 <=> J192 continuous? Checking the power to TNR (K) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) Disconnect J19 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P19-9pin <= > ground on PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed. Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (K) Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (K), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 10.

End of work Replace the HARN ASSY TNR MOT.

10

Go to step 11.

11

Replace the MOTOR ASSY DISP or FRAME ASSY MOT. (Refer to REP5.3 and 5.2)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

12

Go to step 13.

End of work

13

Go to step 14. Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3)

End of work

14

End of work

2-71

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.32 Replace PHD ASSY/PHD CRUM Error 091-916


Step Check Possible causative parts: PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HARN ASSY PHD XPRO (PL9.1.11) 1 2 3 4 Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the PHD ASSY type Is the seated PHD ASSY for 6130N? Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the connectors for connection Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and PHD ASSY. Are P/J42 and P/J422 connected correctly? Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the HARN ASSY PHD XPRO for continuity Disconnect P422 from the PHD ASSY. Disconnect J42 from the PWBA MCU. Is each cable of P422 <=> J42 continuous? Go to step 2. Go to step 4. Go to step 4. Go to step 5. End of work Replace the PHD ASSY for 6130N, then go to step 3. End of work End of work Reconnect the connector(s) P/J42 and/or P/J422 surly, then go to step 6. End of work Remedy Yes No

Go to step 7.

Go to step 7.

Go to step 8.

Replace the HARN ASSY PHD XPRO.

Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

End of work

2-72

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.33 Insert Output


Step Possible causative parts: Checking the customer operation Did the customer load the paper to the tray? Checking the customer operation Did the customer load the paper to the tray too late? Checking the customer operation Did the customer load the paper to specified tray? Check Remedy Yes No

1 2 3

Go to step 2. Try print again. Go to No paper FIP

Load the paper. Go to step 3. Try print again.

2-73

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.34 Load Manual Feed (Size Mismatch)


Step Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) Checking the paper size Does the using paper size meet the specification? Does the error still occur when printing? Checking the print data, paper (print media) and paper settings Check the followings. - Are the print data and the paper suitable? - Are the paper setting and paper suitable? - Are the paper setting and print data suitable? After checking, correct the incorrect item(s). Does the error still occur when printing? Use the paper that meets the specifications, then go to step 2. End of work Check Remedy Yes No

Go to step 3.

Go to step 3.

Go to step 4.

End of work

Reloading a correct paper to SSI Reload a correct paper to fill the paper setup. Does the error still occur when printing?

Replace the PWBA MCU (Refer to REP8.11), if not, replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

End of work

2-74

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.35 Load Manual Feed (No Suitable Paper)


Step Check Possible causative parts: HARN ASSY L SIDE (PL3.1.18) SENSOR PHOTO (PL3.2.13) ACTUATOR SSI (PL3.2.14) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) Checking the paper for loading and setting Check that the loaded paper meets the print job. Check that the paper setting to require the print job meets the specification. Does the error still occur after reloading the paper and changing the paper settings that requires the print job? Checking after setting the guide sides of the SSI Reset the guide sides. Does the error still occur when printing? Checking after reloading a paper to SSI Reload a correct paper to fill the paper setup. Does the error still occur when printing? Checking the ACTUATOR SSI for shape and operation Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the shape and operation. Are the shape and operation of the ACTUATOR SSI normal? Remedy Yes No

Go to step 2.

End of work

Go to step 3.

End of work

Go to step 4.

End of work Reseat the ACTUATOR SSI. If broken or deformed, replace the ACTUATOR SSI.

Go to step 5.

Checking the SSI No Paper Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) for operation Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the Replace the PWBA operation. MCU. (Refer to Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the actuator REP8.11) (ACTUATOR SSI) of the SSI No Paper Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) is operated? Checked by [Digital Input] - [Manual Feeder Sensor] in diagnosis. Checking the connectors of the SENSOR PHOTO (SSI No Paper Sensor) for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and SENSOR PHOTO. Are P/J23 and P/J233 connected correctly

Go to step 6.

Go to step 8.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J23 and/or P/J233 correctly, then go to step 7.

Does the error still occur when printing? Checking the HARN ASSY L SIDE for continuity Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J233 from the SENSOR PHOTO. Is each cable of J23 <=> J233 continuous?

Go to step 8.

End of work Replace the HARN ASSY L SIDE.

Go to step 9.

2-75

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Step Check Checking the power to the SENSOR PHOTO Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P23-6pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC? Remedy Yes No Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 10.

10

Checking the SENSOR PHOTO for operation Check the voltage across J23-8pin <=> ground on the PWBA Replace the PWBA MCU. MCU. (Refer to Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the REP8.11) operation. Does the voltage change, when the ACTUATOR SSI is operated?

Replace the SENSOR PHOTO.(Refer to REP3.10)

2-76

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.36 Load Tray


Step Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) Checking the paper size Does the using paper size meet the specification? Does the error still occur when printing? Checking the print data, paper (print media) and paper settings Check the followings. - Are the print data and the paper suitable? - Are the paper setting and paper suitable? - Are the paper setting and print data suitable? After checking, correct the incorrect item(s). Does the error still occur when printing? Checking after reloading a paper and the CASSETTE ASSY 250 Reload a correct paper into the CASSETTE ASSY 250. Reseat the CASSETTE ASSY 250 correctly. Does the error still occur when printing? Checking after replacing the PWBA MCU Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11) Does the error still occur when printing? Use the paper that meets the specifications, then go to step 2. End of work Check Remedy Yes No

Go to step 3.

Go to step 3.

Go to step 4.

End of work

Go to step 5.

End of work

Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

End of work

2-77

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.37 Load Tray/Tray Empty


Step Check Possible causative parts: HARN ASSY L SIDE (PL3.1.18) SENSOR PHOTO (PL3.2.13) ACTUATOR NO PAPER (PL3.2.19) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) Checking the paper for loading and setting Check that the loaded paper meets the print job. Check that the paper setting to require the print job meets the specification. Does the error still occur after reloading the paper and changing the paper settings that requires the print job? Checking the ACTUATOR NO PAPER for shape and operation Pull the CASSETTE ASSY 250 out. Are the shape and operation of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER normal? Checking the CST No Paper Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) for operation Pull the CASSETTE ASSY 250 out. Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the actuator (ACTUATOR NO PAPER) of the CST No Paper Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) is operated? Checked by [Digital Input] - [CST NO PAPER] in diagnosis. Checking the connectors of the SENSOR PHOTO (CST No Paper Sensor) for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and SENSOR PHOTO. Are P/J23 and P/J234 connected correctly? Remedy Yes No

Go to step 2.

End of work

Go to step 3.

Reseat the ACTUATOR NO PAPER. If broken or deformed, replace the ACTUATOR NO PAPER.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 4.

Go to step 5.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J23 and/or P/J234 correctly.

Checking the HARN ASSY L SIDE for continuity Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J234 from the SENSOR PHOTO. Is each cable of J23 <=> J234 continuous?

Go to step 6.

Replace the HARN ASSY L SIDE.

2-78

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Step Check Checking the power to the SENSOR PHOTO Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P23-9pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC? Checking the SENSOR PHOTO for operation Check the voltage across J23-11pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU. Does the voltage change, when the ACTUATOR NO PAPER is operated? Remedy Yes No Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11) Replace the SENSOR PHOTO.(Refer to REP3.11).

Go to step 7.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

2-79

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.38 Insert Fuser 010-317


Step Check Possible causative parts: FUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1) HARN ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.2) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) Checking after reseating the FUSER ASSY Reseat the FUSER ASSY. Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the connectors for connection Remove the FUSER ASSY. Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and FUSER ASSY. Are P/J17 and P/J171 connected correctly? 2 Go to step 4. Remedy Yes No

Go to step 2.

End of work

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J17 and/or P/J171 correctly, then go to step 3.

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the HARN ASSY FUSER for continuity Remove the FUSER ASSY. Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Disconnect J17 from the PWBA MCU. Is each cable of J17 <=> P171 continuous? NOTE: P171 is attached to the frame.

Go to step 4.

End of work

Go to step 5.

Replace the HARN ASSY FUSER.

2-80

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Step Check Checking the resistances of Temp. Sensor in the FUSER ASSY Remove the FUSER ASSY. Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Check the resistances across the following pins of the removed FUSER ASSY. J171-5pin <=> J171-4pin J171-6pin <=> J171-8pin J171-6pin <=> J171-7pin Can the resistances be measured? (The resistances are 7 k-ohm at 180 degrees C). Remedy Yes No

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Replace the FUSER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.1) After replacement, be sure to clear the life counter value.

2-81

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.39 Replace Fuser 010-351/Fuser Life


Step Possible causative parts: FUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) Replace the FUSER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.1) After replacement , be sure to clear the life counter value. Check Remedy Yes No

Checking the life counter value of the FUSER ASSY Does the life counter value show the near of the end?

Go to step 2.

Checking after reseating the FUSER ASSY Reseat the FUSER ASSY. Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after replacing the FUSER ASSY Replace the FUSER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.1) Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? NOTE: After replacement, be sure to clear the life counter value.

Go to step 3.

End of work

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

End of work

2-82

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.40 Fuser Error 010-397


Step Check Possible causative parts: FUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1) HARN ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.2) PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HARN ASSY LVPS (PL9.1.3) 1 Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after reseating the FUSER ASSY Reseat the FUSER ASSY. Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the connectors for connection Remove the FUSER ASSY. Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Check the connections between the PWBA MCU (P/J17) and FUSER ASSY (P/J171). Check the connections between the FUSER ASSY (P/J171) and PWBA LVPS (P/J47). Check the connections between the PWBA LVPS (P/J501 and P/ J502) and PWBA MCU (P/J14 and P/J15). Are these connectors connected correctly? Go to step 2. End of work Remedy Yes No

Go to step 3.

End of work

Go to step 5.

"Reconnect the connector(s) P/J17, P/J47, P/J171, P/ J501, P/J502, P/J14 and/or P/J15 correctly, then go to step 4."

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the HARN ASSY FUSER for continuity Disconnect J17 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J47 from the PWBA LVPS. Is each cable of J17 and J47 <=> P171 continuous? NOTE: P171 is attached to the frame. Checking the HARN ASSY LVPS for continuity Disconnect J14 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J501 from the PWBA LVPS. Is each cable of J14 <=> J501 continuous?

Go to step 5.

End of work

Go to step 6.

Replace the HARN ASSY FUSER.

Go to step 7.

Replace the HARN ASSY LVPS.

2-83

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Step Check Checking after replacing the FUSER ASSY Replace the FUSER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.1) Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? NOTE: After replacement, be sure to clear the life counter value. Checking after replacing the PWBA LVPS Replace the PWBA LVPS. (Refer to REP8.6) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Remedy Yes No

Go to step 8.

End of work

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

End of work

2-84

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.41 Fan Motor Error 042-313


Step Check Possible causative parts: FAN MAIN (PL8.1.1) PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HARN ASSY LVPS (PL9.1.3) 1 Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the FAN MAIN for rotation Does the FAN MAIN function normally? Checked by [Digital Ouput] - [Fan (HIGH)] in diagnosis. During this check, close the COVER ASSY FRONT. Check the connection between the FAN MAIN and PWBA LVPS. Is P/J503 on PWBA LVPS connected correctly? Go to step 2. Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11) End of work Remedy Yes No

Go to step 3.

Go to step 5.

Reconnect the connector P/J503 correctly, then go to step 4.

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Check the connections between the PWBA LVPS and PWBA MCU. Are P/J501 and P/J14 connected correctly?

Go to step 5.

End of work

Go to step 7.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J501 and P/J14 correctly, then go to step 6.

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the HARN ASSY LVPS for continuity Disconnect J501 from the PWBA LVPS. Disconnect J14 from the PWBA MCU. Is each cable of J501 <=> J14 continuous?

Go to step 7.

End of work Replace the HARN ASSY LVPS.

Go to step 8.

2-85

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Step Check Checking the power to the FAN MAIN Disconnect J503 from the PWBA LVPS. Is the voltage across P503-1pin <=> ground on the PWBA LVPS, about +24 VDC when the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed? Replace the FAN MAIN. (Refer to REP8.1) Remedy Yes No

Go to step 9.

Checking after replacing the PWBA LVPS Replace the PWBA LVPS. (Refer to REP8.6) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

End of work

2-86

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.42 Motor Error 042-325


Step Check Possible causative parts: DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HARN ASSY MAIN MOT (PL9.1.7) 1 2 Does the error occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Go to step 2. Go to step 3. End of work End of work Remedy Yes No

Checking the Main Motor for rotation Replace the PWBA Does the Main Motor function normally? MCU. (Refer to Checked by [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis. REP8.11) During this check, close the COVER ASSY FRONT. Checking the connectors of the MAIN MOTOR for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and DRIVE ASSY MAIN. Are P/J21 and P/J211 connected correctly?

Go to step 4.

Go to step 6.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J21 and/or P/J211 correctly, then go to step 5.

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the HARN ASSY MAIN MOT for continuity Disconnect J21 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J211 from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. Is each cable of J21 <=> J211 continuous? Checking after reseating the DRIVE ASSY MAIN Reseat the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the power to the DRIVE ASSY MAIN Disconnect J21 from the PWBA MCU. Are the voltages across J21-2pin/J21-4pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed?

Go to step 6.

End of work Replace the HARN ASSY MAIN MOT.

Go to step 7.

Go to step 8.

End of work

Replace the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. (Refer to REP7.2)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

2-87

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.43 Motor Error 042-326


Step Check Possible causative parts: DRIVE ASSY SUB (PL7.1.1) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HARN ASSY SUB MOT (PL9.1.8) 1 Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after reseating the FUSER ASSY and PHD ASSY Reseat the FUSER ASSY and PHD ASSY. Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the Sub Motor for rotation Does the Sub Motor function normally? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Sub Motor FULL2] in diagnosis. During this check, close the COVER ASSY FRONT. Checking the connectors of the SUB MOTOR for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and DRIVE ASSY SUB. Are P/J22 and P/J221 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector(s) P/J22 and/or P/J221 correctly, then go to step 5. Go to step 2. End of work Remedy Yes No

Go to step 3.

End of work

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 4.

Go to step 6.

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the HARN ASSY SUB MOT for continuity Disconnect J22 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J221 from the DRIVE ASSY SUB. Is each cable of J22 <=> J221 continuous? Checking after reseating the DRIVE ASSY SUB Reseat the DRIVE ASSY SUB. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the power to the DRIVE ASSY SUB Disconnect J22 from the PWBA MCU. Are the voltages across J22-2pin/J22-4pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed?

Go to step 6.

End of work Replace the HARN ASSY SUB MOT.

Go to step 7.

Go to step 8.

End of work.

Replace the DRIVE ASSY SUB. (Refer to REP7.1)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

2-88

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.44 Check Unit


Step Possible causative parts: PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) Checking the sealing tapes of the PHD ASSY staying Turn off the power, and open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Remove the PHD ASSY. Has the sealing tapes (total eight sealing tapes) been pulled out? After checking, reseat the PHD ASSY correctly. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) CAUTION: Be sure to pull eight sealing tapes out from a new PHD ASSY before installation. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Pull the sealing tapes out, then go to step 2. End of work Check Remedy Yes No

Go to step 3.

Go to step 3. Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

End of work

2-89

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.45 Front Cover Open


Step Check Possible causative parts: COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7) PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1) HARN ASSY INTERLOCK (PL8.2.5) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HARN ASSY LVPS (PL9.1.3) Checking the COVER ASSY FRONT (Front Cover) for shape Are there any damages on the COVER ASSY FRONT? Replace the COVER ASSY FRONT. (Refer to REP1.7) Remedy Yes No

Go to step 2.

Checking the COVER ASSY FRONT for latching Open and close the COVER ASSY FRONT. Is the COVER ASSY FRONT latched correctly? Checking the interlock switch for operation Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the COVER ASSY FRONT is closed and opened? Checked by [Digital Input] - [IL OPEN] in diagnosis. Checking the connectors for connection Check the connections between PWBA MCU and PWBA LVPS. Are P/J14 and P/J501 connected correctly?

Go to step 3.

Reseat or replace the COVER ASSY FRONT. (Refer to REP1.7)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 4.

Go to step 6.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J14 and/or P/J501 correctly, then go to step 5.

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the HARN ASSY LVPS for continuity Disconnect J14 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J501 from the PWBA LVPS. Is each cable of J14 <=> J501 continuous?

Go to step 6.

End of work Replace the HARN ASSY LVPS.

Go to step 7.

2-90

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Step Check Checking the power to the Interlock Switch Disconnect the connector of J44 on the PWBA LVPS. Is the voltage across P44-1 <=> ground on the PWBA LVPS, about +24 VDC? Replace the PWBA LVPS. (Refer to REP8.6) Remedy Yes No

Go to step 8.

Checking the Interlock Switch for operation Replace the PWBA Check the voltage across P44-3pin <=> ground on the PWBA LVPS. (Refer to LVPS. Does the voltage change, when the Interlock Switch is turned ON/ REP8.6) OFF?

Replace the HARN ASSY INTERLOCK. (Refer to REP8.7)

2-91

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.46 Side Door Open


Step Check Possible causative parts: COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR (PL1.1.5) SWITCH (PL5.1.9) HARN ASSY SIDE SW (PL5.1.27) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) Checking the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR (Side Cover) for shape Are there any damages on the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR? Checking the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR for latching Open and close the COVER ASSY WINDOW TRN. Is the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR latched correctly? Checking the Side R Switch (SWITCH) for operation Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the COVER ASSY WINDOW TRN is closed and opened? Checked by [Digital Input] - [Side Switch] in diagnosis. Checking the HARN ASSY SIDE SW for continuity Disconnect J29 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J291 from the SIDE R SWITCH. Is each cable of J29 <=> J291 continuous? Replace the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (Refer to REP1.5) Remedy Yes No

Go to step 2.

Go to step 3.

Reseat or replace the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (Refer to REP1.5)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 4.

Go to step 5.

Replace the HARN ASSY SIDE SW.

Checking after replacing the Side R Switch (SWITCH) Replace the Side R Switch (SWITCH). (Refer to REP5.4) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

End of work

2-92

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.47 MCU Firmware Err 024-340


Step Possible causative parts: PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) 1 Does the error still occur after several ON/OFF procedures of the power? Checking the firmware version Is the firmware the latest version? Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after replacing the PWBA MCU Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the external noise Are there any other electrical appliances within 3 meters form the printer, such as generators, radio and appliances with motors? Either turn off the other electrical appliances, or relocate the printer at least 6 meters away from other appliances. Does the electrical noise error still occur? Checking the AC ground Is AC power supply outlet wired and grounded appropriately? Checking the TRANSFER ASSY for connection Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Are four HV terminals on the TRANSFER ASSY, and four springs on the frame (PL4.1.11, 12, 13 and 14) dirty and/or deformed? Checking the PHD ASSY for connection Remove the PHD ASSY. Are five HV terminals on the PHD ASSY, and five springs on the frame (PL4.1.10 and PL4.1.15 to 18) dirty and/or deformed? Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Does the electrical noise error still occur? Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Does the electrical noise error still occur? Go to step 2. End of work *1 Upgrade the firmware, then go to step 3. End of work *1 Check Remedy Yes No

Go to step 3.

Go to step 4.

Go to Electrical Noise.

End of work

Go to step 6.

End of work

Go to step 7.

Request the client to fix AC power supply outlet.

Clean or replace the TRANSFER ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 8.

Clean and/or replace the PHD ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 9.

Go to step 10. Reseat the PWBA HVPS. (Refer to REP4.3)

End of work

10

End of work

2-93

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.48 MCU NVRAM Error 041-340


Step Check Possible causative parts: TONER CARTRIDGE (PL5.1.21/5.1.22/5.1.23/5.1.24) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) 1 Checking the error Does the error still occur when turning off and on the power? Checking the failure parts Is the "ADDR: 1***" displayed? Checking the failure parts Is the "ADDR: 30**" displayed? Checking the failure parts Is the "ADDR: 31**" displayed? Checking the failure parts Is the "ADDR: 32**" displayed? Checking the failure parts Is the "ADDR: 33**" displayed? Go to step 2. Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11) Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3) Replace the Yellow Toner Cartridge. Replace the Magenta Toner Cartridge. Replace the Cyan Toner Cartridge. End of work Remedy Yes No

Go to step 3.

Go to step 4.

Go to step 5.

Go to step 6. Replace the Black Toner Cartridge.

2-94

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.49 Laser Error 061-370


Step Check Possible causative parts: ROS ASSY (PL4.1.1) HARN ASSY ROS RE (PL4.1.22) HARN ASSY ROS VIDEO (PL4.1.23) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) 1 2 Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after reseating the ROS ASSY Reseat the ROS ASSY. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Check the connections between the ROS ASSY and PWBA MCU. Are P/J40, P/J41, P/J411 and P/J412 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector(s) P/J40, P/J41, P/J411 and/or P/J412 correctly, then go to step 5. Go to step 2. Go to step 3. End of work End of work Remedy Yes No

Go to step 4.

End of work

Go to step 6.

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the HARN ASSY ROS RE for continuity Disconnect P/J40 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect P/J411 from the ROS ASSY. Is each cable of J40 <=> J411 continuous? Checking the HARN ASSY ROS VIDEO for continuity Disconnect J41 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J412 from the ROS ASSY. Is each cable of J41 <=> J412 continuous? Checking after replacing the ROS ASSY Replace the ROS ASSY. (Refer to REP4.7) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 6.

End of work Replace the HARN ASSY ROS RE.

Go to step 7.

Go to step 8.

Replace the HARN ASSY ROS VIDEO.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

End of work

2-95

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.50 MCU Comm. Error 024-371


Step Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HARN ASSY ESS (PL9.1.1) 1 2 Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after reseating the PWBA ESS and PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA ESS and PWBA MCU. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the connectors for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and PWBA ESS. Are P/J10 and P/J101 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector(s) P/J10 and/or P/J101 correctly, then go to step 4. Go to step 2. Go to step 3. End of work End of work Check Remedy Yes No

Go to step 5.

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the HARN ASSY ESS for continuity Disconnect J10 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J101 from the PWBA ESS. Is each cable of J10 <=> J101 continuous? Checking after replacing the PWBA ESS Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 5.

End of work Replace the HARN ASSY ESS.

Go to step 6.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

End of work

2-96

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.51 Invalid User 016-757


Step Possible causative parts: Please request the registration to your system administrator, then go to step 2. End of work Connect your PC with printer surely, then go to step 4. End of work Check Remedy Yes No

Checking your account registration Is your account registered in your network?

Go to step 3.

2 3

Does the error still occur when printing? Checking connection Is your PC surely connected with the printer via network?

Go to step 3. Please consult your system administrator. Please consult your system administrator.

Does the error still occur when printing?

2-97

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.52 Disabled Func 016-758


Step Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9) 1 2 Checking the power of the printer Is the power of the printer turned ON? Does the error still occur when printing? Go to step 3. Go to step 3. Turn ON the power of the printer, and go to step 2. End of work Please inquire to your system administrator, or check this operation by the User Guide. Connect your PC with printer surely, then go to step 5. End of work End of work Check Remedy Yes No

Checking your operation Is the operation that you did an available function for 6130N?

Go to step 4.

4 5 6

Checking connection Is your PC surely connected with the printer? Does the error still occur when printing? Checking after reseating the PWBA ESS Reseat the PWBA ESS. Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 6. Go to step 6. Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

2-98

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.53 Limit Exceeded 016-759


Step Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9) 1 2 3 Check the [Print Auditron] setting Does the value of [User Registration] exceed the limitation? Maximum user is five. Does the error still occur when printing? Checking the PWBA ESS installation Reseat the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Does the error still occur when printing? Reset to 5 or less and go to step 2. Go to step 3. Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Go to step 3. End of work. End of work. Check Remedy Yes No

2-99

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.54 Invalid Job 016-799


Step Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9) Checking the paper size Does the paper size in use meet the specifications? Does the error still occur when printing? Checking the paper size setup Does the using paper size match the printer setup value? Setup the paper size through your PC. Does the error still occur when printing? Checking the printing job Does the error still occur when printing the Windows test print? Use the paper that meets the specifications, then go to step 2. End of work Go to step 4. Check Remedy Yes No

Go to step 3.

2 3

Go to step 3. Go to step 5. Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

End of work Check that the printing data is correct.

2-100

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.55 Download Mode 024-360


Step Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9) 1 Checking the download firmware Is the download firmware the 6130N? Checking the PWBA ESS installation Reseat the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Does the error still occur when downloading the firmware? Go to step 2. Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Redownload the correct firmware. End of work Check Remedy Yes No

2-101

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.56 K Mode Sol Error 042-372


Step Check Possible causative parts: DRIVE ASSY PH (PL7.1.4) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL (PL9.1.9) 1 2 Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the K Mode Solenoid (Color Mode Switching Solenoid) for operation Does the K Mode Solenoid function normally? Checked by [Digital Output] - [K Mode Solenoid] in diagnosis. During this check, close the COVER ASSY FRONT. Does the K Mode Solenoid click sound arise from the DRIVE ASSY PH, when the K Mode Solenoid check is performed? Checking after reseating the DRIVE ASSY PH Reseat the DRIVE ASSY PH. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the connector of the K Mode Solenoid in the DRIVE ASSY PH for connection Check the connection between the PWBA MCU and K Mode Solenoid. Is P/J24 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector P/J24 correctly, then go to step 6. Go to step 2. Go to step 3. End of work End of work Remedy Yes No

Go to step 4.

Go to step 5.

Go to step 9.

End of work

Go to step 7.

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the power to the K Mode Solenoid Disconnect J24 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P24-1pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the Interlock Switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed? Checking the K Mode Solenoid for resistance Disconnect P/J24 from the PWBA MCU. Is the resistance across J24-1 and J24-2 about 80 to 110-ohm?

Go to step 7.

End of work Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11) Replace the DRIVE ASSY PH. (Refer to REP7.4)

Go to step 8.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

2-102

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Step Check Checking the connectors of the K Mode Sensor in the DRIVE ASSY PH for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and K Mode Sensor. Are P/J26 and P/J261 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector(s) P/J26 and/or P/J261 correctly, then go to step 10. Remedy Yes No

Go to step 11.

10

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL for continuity Disconnect J26 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J261 from the K Mode Sensor. Is each cable of J26 <=> J261 continuous? Checking the power to the K Mode Sensor Disconnect J26 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P26-1pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC? Checking the K Mode Sensor for operation Remove the DRIVE ASSY PH from the printer once, but P/J261 and P/J24 should be connected. Enter the [Digital Input] - [K Mode Sensor] in diagnosis. During this check, close the COVER ASSY FRONT. Does the voltage change, when a piece of paper is inserted into the gap of the K Mode Sensor?

Go to step 11.

End of work Replace the HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL. Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

11

Go to step 12.

12

Go to step 13.

13

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Replace the DRIVE ASSY PH. (Refer to REP7.4)

2-103

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.57 Env Sensor Error 092-661


Step Check Possible causative parts: SENSOR HUM (PL8.2.7) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HARN ASSY HUM (PL9.1.6) 1 2 Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking after reseating the SENSOR HUM Reseat the SENSOR HUM. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the HARN ASSY HUM for continuity Disconnect J20 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J201 from the SENSOR HUM. Is each cable of J20 <=> J201 continuous? Go to step 2. Go to step 3. End of work End of work Remedy Yes No

Go to step 4.

Replace the HARN ASSY HUM.

Checking the power to SENSOR HUM Disconnect the connector of J20 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P20-4pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +5 VDC?

Replace the SENSOR HUM. (Refer to REP8.8)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

2-104

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 Abnormal Noise Trouble

2.4 Abnormal Noise Trouble


2.4.1 Entry Chart for Abnormal Noise Troubleshooting

Does abnornal noise arise during adjustment after Power ON? Y N

Check the Operation Mode Table of Power ON. Check the components are normal without any stains and/or damages. (Refer to FIP-1.N1)

Does abnormal noise arise during Standby? N

Check the Operation Mode Table of Standby. Check the components are normal without any stains and/or damages. (Refer to FIP-1.N2)

Does abnormal noise arise during printing?

Check the Operation Mode Table of Printing. Check the components are normal without any stains and/or damages. (Refer to FIP-1.N3)

2-105

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 Abnormal Noise Trouble

2.4.2 Operation Mode Table FIP-1.N1 When Power is Turned On


Step Check Possible causative parts: PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) FUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) DRIVE ASSY SUB (PL7.1.1) DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2) 1 Checking the Main Motor Does the noise arise from the printer? Go to step 2. Checked by [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis. Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Go to step 3. Does the noise arise from the printer? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis. Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Go to step 4. Does the noise arise from the printer? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis. Try replacing the PHD ASSY (Refer to REP4.4), Checking after reseating the DRIVE ASSY MAIN TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. (Refer to REP6.3) Does the noise arise from the printer? and DRIVE ASSY Checked by [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis. MAIN (Refer to REP7.2) one after another. Checking the Sub Motor Does the noise arise from the printer? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Sub Motor FULL2] in diagnosis. Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Does the noise arise from the printer? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Sub Motor FULL2] in diagnosis. Checking after reseating the FUSER ASSY Reseat the FUSER ASSY. Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Does the noise arise from the printer? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Sub Motor FULL2] in diagnosis. Go to step 6. Go to step 5. Remedy Yes No

End of work

End of work

End of work

Check the installation situation of printer.

Go to step 7.

End of work

Go to step 8.

End of work

2-106

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 Abnormal Noise Trouble
Step Check Remedy Yes Try replacing the PHD ASSY (Refer to REP4.4), FUSER ASSY (Refer to REP6.1) and DRIVE ASSY SUB (Refer to REP7.1) one after another. No

Checking after reseating the DRIVE ASSY SUB Reseat the DRIVE ASSY SUB. Does the noise arise from the printer? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Sub Motor FULL2] in diagnosis.

End of work

2-107

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 Abnormal Noise Trouble

FIP-1.N2 During Standby


Step Possible causative parts: FAN MAIN (PL8.1.1) PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1) 1 Checking the FAN MAIN Does the noise arise from the Fan? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Fan (High)] in diagnosis. Replace the FAN MAIN. (Refer to REP8.1) Replace the PWBA LVPS. (Refer to REP8.6) Check Remedy Yes No

2-108

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 Abnormal Noise Trouble

FIP-1.N3 During Printing


Step Check Possible causative parts: HOLDER ASSY RETARD (PL2.1.5) ROLL ASSY FEED (PL3.2.4) ROLL ASSY REGI (PL3.2.9) ROLL REGI METAL (PL3.2.10) PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) FUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) DRIVE ASSY SUB (PL7.1.1) DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2) FAN MAIN (PL8.1.1) 1 Checking the paper feeding Does the noise arise from the printer when the paper is fed from the Tray 1? Checking the paper condition in the Paper Cassette Is the paper dry and recommended paper? Checking noise when the paper is fed from the Tray 1 Does the noise arise from the printer? Checking the HOLDER ASSY RETARD in the Paper Cassette for rotation Remove the Paper Cassette from the printer. Does the SEPARATOR ROLLER rotate smoothly? Turning it with your finger. Checking the ROLL ASSY FEED for rotation Remove the Paper Cassette from the printer. Enter the [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis, and then enter the [Cassette Feed SOLENOID (Auto OFF)]. Does the noise arise from this Roller? NOTE: After checking is completed, turn off [Cassette Feed SOLENOID (Auto OFF)] check first, and then turn off [Main Motor FULL2] check. Checking the paper guide sides setting and paper setting of SSI Were the paper guide sides of SSI correctly set, and was the paper correctly inserted into SSI? Go to step 2. Go to step 6. Replace the paper with a new dry and recommended one, then go to step 3. End of work Replace the HOLDER ASSY RETARD. (Refer to REP2.3) Remedy Yes No

Go to step 4.

Go to step 4.

Go to step 5.

Replace the ROLL ASSY FEED. (Refer to REP3.8)

Go to step 9.

Go to step 7.

Reset the paper guide sides, and correctly insert the paper to SSI, then go to step 7. Replace the paper with a new dry and recommended one, then go to step 8. End of work

Checking the paper condition Is the paper dry and recommended paper? Checking noise when the paper is fed from the SSI Does the noise arise from the printer?

Go to step 9.

Go to step 9

Checking the Main Motor Does the noise arise from the printer? Go to step 10. Checked by [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis.

Go to step 16.

2-109

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 Abnormal Noise Trouble
Step Check Remedy Yes No

10

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Go to step 11. Does the noise arise from the printer? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis. Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Go to step 12. Does the noise arise from the printer? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis. Checking the foreign substances on the surfaces of the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL Are there any foreign substances on the surfaces of these parts? Checking noise when printing Does the noise arise from the printer? Checking the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL for rotation Enter the [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis, and then enter the [Regi Clutch]. Does the noise arise from the Roller(s)? Remove the foreign substances, then go to step 13. Go to step 14. Replace the ROLL ASSY REGI and/or ROLL REGI METAL. Try replacing the PHD ASSY (Refer to REP4.4), TRANSFER ASSY (Refer to REP6.3) and DRIVE ASSY MAIN (Refer to REP7.2) one after another. Go to step 17.

End of work

11

End of work

12

Go to step 14.

13

End of work

14

Go to step 15.

15

Checking the DRIVE ASSY MAIN for installation Reseat the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. Does the noise arise from the printer? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Sub Motor FULL2] in diagnosis.

End of work

16

Checking the Sub Motor Does the noise arise from the printer? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Sub Motor FULL2] in diagnosis. Checking the PHD ASSY for installation Reseat the PHD ASSY. Does the noise arise from the printer? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Sub Motor FULL2] in diagnosis. Checking the FUSER ASSY for installation Reseat the FUSER ASSY. Does the noise arise from the printer? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Sub Motor FULL2] in diagnosis.

Check the installation situation of the printer.

17

Go to step 18.

End of work

18

Go to step 19.

End of work

19

Checking the DRIVE ASSY SUB for installation Reseat the DRIVE ASSY SUB. Does the noise arise from the printer? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Sub Motor FULL2] in diagnosis.

Try replacing the PHD ASSY (Refer to REP4.4), FUSER ASSY (Refer to REP6.1) and DRIVE ASSY SUB (Refer to REP7.1) one after another.

End of work

2-110

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.5 Other FIP

2.5 Other FIP


Other FIP covers the Electrical Noise FIP, Power Supply FIP and Multiple Feed FIP, except Error Code FIP, Abnormal Noise FIP and Image Quality FIP.

FIP-Electrical Noise
Step Check Checking the external noise Are there any other electrical appliances within 3 meters form the printer, such as generators, radio and appliances with motors? Either turn off the other electrical appliances, or relocate the printer at least 6 meters away from other appliances. Does the electrical noise error still occur? Checking the AC ground Is AC power supply outlet wired and grounded appropriately? Checking the TRANSFER ASSY for connection Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Are four HV terminals on the TRANSFER ASSY, and four springs on the frame (PL4.1.11, 12, 13 and 14) dirty and/or deformed? Checking the PHD ASSY for connection Remove the PHD ASSY. Are five HV terminals on the PHD ASSY, and five springs on the frame (PL4.1.10 and PL4.1.15 to 18) dirty and/or deformed? Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Does the electrical noise error still occur? Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Does the electrical noise error still occur? Remedy Yes No

Go to step 2.

End of work

Go to step 3.

Request the client to fix AC power supply outlet.

Clean or replace the TRANSFER ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 4.

Clean and/or replace the PHD ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 5.

Go to step 6. Reseat the PWBA HVPS. (Refer to REP4.3)

End of work

End of work

2-111

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.5 Other FIP

FIP-AC
Step Check Checking the printer Does the motor noise arise when turning on the power? During this test, close the COVER ASSY FRONT. Checking the power supply on wall outlet Connect the power cord with other wall outlet. Does the printer operate normally? Checking the power code for connection Reconnect the power cord. Does the printer operate normally? Checking the BREAKER GFI for operation Does the BREAKER GFI operate normally? Checking the connector of PWBA LVPS for connection Disconnect the power cord and wait for one minute. Reconnect the all connectors of PWBA LVPS. Does the printer operate normally? Checking the connector of MAIN SWITCH for connection Disconnect the power cord and wait for one minute. Reconnect the connector of MAIN SWITCH. Does the printer operate normally? Remedy Yes Go to FIP-DC. No Go to step 2.

End of work

Go to step 3.

End of work

Go to step 4.

End of work

Go to step 5.

End of work

Go to step 6.

End of work

Replace the PWBA LVPS. (Refer to REP8.6)

2-112

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.5 Other FIP

FIP-DC
Step Check Checking the connector of the PWBA LVPS for connection Disconnect the power cord and wait for one minute. Reconnect the all connectors of the PWBA LVPS. Does the printer operate normally? Checking the connector of the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL for connection Reconnect the connector (P/J220) of the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL. Does the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL operate normally? Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. Does the printer operate normally? Remedy Yes No

End of work

Go to step 2.

End of work

Go to step 3.

End of work

Replace the PWBA LVPS. (Refer to REP8.6)

2-113

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.5 Other FIP

FIP-Multiple Feed
Note
This multiple feed trouble occurs only when the paper is fed from the Paper Cassette.

Step

Check Possible causative parts HOLDER ASSY RETARD (PL2.1.5) ROLL ASSY FEED (PL3.2.4) ROLL ASSY REGI (PL3.2.9) ROLL REGI METAL (PL3.2.10) Checking the using paper Does the using paper meet the specifications? Does the multi feed still occur when printing? Checking paper condition Is the paper dry and recommended paper? Does the multi feed still occur when printing? Checking the ROLL ASSY FEED and HOLDER ASSY RETARD for rotation Does the ROLL ASSY FEED and HOLDER ASSY RETARD rotate smoothly and operate correctly?

Remedy Yes No

Go to step 3.

Use the paper that meets the specifications, then go to step 2. End of work Replace the paper with a new dry and recommended one, then go to step 4. End of work Replace the ROLL ASSY FEED (Refer to REP3.8) and/or HOLDER ASSY RETARD. (Refer to REP2.3)

Go to step 3.

Go to step 5.

Go to step 5.

End of work

2-114

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode

2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode


2.6.1 Roles of the control panel in Diag.

No. 1 2 3 4 5

Name LCD display <Menu> button <Eject/Set> button <Power Saver> button/lamp <Cancel Job> button

Description Displays the status of the printer, menu options, and messages. Pressed to display the menu screen. Pressed to confirm the menu option selected on the menu screen. This button is used also when printing reports/lists. Pressed to exit the Power Saver mode (Sleep mode). This button/lamp lights when the printer is the Power Saver mode (Sleep mode). Pressed to stop printing. Pressed to advance to the next menu, item, or option. The < > button is used also when using the Secure/Sample Print feature.

< >, < >, < >, < > button

Holding down the < > or < > button scrolls through menus, items, and options in a circular fashion. Pressing the < > and < > buttons simultaneously displays the default values. To use the Secure/Sample Print feature, additional memory of 256 MB or above (optional) must be installed. Blinks or lights when an error occurs. Lights when the printer is ready to print.

7 8

<Error> lamp <Ready> lamp

2.6.2 Entering diag. CE mode


1 2 3 4 Turn off the power. Turn on the power while holding down <> and <> keys. Input a password. ( <> <> <Eject/Set> ) The "CE Mode" and "ESS Diag" are displayed. (Entered the Diag. mode.)

2-115

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode

2.6.3 Selecting Diag. item


The diagnosis setting items are configured as menus, which can be operated with the control panel keys. Arrow keys select menu items and <Eject/Set> key activates functions.

2.6.4 Change method parameters value


For parameter setting, pressing <Eject/Set> key after selecting an item from the menu displays the current setting value of the item. Then a numeric value selected by <> and <> keys are written into the NVM by <Eject/Set> key.

2.6.5 Executing/Exiting Diag. mode


The diagnosis can be executed by as follows. 1 2 A test item is displayed. <Eject/Set> key fixed the test item. The display prompts the user to start the test. Press <Eject/Set> key and start the test.

The diagnosis can be stopped by as follows. 1 2 During the diagnosis test, press <Cancel Job> key. The diagnosis is stopped, and the display indicates the one step higher menu.

Note
If an error occurs during the diag. sequence, the diagnosis displays the error and stops, leaving the remaining items unperformed. Pressing <Cancel Job> or <Eject/Set> key releases the error display, and then the menu items are displayed.

2-116

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode

2.6.6 Diag. mode menu tree


Menu Tree of the CE Mode is as follows.
CE Mode

ESS Diag

All Test CodeROM Test FrontROM Test EEPROM Test DRAM Test MAC+PHY Test ASIC Test Panel Test IOT Test

IOT Diag

Digital Input Digital Output NVM Settings Edit NVM Save NVM to ESS

Load NVM from ESS

Initialize Slave

Print NVM Info

Print Info

Config Page Print Settings

2-117

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode

Installation

Serial No. Tone Correction

Display Counter

HexDump

Pixel Counter

Configuration

Dip Switch 0 Dip Switch 1

Dip Switch 2

Dip Switch 3

Counter Type

Type 1 Type 2

Type 3

Type 4

Print Counter

Dip Color Switch Print0 Dip Switch B/W Print 1

Dip Total Switch Print2

Color Dip Switch Backup 3

Dip B/WSwitch Backup 3

Total Dip Switch Backup 3

Dip Color Switch Error 3

Dip B/W Switch Error3

CopyCounter MtoB

CopyCounter BtoM

Clear All NVM

Clear JobHistory

Clear AuditronPV

2-118

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode

Test Print

No Image IOT Pattern IOT Grid 2 Cyan20% Magenta20% Yellow20% Black20% CMY20% Gradation Toner Palette Stain Check

Parameter

Slow Scan KtoPaper Slow Scan 600M Slow Scan 600Y Slow Scan 600C Fast Scan KtoM Fast Scan KtoY Fast Scan KtoC Fast Scan M-Feed Fast Scan Tray 1 Fast Scan 2 KtoM Fast Scan 2 KtoY Fast Scan 2 KtoC

2-119

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode

Life Y Toner Life M Toner Life C Toner Life K Toner Life Fuser Sheet Life Print Sheet Life DTB Waste Read Initialize Life YwasteToner Life MwasteToner Life CwasteToner Life KwasteToner Life Drum Y Time Life Drum M Time Life Drum C Time Life Drum K Time Life Drum Xero Life Drum Deve K Life Manual Feed Life Tray1 Sheet Print

Exit Mode

Complete Exit

2-120

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode

2.6.7 Contents of a Test


2.6.7.1 CE Mode Diag.
This section describes how to perform each test of the CE Mode Diag. in detail.

2.6.7.2 Executing CE Mode diagnosis


1 2 3 4 5 6 Turn off the power. Turn on the power while holding down <> and <> keys. Input a password. ( <> <> <Eject/Set> ) The "CE Mode" and "ESS Diag" are displayed. (Entered the Diag. mode.) Press <> or <> key to select the test item. Press <Eject/Set> key twice to execute the test.

Note
To exit the test or to returning to one step higher menu, press <Cancel Job> key.

2.6.7.3 ESS Diag


Executes the ESS Diag except the following.

Note
Do not turn off the Main Switch when the ESS Diag Test is executing.

All Test This test executes the all tests of the ESS diagnostic except the MAC+PHY test and Panel Test.

Normal CHECK OK ***: Displays the test name that became error.

Error *** ERROR

(CodeROM/FontROM/EEPROM/DRAM/ASIC/IOT)

2-121

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode
CodeROM Test Calculates the ROM checksum and compares it with the value stored in the ROM. Executes this test when the 116-317 error occurred. Test result: NG (Go to FIP.) OK (Turn off/on the main power.) This test calculates the checksum of the each ROM, and compares it with the valid checksum value stored in the corresponding chip beforehand. When the checksum is identical to the stored value, this test judges the chip is normal.

Normal CHECK OK

Error CodeROM #* ERROR S=xxxx V=yyyy (xxxx:calculated value yyyy:ROM stored value *:0,1)

FontROM Test Calculates the Font ROM checksum and compares it with the value stored in the FontROM. Executes this test when the 116-310 error occurred. Test result: NG (Go to FIP.) OK (Turn off/on the main power.) This test calculates the checksum of the each FontROM, and compares it with the valid checksum value stored in the corresponding chip beforehand. When the checksum is identical to the stored value, this test judges the chip is normal.

Normal CHECK OK

Error FontROM ERROR S=xxxx V=yyyy (xxxx:calculated value yyyy:ROM stored value)

EEPROM Test Performs write/read/verify on the diag. area of the EEPROM. Executes this test when the 116-323, 116-326 and 116-390 errors occurred. Test result: NG (Go to each FIP.) OK (Turn off/on the main power.) The test performs read/write/verify of the test patterns (0xff,0xaa, 0x55 and 0x00) on one byte at every 0x400 from the first address of EEPROM.

Normal CHECK OK

Error EEPROM ID* ERROR (*:1,2)

2-122

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode
DRAM Test Tests OPEN/SHORT with the address line of the DRAM. Performs write/read/verify on the entire DRAM. Executes this test when the 016-718, 116-315, 116-316 and 116-320 errors occurred. Test result: NG (Go to each FIP.) OK (Turn off/on the main power.) When the optional DRAM SIMM is checked and found, it checks the optional memory area. First, the test performs read/write/verify of the increment data for the whole tested area by the word. Then, it performs read/write/verify of the test patterns (0xffffffff, 0xaaaaaaaa, 0x55555555, 0x00000000) for the whole tested area by the word.

Normal CHECK OK

Error DRAM slot* ERROR (*0,1)

MAC+PHY Test MAC: Media Access Control PHY: Physical Layer MAC+PHY Test 1 PHY Internal loopback test MAC+PHY Test 1 External PHY external loopback test Executes this test when the 018-319, 018-320, 116-314, 116-351,116-352 and 116-355 errors occurred. Test result: NG (Go to each FIP.) OK (Turn off/on the main power.)

Normal CHECK OK

Error MAC+PHY ERROR

ASIC Test ASIC register check. Executes this test when the 116-343 error occurred. Test result: NG (Go to FIP.) OK (Turn off/on the main power.)

Normal CHECK OK

Error ASIC ERROR

2-123

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode
Panel Test Tests the LED, LCD and buttons of the control panel. This test checks input and output of the control panel. When buttons are pressed in the manner shown in the following table, the test displays the corresponding contents of the LED and LCD.

Button Eject/Set Menu


Cancel Job

LED - (The test is completed)

LCD Displays "UP" on the LCD. Displays "DOWN" on the LCD. Displays "LEFT" on the LCD. Displays "RIGHT" on the LCD. Displays "SET" on the LCD. Displays "MENU" on the LCD. Displays "CANCEL JOB" on the LCD. Displays "POWER SAVER" on the LCD - (The test is completed)

Power Saver pressed at the same time

: Indicate the left square is Ready LED, the center square is Alarm LED and the right square is Power Saver LED. Not lighting Lighting IOT Test Communication test with the IOT Executes this test when the 024-371 error occurred. Test result: NG (Go to FIP.) OK (Turn off/on the main power.) This test checks communication with the IOT. Then it reads the status register of the IOT to check whether commands can be exchanged with the IOT. It sends the following command to read the status register, and checks whther the appropriate response returns. Read ROM Revision No

Normal CHECK OK

Error IOT ERROR

2-124

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode 2.6.7.4 IOT Diag
Digital Input This function checks whether the sensors and the switches operate normally or not. The Digital Input is performed for all the sensors and the switches. Exit operation of the Digital Input makes the control panel display the IOT diag. function menu. At the start of the Digital Input, number " 0 " is displayed on the control panel. This number is counted up when a sensor or switch is turned on from off, therefore it allows the user to know the component is active. When a paper jam is occurred, or an error message or code is displayed, execute this test to locate the damaged parts. The test will execute the Digital Input codes of the components that are supposed to be faulty from the error details. (Refer to each FIP on Chapter 2.) Test result: NG (Go to each FIP or replace the parts.) OK (Turn off/on the main power.) Executing Digital Input 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Turn off the power. Turn on the power while holding down <> and <> keys. Input a password. ( <> <> <Eject/Set> ) The "CE Mode" and "ESS Diag" are displayed. (Entered the Diag. mode.) Press the <> key to select the "IOT Diag", and then press <Eject/Set> key. Select "Digital Input", and then press <Eject/Set> key. Press <> or <> key to select the test item. Press <Eject/Set> key twice to execute the test. Press the <Cancel Job> key and then <Menu> key to exit your selecting test.

Parameters for the Digital Input are as follows. Diag. Code DI-00 DI-01 DI-02 DI-03 DI-04 DI-06 DI-07 Components Manual Feeder Sensor CST NO PAPER Regi Sensor Exit Sensor K Mode Sensor Side Switch (SIDE SW) Cover Open Sensor (IL OPEN)

2-125

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode

Cover Open Sensor (IL OPEN)

Exit Sensor

Side Switch (SIDE SW)

K Mode Sensor

CST NO PAPER Regi Sensor Manual Fedder Sensor Wsb02605AA

2-126

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode
Checking the Sensor and Switch Sensor and Switch name (Diag. Code) 1 2 3

Confirmation procedures Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode. Execute the Manual Feeder Sensor. Check the sensor.

Console Panel

Manual Feeder Sensor (DI-00)

Digital Input DI-00 OFF ON

Digital Input DI-00 L - 00

Wsb02606AA

4 1 2 3

Press the <Cancel Job> key to stop the test. Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode. Execute the CST NO PAPER. Check the sensor.

Console Panel Digital Input DI-01 OFF ON

CST NO PAPER (DI-01)

Digital Input DI-01 L - 00

Wsb02607AA

Press the <Cancel Job> key to stop the test.

NOTE: At this test, check to be sure that the paper tray is loaded with paper.

2-127

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode
Sensor and Switch name (Diag. Code) 1 2 3 Confirmation procedures Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode. Execute the Regi Sensor. Check the sensor.

Console Panel Digital Input DI-02 OFF

Actuator

Regi Sensor (DI-02)

ON

Digital Input DI-02 L - 00

Wsb02608AA

4 1 2 3

Press the <Cancel Job> key to stop the test. Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode. Execute the Exit Sensor. Check the sensor.

Console Panel ON Digital Input DI-03 OFF Digital Input DI-03 L - 00

Exit Sensor (DI-03)

Wsb02609AA

Press the <Cancel Job> key to stop the test.

Caution: Take care not to be burn yourself from the heat of the heater placed inside the FUSER.

2-128

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode
Sensor and Switch name (Diag. Code) Confirmation procedures NOTE: Remove the PH Drive. Press the lever mounted on the Solenoid to retract the actuator from the sensor. 1 2 3 Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode. Execute the K Mode Sensor. Check the Sensor.

Actuator

K Mode Sensor (Color Mode Switching Sensor) (DI-04)

K Mode Solenoid

Console Panel Digital Input DI-04 OFF ON Paper Digital Input DI-04 L - 00 K Mode Sensor
Wsb02610AA

4 1 2 3

Press the <Cancel Job> key to stop the test. Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode. Execute the Side Switch. Check the switch.

Console Panel

Side Switch (SIDE SW) (DI-06)

Digital Input DI-06 OFF ON

Digital Input DI-06 L - 00

Wsb02611AA

Press the <Cancel Job> key to stop the test.

2-129

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode
Sensor and Switch name (Diag. Code) 1 2 3 Confirmation procedures Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode. Execute the Cover Open Sensor. Check the switch.

Console Panel Digital Input DI-07 OFF ON

Cover Open Sensor (IL OPEN) (DI-07)

Digital Input DI-07 L - 00

Wsb02612AA

Press the <Cancel Job> key to stop the test.

2-130

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode
Digital Output This function checks whether the motors, clutches and solenoids operate. When the interlock is opened while the Digital Output is performed, each component ends to operate.

Note
In this Test Mode, each motor, clutch or solenoid can be turned individually. Therefore it allows the CE to check a component' s operation from outside, and judge whether the component is normal or not. When all the diag. functions are stopped, all the motors, clutches or solenoids can be turned off. Monitor test can make each of the motors, clutches or solenoids operate simultaneously.

When a paper jam or PQ problem is occurred, or an error message or code is displayed, this test enables to look for the broken or damaged parts. Test result: NG (Go to each FIP or replace the parts.) OK (Turn off/on the main power.)

2-131

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode
Executing Digital Output 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Turn off the power. Turn on the power while holding down <> and <> keys. Input a password. ( <> <> <Eject/Set> ) The "CE Mode" and "ESS Diag" are displayed. (Entered the Diag. mode.) Press the <> key to select the "IOT Diag", and then press <Eject/Set> key. Select "Digital Output", and then press <Eject/Set> key. Press <> or <> key to select test item. Press <Eject/Set> key to execute the test. Press the <Cancel Job> key and then <Menu> key to exit your selecting test.

Parameters for the Digital Output are as follows.

Diag. Code DO-00 DO-01 DO-02 DO-05 DO-06 DO-07 DO-0A DO-0B DO-0C DO-1E DO-1F DO-21 DO-23 DO-25 DO-27 DO-29 DO-2F DO-3D DO-3F

Components Main Motor FULL2 (COLOR) Main Motor FULL1 (BW) Main Motor HALF Sub Motor FULL2 (COLOR) Sub Motor FULL1 (BW) Sub Motor HALF K Mode SOLENOID (Auto OFF) CASSETTE1 FEED SOLENOID (Half Rotation) CASSETTE1 FEED SOLENOID (To Initial Position) Fan (HIGH) Fan (LOW) Yellow Toner Motor Magenta Toner Motor Cyan Toner Motor Black Toner Motor Regi Clutch CASSETTE1 Feed SOLENOID (Auto OFF) Black Drum Erase Lamp Yellow, Magenta and Cyan Drum Erase Lamp

2-132

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode

"Black Toner Motor"

"Cyan Toner Motor" Fan "Fan(HIGH)" "Fan(LOW)"

"Magenta Toner Motor"

"Yellow Toner Motor"

"Black Drum Erase Lamp" Sub Motor "Sub Motor(FULL2)" "Sub Motor(FULL1)" "Sub Motor(HALF)" Main Motor "Main Motor(FULL2)" "Main Motor(FULL1)" "Main Motor(HALF)" K Mode SOLENOID "K Mode SOLENOID(Auto OFF)"
Regi Clutch "Regi Clutch"

"Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan Drum Erase Lamp"

CASSETTE1 Feed SOLENOID "CASSETTE1 Feed SOLENOID(Half)" "CASSETTE1 Feed SOLENOID(Init)" "CASSETTE1 Feed SOLENOID(Auto)"

Wsb02613AA

2-133

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode
Checking Motor, Clutch and Solenoid

Note
Before executing the Digital Output, close cover and door.

Motor,Clutch and Solenoid name (Diag. Code)

Confirmation procedure NOTE: When performing operation for five minuets or longer with the front cover open, remove the PHD ASSY, and cover the drum to avoid exposure to light. 1 2 3 Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode. Open the front cover and cheat the Interlock system. Execute the Main Motor FULL 2.

Main Motor (FULL 2)/Main Motor (FULL 1)/Main Motor (HALF) (DO-00, 01, 02)

Drum Belt

Wsb02010GA

4 5 6 1 2

Check the drum and belt rotation. Press the <Cancel Job> key to stop the test. Remove the cheater and close the front cover. Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode. Execute the Sub Motor FULL 2.
Exit Roll

Sub Motor (FULL 2)/Sub Motor (FULL 1)/Sub Motor (HALF)/ Motor HALF (DO-05, 06, 07)

Wsb02011GA

3 4

Check the exit roll rotation. Press the <Cancel Job> key to stop the test.

2-134

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode
Motor,Clutch and Solenoid name (Diag. Code) Confirmation procedure NOTE: These procedures are for technical staff. When performing operation for five minuets or longer with the front cover open, remove the PHD ASSY, and cover the drum to avoid exposure to light. 1 2 3 4 Remove the DRIVE ASSY PH. (REP7.4) Cheat the interlock system. Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode. Execute the K Mode Solenoid.

K Mode Solenoid (Auto OFF) (Color Mode Switching Solenoid) (DO-0A)


K Mode Solenoid

Wsb02012KA

5 6 7 8 9

Check the K Mode Solenoid movement. Press the <Cancel Job> key to stop the test. Turn of the printer power. Attach the DRIVE ASSY PH. Remove the cheater and turn on the power.

2-135

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode
Motor,Clutch and Solenoid name (Diag. Code) Confirmation procedure NOTE: The Main Motor and the Feed Solenoid operate simultaneously. 1 2 3 Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode. Remove the paper tray. Execute the CASSETTE1 Feed Solenoid (Half).

CASSETTE1 Solenoid (Half)/ CASSETTE1 Feed Solenoid (Init) (DO-0B,0C)

Feed Roll

Wsb02013GA

4 5 6 1 2

Check the Feed Roll rotation. Press the <Cancel Job> key to stop the test. Replace the paper tray. Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode. Execute the Fan (HIGH).

Fan (HIGH)/Fan (LOW) (DO-1E, 1F)

Wsb02014GA

3 4

Check the Fan rotation. Press the <Cancel Job> key to stop the test.

2-136

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode
Motor,Clutch and Solenoid name (Diag. Code) Confirmation procedure NOTE: These procedures are for technical staff. Described below is the check procedure common among the four toner motor. Note the operation for the toner in the PHD ASSY spills if the motor is rotated for a long time. 1 2 3 4 Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode. Open the Side Cover and remove the toner cartridge. Open the toner cartridge holder. Execute the Toner Motor.

Yellow Toner Motor/Magenta Toner Motor/Cyan Toner Motor/ Black Toner Motor (DO-21, 23, 25, 27)

Gear
Wsb02015GA

5 6 7 8

Check the Toner Motor rotation. Press the <Cancel Job> key to stop the test. Replace the toner cartridge and close the toner cartridge holder. Close the Side Cover.

2-137

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode
Motor,Clutch and Solenoid name (Diag. Code) 1 2 3 4 Confirmation procedure Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode. Execute the Regi Clutch. Check the clutch noise. Press the <Cancel Job> key to stop the test.

Combination test is as follows. NOTE: The Regi Roll rotates when the MAIN MOTOR ON and the REGI CLUTCH ON are executed. These procedures are for the technical staff. When performing operation for five minutes or longer with the front cover open, remove the PHD ASSY, and cover the drum to avoid exposure to light. 1 2 3 Regi Clutch (DO-29) Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode. Open the front cover and cheat the Interlock System. Execute the Main Motor FULL 2 and the Regi Clutch.
Regi Roll

Wsb02016GA

4 5 6 7 8

Check the Regi Roll rotation. Press the <Cancel Job> key to stop the clutch. Press the <> key to display the Main Motor FULL 2. Press the <Cancel Job> key to stop the motor. Remove the cheater and close the front cover.

2-138

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode
Motor,Clutch and Solenoid name (Diag. Code) Confirmation procedure NOTE: This test should be carried out in the case where the Feed Roll fails to rotate under the CASSETTE1 FEED SOLENOID ON (Half Rotation/To Initial Position) status. These procedures are for the technical staff. When performing operation for five minutes or longer with the front cover open, remove the PHD ASSY, and cover the drum to avoid exposure to light. 1 2 3 4 Remove the Left Cover. (REP1.12) Cheat the Interlock System. Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode. Execute the CASSETTE1 Feed Solenoid (Auto).

CASSETTE1 Feed Solenoid (Auto) (DO-2F)

CASSETTE1 Feed Solenoid

Wsb02614AA

5 6 7 8 9 10

Check the Feed Solenoid movement. Press the <Cancel Job> key to stop the test. Turn off the printer power. Attach the Left Cover. Remove the cheater and close the front cover. Turn on the printer power.

2-139

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode
Motor,Clutch and Solenoid name (Diag. Code) Confirmation procedure NOTE: These procedures are for the technical staff. 1 2 3 4 5 Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode. Open the front cover. Remove the PHD ASSY and cover the drum to avoid exposure to light. Cheat the Interlock Syastem. Execute the Black Drum Erase Lamp.

Black Drum Erase Lamp (DO-3D)

Black Drum Erase Lamp

Wsb02018GA

6 7 8 9

Check the lamp lighting. Press the <Cancel Job> key to stop the test. Remove the cheater and replace the PHD ASSY. Close the front cover.

2-140

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode
Motor,Clutch and Solenoid name (Diag. Code) Confirmation procedure NOTE: These procedures are for the technical staff. 1 2 3 4 5 Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode. Open the front cover. Remove the PHD ASSY and cover the drum to avoid exposure to light. Cheat the Interlock Syastem. Execute the Yellow, Magenta and Cyan Drum Erase Lamp.

Yellow, Magenta and Cyan Drum Erase Lamp (DO-3F)

Cyan Drum Erase Lamp

Magenta Drum Erase Lamp

Yellow Drum Erase Lamp

Wsb02019GA

6 7 8 9

Check the lamp lighting. Press the <Cancel Job> key to stop the test. Remove the cheater and replace the PHD ASSY. Close the front cover.

2-141

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode
NVM Settings Under the [NVM Setting] menu, do not use [Edit NVM] and [Initialize Slave], because these operations handle internal data. Perform only the following menu operations. [Save NVM to ESS] Saves the internal data of PWBA MCU to PWBA ESS temporarily when PWBA MCU needs to be replaced due to a trouble, etc. [Load MVN from ESS] Loads the internal data saved via [Save NVM to ESS] to the new PWBA MCU. [Print NVM Info] Displays the current setting values of NVM.

2.6.7.5 Print Info


Config Page The version of software of the printer and the printer configuration can be confirmed by executing this test. Print Settings The service tag, printing count value and error count value can be confirmed by executing this test.

2-142

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode 2.6.7.6 Installation

Menu Serial No. Tone Correction Display Counter Serial number of the printer.

Contents

Setting value Read only On: Enable Off: Disable -

Specifies whether or not tone correction is performed. Specifies whether or not life counters are showed to the reports or the display. (Not used) Allows you to print the received print data in hexadecimal notation. Used to analyze the received data in case of a printing error. Setting Hex Dump to ON allows you to print the received data via [Info Page] under [Print info]. Pixel count values of colors Y/M/C/K. The use of "Configuration" is prohibited since it is a tool for design development. Allows you to configure the counter for a specific OEM destination. Do not use this menu. Color Print/Color Backup B/W Print/B/W Backup Number of color print. Number of black and white print. Total of Color and B/W print. Number of error in color print. Number of error in black and white print.

HexDup

On: Enable Off: Disable Read only -

Pixel Counter Configuration Counter Type

Print Counter

Total Print/Total Backup Color Error B/W Error

Read only

CopyCounter M to B CopyCounter B to M Clear All NVM Clear JobHistory Clear AuditronPV

Copies the counter value in the master NVM of the PWBA ESS to the backup NVM of the PWBA ESS. Copies the counter value in the backup NVM of the PWBA ESS to the master NVM of the PWBA ESS. Initializes all value of NVM. Initializes Job History. Initializes print volume (PV) or information of Print Auditron. When Print Auditron is enabled, initializes information of Print Auditron.

2.6.7.7 Exit Mode


Completes the diagnosis operation and reboot the data.

2-143

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode 2.6.7.8 Test Print
Print an internal test pattern of the printer. If paper jam or paper empty occurs during the print, the test waits until they are resolved. Executing test print 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Turn off the power. Turn on the power while holding down <> and <> keys. Input a password. ( <> <> <Eject/Set> ) The "CE Mode" and "ESS Diag" are displayed. (Entered the Diag. mode.) Press <> key to select "Test Print", and then press <Eject/Set> key. Press <> or <> key to select the test item. Press <Eject/Set> key twice to execute the test.

Note
To exit the test or to returning to one step higher menu, press <Cancel Job> key.

No Image IOT Prints the blanked paper.

2-144

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode
Pattern IOT Prints the IOT built-in 600dpi pattern. When the PQ problem occurred, this test enables to identify the problem as the printing process or the PWBA ESS related. Compare the sample chart with the print. Check result: NG (Check the printing process.) OK (Check the PWBA ESS related.)

Wsb02023KA

2-145

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode
Grid 2 Prints the ESS built-in grid pattern. When the PQ problem occurred, this test enables to identify the problem as printer-related or otherwise. Compare the sample chart with the print. Check result: NG (Check the printing process and PWBA ESS-related.) OK (Check the network, cable, PC and so on.)

Leg_Sec02_004FA

2-146

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode
Cyan 20% Outputs cyan 20% paint on the whole area of a A4 paper. When the PQ problem occurred, this test enables to identify the problem as the cyan toner or another color. Compare the sample chart with the print. Check result: NG (Check the cyan toner-related.) OK (Check another toner.)

Leg_Sec02_005FA

Magenta 20% Outputs magenta 20% paint on the whole area of a A4 paper. When the PQ problem occurred, this test enables to identify the problem as the magenta toner or another color. Compare the sample chart with the print. Check result: NG (Check the magenta toner-related.) OK (Check another toner.)

Leg_Sec02_006FA

2-147

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode
Yellow 20% Outputs yellow 20% paint on the whole area of a A4 paper. When the PQ problem occurred, this test enables to identify the problem as the yellow toner or another color. Compare the sample chart with the print. Check result: NG (Check the yellow toner-related.) OK (Check another toner.)

Leg_Sec02_007FA

Black 20% Outputs black 20% paint on the whole area of a A4 paper. When the PQ problem occurred, this test enables to identify the problem as the black toner or another color. Compare the sample chart with the print. Check result: NG (Check the black toner-related.) OK (Check another toner.)

Leg_Sec02_008FA

2-148

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode
CMY 20% Outputs C/M/Y 20% paint on the whole area of a A4 paper. When the PQ problem occurred, this test enables to identify the problem as the balance of three color toners or otherwise. Compare the sample chart with the print. Check result: NG (Check the yellow, magenta or cyan toner-related.) OK (Check black toner.)

Leg_Sec02_009FA

Gradation Outputs the tone pattern from 2% to 100% on a A4 paper for each of 4 colors. When the PQ problem occurred, this test enables to identify the problem as the printing process or PWBA ESS-related. Compare the sample chart with the print. Check result: NG (Check the printing process.) OK (Check the PWBA ESS-related.)

Leg_Sec02_010FA

2-149

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode
Toner Palette Outputs each 100% density color pattern of Y/M/C/K. When the PQ problem occurred in the picture or photo printing, this test enables to identify the problem as the toner or another. Compare the sample chart with the print. Check result: NG (Check the problem toner-related.) OK (Check the print job or print data.)

Leg_Sec02_011FA

2-150

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode
Stain Check Allows you to check the print for any regular lines or toner spots when encountering PQ problems. From the difference in the interval of regular lines or spots, you can determine the parts that have caused the trouble. Page 1 to 4: Prints the scale patterns in vertical and horizontal directions for evaluating regularity and intervals. Page 5: Prints the list of intervals by component fault. Page 1 Page 2

13

13

Wsb02028KA

Wsb02027KA

Page 3

Page 4

13 13

Wsb02029KA

Wsb02030KA

Page 5

Wsb02025GA

2-151

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode 2.6.7.9 Parameter
Registration adjustment

Item Slow Scan K to Paper Slow Scan 600 Y/M/C First Scan K to M, Y, C Fast Scan 2 K to M, Y, C Fast Scan M-Feed, Tray Life Counter

Renge -128 to 127

Description Sets the registration in the paper feeding direction.

-30 to 30 -128 to 127 -1 to 2 -30 to 30 Reads the life counter and the printer. Sets the registration in the scanning direction.

Note
Print the parameter list using the Print function of Parameter Menu in diagnosis before changing the value of the registration.

Parameter Slow Scan K to Paper (Shifts 0.17mm/1count) Slow Scan 600 M,Y,C (Shifts 0.042mm/1count) Fast Scan K to M, Y or C (Shifts 0.042mm/1count) Fast Scan 2 K to M, C or Y (Shifts 0.01mm/1count) Fast Scan M-Feed or Tray (Shifts 0.17mm/1count)

Function Black registration adjustment Color registration adjustment (600 dpi) Color registration adjustment Calculation of adjustment is shown below. (exp. Yellow) (Value of Fast Scan Reg K to Y + Value of Fast Scan Reg2 K to Y )/4 Black registration adjustment at side 1 print

Default ------

Adjustable range -128 to 127 -30 to 30 -128 to 127 -1 to 2 -30 to 30

2-152

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode Note
The default values are different in each printer.

Shifts the print area in this direction by reducing the value.

Shifts the print area in this direction by increasing the value.

Fast Scan K to M, Y, C Fast Scan 2 K to M, Y, C Fast Scan M-Feed, Tray

Slow Scan K to Paper Slow Scan 600 M, Y, C

Default Value

Shifts the print area in this direction by reducing the value.

Image Side

Shifts the print area in this direction by increasing the value.

Default Value

Wsb02615AA

2-153

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode
Life

Note
These counter values are reference only. Do not use as the official value.

Counter Name Life Y Toner (Dispense time) Life M Toner (Dispense time) Life C Toner (Dispense time) Life K Toner (Dispense time) Life Fuser Sheet Life Print Sheet Read: Reads the counter value. Life DTB (Transfer Belt) Waste (Toner cleaning count) Initialize: Initializes values of the Life DTB Sheet, Life DTB Time and Life DTB Waste.

Value of life warning 1677215 -

320000

Life Y waste Toner (Waste Toner cleaning count) Life M waste Toner (Waste Toner cleaning count) Life C waste Toner (Waste Toner cleaning count) Life K waste Toner (Waste Toner cleaning count) Life IU Y Time (Dispense Time) Life IU M Time (Dispense Time) Life IU C Time (Dispense Time) Life IU K Time (Dispense Time) Life IU Xero (Round Time) Life IU Deve K (Sheet) Life Manual Feed Life Tray Sheet

19000 19000 19000 19000 6792000 6792000 6792000 6792000 300000 300000 -

Print This function prints the parameter values and life counter values stored in the engine.

2-154

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.7 NVM Access

2.7 NVM Access


By operating the Control Panel, you can access the NVM (EEPROM in the IOT) to read/write data there. The following functions are available. Editing NVM data. Data at the addresses below can be edited. Saving NVM data into the Controller. Loading data saved in the Controller back into the NVM Printing out data saved in the Controller Editing NVM The following shows how the UI guides you to edit data. 1 Select the menu shown at left and press the Set key.

NVM Settings Edit NVM

The LCD displays what is shown at left. Pressing the left/right arrow allows moving the cursor to the left/right. Pressing the up/down arrow allows changing the value the cursor points to. Changing the value at Address Area (Ad) allows reading and displaying data on the right side of the equal sign (=).

Edit NVM Ad0100=00000000* cursor

Changing the data leads to deletion of the * mark, which shows the current NVM value is changed. Set data at a specific address is represented by leftmost 2 digits displayed on the right side of the equal sign "=".

Edit NVM Ad0100=00000001

Pressing the Set key allows writing a new value in the NVM.

Edit NVM Ad0100=00000001*

Pressing the Cancel key allows returning to the previous screen.

NVM Settings Edit NVM

2-155

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.7 NVM Access
Saving NVM data To save NVM data into the Controller. Data at the NVM addresses below can be saved. 1000-17FF in total

Loading NVM data To load data saved in the Controller into the management areas below. 1000-17FF

Printing NVM data To print data saved in the Controller.

2-156

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.7 NVM Access

2.7.1 NVM List

Never try to write data in the NVM that is not described below since it is used as a system area for the machine.

The setting values are only for reference as they vary according to the specifications.

Add (Hex) 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 100A 100B 100C 100D 100E 1010 1011 1012 10141021 1022 1023

Remarks Line Qty Adjustment Value for Lead Regi paper to K Line Qty Adjustment Value for Lead Regi K to M (600dpi) Line Qty Adjustment Value for Lead Regi K to Y (600dpi) Line Qty Adjustment Value for Lead Regi K to C (600dpi) Line Qty Adjustment Value for Lead Regi K to M (1200dpi) Line Qty Adjustment Value for Lead Regi K to Y (1200dpi) Line Qty Adjustment Value for Lead Regi K to C (1200dpi) Adjustment value for Side Regi K to M Adjustment value for Side Regi K to Y Adjustment value for Side Regi K to C Side Regi adjustment value at MSI Feed Side Regi adjustment value at TRAY1 Feed Side Regi adjustment value at TRAY2 Feed Side Regi adjustment value at TRAY3 Feed Side Regi adjustment value at Duplex Adjustment value for Side Regi K to M (1/4dot) Adjustment value for Side Regi K to Y (1/4dot) Adjustment value for Side Regi K to C (1/4dot) NVM User Data area (OEM FREE AREA) Standard Size Setting MSI Standard Size Setting TRAY1

Range 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255

Unit -

Default Hex 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 04 07 Dec 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 7

2-157

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.7 NVM Access
Add (Hex) 1024 1025 1026 Universal Size Setting MSI width 1027 1028 Universal Size Setting MSI length 1029 102A Universal Size Setting TRAY1 width 102B 102C Universal Size Setting TRAY1 length 102D 102E Universal Size Setting TRAY2 width 102F 1030 Universal Size Setting TRAY2 length 1031 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 110A 110B 110C 110D 110E 110F 1110 FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 PlainPaper-L FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 PlainPaper-H FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 CotedPaper-L FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 CotedPaper-M FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 CotedPaper-H FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 HeavierPaper-L FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 HeavierPaper-H FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 Envelope FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 Postcard FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 Transparency FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 Label-L FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 Label-H FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 Thicker FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 Recycled FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 Custom1 FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 Custom2 FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 PlainPaper-L 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 E4 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 228 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1480-4318 0.1mm 6F 0D 111 13 2100-2970 0.1mm E4 08 228 8 1480-4318 0.1mm 6F 0D 111 13 2100-2970 0.1mm E4 08 228 8 1480-4318 0.1mm 6F 0D 111 13 Remarks Standard Size Setting TRAY2 Standard Size Setting dummy Range 0-255 0-255 2100-2970 Unit 0.1mm Default Hex 07 07 08 Dec 7 7 8

2-158

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.7 NVM Access
Add (Hex) 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 111A 111B 111C 111D 111E 111F 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 112A 112B Remarks FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 PlainPaper-H FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 CotedPaper-L FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 CotedPaper-M FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 CotedPaper-H FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 HeavierPaper-L FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 HeavierPaper-H FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 Envelope FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 Postcard FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 Transparency FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 Label-L FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 Label-H FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 Thicker FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 Recycled FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 Custom1 FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 Custom2 FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 PlainPaper-L FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 PlainPaper-H FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 CotedPaper-L FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 CotedPaper-M FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 CotedPaper-H FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 HeavierPaper-L FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 HeavierPaper-H FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 Envelope FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 Postcard FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 Transparency FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 Label-L FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 Label-H Range 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 Unit Default Hex 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Dec 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2-159

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.7 NVM Access
Add (Hex) 112C 112D 112E 112F 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 113A 113B 113C 113D 113E 113F 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 Remarks FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 Thicker FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 Recycled FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 Custom1 FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 Custom2 Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value PlainPaper-L Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value PlainPaper-H Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-L Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-M Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-H Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value HeavierPaper-L Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value HeavierPaper-H Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Envelope Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Postcard Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Transparency Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Label-L Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Label-H Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Thicker Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Recycled Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Custom1 Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Custom2 Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value PlainPaper-L Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value PlainPaper-H Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-L Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-M Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-H Range 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 Unit Default Hex 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Dec 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2-160

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.7 NVM Access
Add (Hex) 1147 1148 1149 114A 114B 114C 114D 114E 114F 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 115A 115B 115C 115D 115E 115F Remarks Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value HeavierPaper-L Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value HeavierPaper-H Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Envelope Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Postcard Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Transparency Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Label-L Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Label-H Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Thicker Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Recycled Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Custom1 Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Custom2 Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value PlainPaper-L Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value PlainPaper-H Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-L Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-M Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-H Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value HeavierPaper-L Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value HeavierPaper-H Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Envelope Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Postcard Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Transparency Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Label-L Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Label-H Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Thicker Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Recycled Range 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 Unit Default Hex 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Dec 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2-161

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.7 NVM Access
Add (Hex) 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 116A 116B 116C 116D 116E 116F 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 Remarks Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Custom1 Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Custom2 Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value PlainPaper-L Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value PlainPaper-H Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-L Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-M Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-H Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value HeavierPaper-L Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value HeavierPaper-H Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Envelope Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Postcard Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Transparency Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Label-L Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Label-H Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Thicker Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Recycled Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Custom1 Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Custom2 Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value PlainPaper-L Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value PlainPaper-H Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-L Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-M Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-H Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value HeavierPaper-L Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value HeavierPaper-H Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Envelope Range 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 Unit Default Hex 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Dec 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2-162

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.7 NVM Access
Add (Hex) 117A 117B 117C 117D 117E 117F 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 118A 118B 118C 118D 118E 118F 1190 1191 1192 1193 11A6 11A7 11A8 11A9 11AA Remarks Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Postcard Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Transparency Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Label-L Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Label-H Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Thicker Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Recycled Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Custom1 Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Custom2 Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value PlainPaper-L Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value PlainPaper-H Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-L Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-M Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-H Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value HeavierPaper-L Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value HeavierPaper-H Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Envelope Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Postcard Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Transparency Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Label-L Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Label-H Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Thicker Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Recycled Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Custom1 Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Custom2 ROS Time Out (sec) FUSER Time Out (Min) High Altitude Offset Value (Trans) [0] High Altitude Offset Value (Trans) [1] High Altitude Offset Value (Trans) [2] High Altitude Offset Value (Trans) [3] High Altitude Offset Value (Xero) [0] Range 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-30 0-120 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 Unit sec min Default Hex 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 3C 00 00 00 00 00 Dec 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 60 0 0 0 0 0

2-163

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.7 NVM Access
Add (Hex) 11AB 11AC 11AD Remarks High Altitude Offset Value (Xero) [1] High Altitude Offset Value (Xero) [2] High Altitude Offset Value (Xero) [3] High Altitude Offset Mode (common) MODE0(0): altitude of 0[m] default MODE1(1): altitude of 1000[m] below MODE2(2): altitude of 1000[m]-2000[m] MODE3(3): altitude of 2000[m]-3500[m] XERO Idling Sequence Execution Counter (Command 6F) Deve Idling Time Timer Counter[s] (Command 7F) 60 sec PV requirement for operating CL1 High PV requirement for operating CL1 Low Temperature Difference requirement for operating CL1 Regi Con Sample Block Error details (Process) Regi Con Sample Block Error details (Lateral) Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] PlainPaper-L Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] PlainPaper-H Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] CotedPaper-L Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] CotedPaper-M Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] CotedPaper-H Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] HeavierPaper-L Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] HeavierPaper-H Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] Envelope Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] Postcard Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] Transparency Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] Label-L Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] Label-H Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] Thicker Range 0-255 0-255 0-255 Unit Default Hex 04 06 08 Dec 4 6 8

11AE

0-255

00

11AF 11BC 11C0 11C1 11C2 1606 1607 1628 1629 162A 162B 162C 162D 162E 162F 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634

0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255

sec 0.2mm 0.2mm 0.2mm 0.2mm 0.2mm 0.2mm 0.2mm 0.2mm 0.2mm 0.2mm 0.2mm 0.2mm 0.2mm

00 3C 01 F4 04 00 00 E7 E5 E4 E3 E1 E0 E0 E5 E2 EC E3 E1 E5

0 60 500 4 0 0 231 229 228 227 225 224 224 229 226 236 227 225 229

2-164

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.7 NVM Access
Add (Hex) 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 163A 163B 163C 163D 163E 163F 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 1645 1646 1647 168C 168D 168E Remarks Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] Recycled Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] Custom1 Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] Custom2 Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] PlainPaper-L Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] PlainPaper-H Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] CotedPaper-L Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] CotedPaper-M Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] CotedPaper-H Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] HeavierPaper-L Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] HeavierPaper-H Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] Envelope Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] Postcard Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] Transparency Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] Label-L Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] Label-H Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] Thicker Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] Recycled Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] Custom1 Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] Custom2 Intervals of PV at which to execute JobEndProCon for FC Normal(New) Intervals of PV at which to execute JobEndProCon for FC Warning Intervals of PV at which to execute JobEndProCon for FC Near Empty(Empty) Range 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 Unit 0.2mm 0.2mm 0.2mm 0.2mm 0.2mm 0.2mm 0.2mm 0.2mm 0.2mm 0.2mm 0.2mm 0.2mm 0.2mm 0.2mm 0.2mm 0.2mm 0.2mm 0.2mm 0.2mm PV PV PV Default Hex E6 ED ED 01 02 02 02 05 03 07 02 01 00 02 01 01 02 00 00 19 19 19 Dec 230 237 237 1 2 2 2 5 3 7 2 1 0 2 1 1 2 0 0 25 25 25

2-165

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.7 NVM Access
Add (Hex) 168F 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 16A0 Vdark Average 16A0 16A2 Vcln Average 16A3 16AA RADC TC Y 16AB 16AC RADC TC M 16AD 16AE RADC TC C 16AF 16B0 RADC TC K 16B1 16B6 RADC SAD Y 16B7 16B8 RADC SAD M 16B9 16BA RADC SAD C 16BB 16BC RADC SAD K 16BD 16CE TC Setting Control Reference Value Y 16CF A4 0-1023 00 00 164 0-65535 00 02 512 0-65535 00 02 512 0-65535 00 02 512 0-65535 00 02 512 0-65535 00 02 512 0-65535 00 02 512 0-65535 00 02 512 0-65535 B0 02 512 0-65535 00 02 688 Remarks Intervals of PV at which to execute JobEndProCon for BW Normal(New) Intervals of PV at which to execute JobEndProCon for BW Warning Intervals of PV at which to execute JobEndProCon for BW Near Empty(Empty) Intervals of PV at which to execute Forced ProCon for FC Normal(New) Intervals of PV at which to execute Forced ProCon for FC Warning Intervals of PV at which to execute Forced ProCon for FC Near Empty(Empty) Intervals of PV at which to execute Forced ProCon for BW Normal(New) Intervals of PV at which to execute Forced ProCon for BW Warning Intervals of PV at which to execute Forced ProCon for BW Near Empty(Empty) Range 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-65535 Unit PV PV PV PV PV PV PV PV PV Default Hex 1E 1E 1E 32 32 19 3C 3C 1E 00 Dec 30 30 30 50 50 25 60 60 30 0

2-166

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.7 NVM Access
Add (Hex) 16D0 TC Setting Control Reference Value M 16D1 16D2 TC Setting Control Reference Value C 16D3 16D4 TC Setting Control Reference Value K 16D5 16D6 TC Control Target Value Y 16D7 16D8 TC Control Target Value M 16D9 16DA TC Control Target Value C 16DB 16DC TC Control Target Value K 16DD 16DE SAD Setting Control Reference Value Y 16DF 16E0 SAD Setting Control Reference Value M 16E1 16E2 SAD Setting Control Reference Value C 16E3 16E4 SAD Setting Control Reference Value K 16E5 16E6 SAD Control Target Value Y 16E7 16E8 SAD Control Target Value M 16E9 16EA SAD Control Target Value C 16EB 16EC SAD Control Target Value K 16ED 17A2 17A3 17A4 17A5 17A6 17A7 17A8 HW Error History (5 errors back) Error No. HW Error History (5 errors back) Counter(High) HW Error History (5 errors back) Counter(Middle) HW Error History (5 errors back) Counter(Low) HW Error History (4 errors back) Error No. HW Error History (4 errors back) Counter(High) HW Error History (4 errors back) Counter(Middle) 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 PV PV PV PV PV PV PV E3 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0-1023 9A 00 227 0-1023 A6 00 154 0-1023 B9 00 166 0-1023 E3 00 185 0-1023 9A 00 227 0-1023 A6 00 154 0-1023 B9 00 166 0-1023 A4 00 185 0-1023 D7 00 164 0-1023 D3 00 215 0-1023 A4 00 211 0-1023 A4 00 164 0-1023 D7 00 164 -0-1023 D3 00 215 Remarks Range 0-1023 Unit Default Hex 00 Dec 211

2-167

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.7 NVM Access
Add (Hex) 17A9 17AA 17AB 17AC 17AD 17AE 17AF 17B0 17B1 17B2 17B3 17B4 17B5 17B6 17B7 17B8 17B9 17BA 17BC 17BD 17BE 17BF 17C0 17C1 17C2 17C3 17C4 17C5 17C6 17C7 17C8 17C9 Remarks HW Error History (4 errors back) Counter(Low) HW Error History (3 errors back) Error No. HW Error History (3 errors back) Counter(High) HW Error History (3 errors back) Counter(Middle) HW Error History (3 errors back) Counter(Low) HW Error History (2 errors back) Error No. HW Error History (2 errors back) Counter(High) HW Error History (2 errors back) Counter(Middle) HW Error History (2 errors back) Counter(Low) HW Error History (the error before the latest one) Error No. HW Error History (the error before the latest one) Counter(High) HW Error History (the error before the latest one) Counter(Middle) HW Error History (the error before the latest one) Counter(Low) HW Error History (the latest) Error No. HW Error History (the latest) Counter(High) HW Error History (the latest) Counter(Middle) HW Error History (the latest) Counter(Low) Environment (Temp) Sensor Error details Firmware Error details: 2 errors back Details Firmware Error details: 2 errors back Address H Firmware Error details: 2 errors back Address L Firmware Error details: 2 errors back data Firmware Error details: the error before the latest one Details Firmware Error details: the error before the latest one Address H Firmware Error details: the error before the latest one Address L Firmware Error details: the error before the latest one data Firmware Error details: the latest Details Firmware Error details: the latest Address H Firmware Error details: the latest Address L Firmware Error details: the latest data Motor Fail details FanMotorFailure details Range 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 Unit PV PV PV PV PV PV PV PV PV PV PV PV PV PV PV PV PV Default Hex 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Dec 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2-168

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.7 NVM Access
Add (Hex) 17CA 17CB 17CC 17CD 17CE 17CF 17D0 17D1 17D2 17D3 17D4 17D5 17D6 17D8 17D9 17DA 17DB 17DC 17DD 17DE 17DF 17E0 17E1 17E2 17E3 17FC 17FD 17FE 17FF Remarks CTD SensorError (Pro Con) details 2 NV-RAM Error(U6) details Details NV-RAM Error(U6) details Address (H) NV-RAM Error(U6) details Address (L) NV-RAM Error(U6) details data ROS Fail(U2) details Fuser Error(U4) History 1st Fuser Error(U4) History 2nd Fuser Error(U4) History 3rd Fuser Error(U4) History 2 errors back Fuser Error(U4) History the error before Fuser Error(U4) History latest CTD SensorError (Pro Con) details 2 Fixed Temp with Environment Sensor disabled Fixed Humidity with Environment Sensor disabled Exit Jam Qty dummy Exit Jam Qty High Exit Jam Qty Middle Exit Jam Qty Low HW Error2 History (5 errors back) 1st HW Error2 History (4 errors back) 2nd HW Error2 History (3 errors back) 3rd HW Error2 History (2 errors back) 2 errors back HW Error2 History (the error before the latest one) the error before HW Error2 History (the latest) latest To 1 at init.c. To 0 at print start. This makes it known that data is reset during printing. NVM Version Information Test NVM Version Information Minor NVM Version Information Major Range 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-16777215 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 Unit sheet sheet sheet sheet Default Hex 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 16 32 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 06 00 02 Dec 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 22 50 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 2

2-169

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.7 NVM Access
Reference Only Add (Hex) 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 103A 103B 103C 103D 103E 103F 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 104A 104B 104C 104D 104E 104F 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 Default Hex 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 AF C8 00 00 C3 50 00 FF FF FF Dec 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 45000 50000 0 255 255 255

Remarks Printer Life Counter dummy Printer Life Counter High Printer Life Counter Middle Printer Life Counter Low SSI PV Counter dummy SSI PV Counter High SSI PV Counter Middle SSI PV Counter Low Tray1 PV Counter dummy Tray1 PV Counter High Tray1 PV Counter Middle Tray1 PV Counter Low Tray2 PV Counter dummy Tray2 PV Counter High Tray2 PV Counter Middle Tray2 PV Counter Low Duplex PV Counter dummy Duplex PV Counter High Duplex PV Counter Middle Duplex PV Counter Low FUSER Unit Life Counter (sheet) dummy FUSER Unit Life Counter (sheet) High FUSER Unit Life Counter (sheet) Middle FUSER Unit Life Counter (sheet) Low FUSER Unit Pre-Warning Threshold dummy FUSER Unit Pre-Warning Threshold High FUSER Unit Pre-Warning Threshold Middle FUSER Unit Pre-Warning Threshold Low FUSER Unit Warning Threshold dummy FUSER Unit Warning Threshold High FUSER Unit Warning Threshold Middle FUSER Unit Warning Threshold Low FUSER Unit Life Limit Threshold dummy FUSER Unit Life Limit Threshold High FUSER Unit Life Limit Threshold Middle FUSER Unit Life Limit Threshold Low

Range 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 -

Unit PV PV PV PV PV PV PV PV PV -

2-170

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.7 NVM Access
Add (Hex) 1066 1067 1068 1069 106A 106B 106C 106D 106E 106F 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 107A 107B 107C 107D 107E 107F 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 Remarks DTB Life PV Counter dummy DTB Life PV Counter High DTB Life PV Counter Middle DTB Life PV Counter Low DTB PV Pre-Warning Threshold dummy DTB PV Pre-Warning Threshold High DTB PV Pre-Warning Threshold Middle DTB PV Pre-Warning Threshold Low DTB PV Warning Threshold dummy DTB PV Warning Threshold High DTB PV Warning Threshold Middle DTB PV Warning Threshold Low DTB PV Limit Threshold dummy DTB PV Limit Threshold High DTB PV Limit Threshold Middle DTB PV Limit Threshold Low DTB Life Round Time (cycle qty) Counter dummy DTB Life Round Time (cycle qty) Counter High DTB Life Round Time (cycle qty) Counter Middle DTB Life Round Time (cycle qty) Counter Low DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Pre-Warning Threshold dummy DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Pre-Warning Threshold High DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Pre-Warning Threshold Middle DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Pre-Warning Threshold Low DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Warning Threshold dummy DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Warning Threshold High DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Warning Threshold Middle DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Warning Threshold Low DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Limit Threshold dummy DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Limit Threshold High DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Limit Threshold Middle DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Limit Threshold Low DTB Life Waste Toner Counter dummy DTB Life Waste Toner Counter High Range 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 Unit PV PV PV PV cycle cycle cycle cycle Default Hex 00 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF 00 FF FF FF 00 FF FF FF 00 00 00 00 00 3F 59 54 00 4F 2F AA 00 FF FF FF 00 00 Dec 0 0 0 0 16777215 16777215 16777215 0 0 0 0 4151636 5189546 16777215 0 0

2-171

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.7 NVM Access
Add (Hex) 1088 1089 108A 108B 108C 108D 108E 108F 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 109A 109B 109C 109D 109E 109F 10A0 10A1 10A2 10A3 10A4 10A5 10A6 10A7 10A8 Remarks DTB Life Waste Toner Counter Middle DTB Life Waste Toner Counter Low DTB Waste Toner Counter Pre-Warning Threshold dummy DTB Waste Toner Counter Pre-Warning Threshold High DTB Waste Toner Counter Pre-Warning Threshold Middle DTB Waste Toner Counter Pre-Warning Threshold Low DTB Waste Toner Counter Warning Threshold dummy DTB Waste Toner Counter Warning Threshold High DTB Waste Toner Counter Warning Threshold Middle DTB Waste Toner Counter Warning Threshold Low DTB Waste Toner Counter Limit Threshold dummy DTB Waste Toner Counter Limit Threshold High DTB Waste Toner Counter Limit Threshold Middle DTB Waste Toner Counter Limit Threshold Low DTB Life Total Dispense Time Counter (Related to Waste.) dummy DTB Life Total Dispense Time Counter (Related to Waste.) High DTB Life Total Dispense Time Counter (Related to Waste.) Middle DTB Life Total Dispense Time Counter (Related to Waste.) Low DTB Life Pixel Count Counter dummy DTB Life Pixel Count Counter High DTB Life Pixel Count Counter Middle DTB Life Pixel Count Counter Low DTB Jam Counter (Related to Waste.) dummy DTB Jam Counter (Related to Waste.) High DTB Jam Counter (Related to Waste.) Middle DTB Jam Counter (Related to Waste.) Low Total Dispense Time Y Counter dummy Total Dispense Time Y Counter High Total Dispense Time Y Counter Middle Total Dispense Time Y Counter Low Total Dispense Time M Counter dummy Total Dispense Time M Counter High Total Dispense Time M Counter Middle Range 0-16777215 0-16777215 0-16777215 Unit Default Hex 00 00 00 03 6E E8 00 04 93 E0 00 04 E2 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Dec 0 0 225000 300000 320000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0-16777215 disp time 0-16777215 0-16777215 pixel sheet -

0-16777215 disp time -

0-16777215 disp time -

2-172

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.7 NVM Access
Add (Hex) 10A9 10AA 10AB 10AC 10AD 10AE 10AF 10B0 10B1 Remarks Total Dispense Time M Counter Low Total Dispense Time C Counter dummy Total Dispense Time C Counter High Total Dispense Time C Counter Middle Total Dispense Time C Counter Low Total Dispense Time K Counter dummy Total Dispense Time K Counter High Total Dispense Time K Counter Middle Total Dispense Time K Counter Low Range Unit Default Hex 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Dec 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0-16777215 disp time -

0-16777215 disp time -

2-173

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.7 NVM Access
When there were the instructions that were alterableness. Add (Hex) Default Hex Dec

Remarks User Mode PPM-GROUP[F/C] 0=8.0ppm 1=12.0ppm 2=unused 3=16.0ppm User Mode PPM-GROUP[BW] 0=8.0ppm 1=12.0ppm 2=unused 3=16.0ppm User Mode Set Temp (52.5mm/sec) can be set in a range of 140 to 200 (8Ch to C8h) . User Mode Set Temp (78.75mm/sec) can be set in a range of 160 to 200 (A0h to C8h) . User Mode Set Temp (105mm/sec) can be set in a range of 160 to 200 (A0h to C8h) . Difference between Set Temp in User Mode and Upper Limit (52.5mm/sec) can be set in a range of 0 to 130 (00h to 82h). Difference between Set Temp in User Mode and Upper Limit (78.75mm/sec) can be set in a range of 0 to 130 (00h to 82h). Difference between Set Temp in User Mode and Upper Limit (105mm/sec) can be set in a range of 0 to 130 (00h to 82h). Fixed Vtr1/ Table Simplex [0] Vtr1 Fixed Vtr1/ Table Simplex [0] Fixed Vtr1/ Table Simplex [1] Vtr1 Fixed Vtr1/ Table Simplex [1] Fixed Vtr1/ Table Simplex [2] Vtr1 Fixed Vtr1/ Table Simplex [2] Fixed Vtr1/ Table Simplex [3] Vtr1 Fixed Vtr1/ Table Simplex [3] Fixed Vtr1/ Table Simplex [4] Vtr1 Fixed Vtr1/ Table Simplex [4] Fixed Vtr1/ Table Simplex [5] Vtr1 Fixed Vtr1/ Table Simplex [5] Fixed Vtr1/ Table Simplex [6] Vtr1 Fixed Vtr1/ Table Simplex [6] Fixed Vtr1/ Table Simplex [7] Vtr1

Range

Unit

1730

0-255

01

1731

0-255

03

1732 1733 1734

0-255 0-255 0-255

B4 B4 B4

180 180 180

1735

0-255

14

20

1736

0-255

14

20

1737 1738 1739 173A 173B 173C 173D 173E 173F 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746

0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255

14 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2-174

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.7 NVM Access
Add (Hex) 1747 1748 1749 174A 174B 174C 174D 174E 174F 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 175A 175B Remarks Fixed Vtr1/ Table Simplex [7] Fixed Vtr1/ Table Simplex [8] Vtr1 Fixed Vtr1/ Table Simplex [8] Fixed Vtr1/ Table Duplex [0] Vtr1 Fixed Vtr1/ Table Duplex [0] Fixed Vtr1/ Table Duplex [1] Vtr1 Fixed Vtr1/ Table Duplex [1] Fixed Vtr1/ Table Duplex [2] Vtr1 Fixed Vtr1/ Table Duplex [2] Fixed Vtr1/ Table Duplex [3] Vtr1 Fixed Vtr1/ Table Duplex [3] Fixed Vtr1/ Table Duplex [4] Vtr1 Fixed Vtr1/ Table Duplex [4] Fixed Vtr1/ Table Duplex [5] Vtr1 Fixed Vtr1/ Table Duplex [5] Fixed Vtr1/ Table Duplex [6] Vtr1 Fixed Vtr1/ Table Duplex [6] Fixed Vtr1/ Table Duplex [7] Vtr1 Fixed Vtr1/ Table Duplex [7] Fixed Vtr1/ Table Duplex [8] Vtr1 Fixed Vtr1/ Table Duplex [8] Range 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 Unit Default Hex 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Dec 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2-175

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.7 NVM Access
Blank page

2-176

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting

CONTENTS
3.1 Image Quality Trouble ................................................................................................3-1
3.1.1 Entry Chart for Image Quality Troubleshooting............................................................................... 3-1 3.1.2 Items to Be Confirmed Before Image Quality Troubleshooting....................................................... 3-5 3.1.3 Print Image Quality Specifications .................................................................................................. 3-7 3.1.4 Image Quality FIP ......................................................................................................................... 3-11 FIP-1.P1 Faint print (Low density) ..................................................................................................... 3-11 FIP-1.P2 Blank print (No image) ........................................................................................................ 3-15 FIP-1.P3 Solid black .......................................................................................................................... 3-19 FIP-1.P4 Vertical blank lines (White stripes in paper feeding direction) ............................................ 3-21 FIP-1.P5 Horizontal band cross out (White stripes in horizontal direction)........................................ 3-24 FIP-1.P6 Vertical stripes .................................................................................................................... 3-27 FIP-1.P7 Horizontal stripes ................................................................................................................ 3-30 FIP-1.P8 Partial lack .......................................................................................................................... 3-33 FIP-1.P9 Spots................................................................................................................................... 3-36 FIP-1.P10 Afterimage ........................................................................................................................ 3-39 FIP-1.P11 Background (Fog) ............................................................................................................. 3-42 FIP-1.P12 Skew ................................................................................................................................. 3-46 FIP-1.P13 Paper damage .................................................................................................................. 3-48 FIP-1.P14 No fix................................................................................................................................. 3-51 FIP-1.P15 Color registration (Color shift)........................................................................................... 3-52

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble

3.1 Image Quality Trouble


3.1.1 Entry Chart for Image Quality Troubleshooting

Start

Test Printing

Is there a corresponding FIP?

No

Yes
Carry out the corresponding troubleshooting. Replace TONER CARTRIDGE, PHD ASSY TRANSFER ASSY Y and FUSER ASS ASSY.

No

The trouble is restored?

No

The trouble is restored?

Yes
End

Yes
End

Note
It is stated as the ESS is normal. By operating test print with the Printer Engine only, if the trouble is on ESS side or the Printer Engine side can simply be diagnosed, except those phenomena that are not able to be diagnosed by test print. *Test print result with the Printer Engine only is normal. --- >Malfunction on ESS side *Test print result with the Printer Engine only is also abnormal. ---> Malfunction on the Printer Engine side When it is the case of [Malfunction on ESS side], replace with normal ESS and normal Interface Cable, and check. When the trouble still occurs after replacement, check the host side, and operate Troubleshooting efficiently, using the following image quality FIP according to each phenomenon.

3-1

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble Note
When the image quality trouble of print occurs, get a print to judge, understand and treat the trouble substance precisely and appropriately, and then troubleshoot efficiently, using the image quality FIP table according to each phenomenon. When trouble restorations with image quality FIP is not possible, check again with the image quality FIP, and then replace [ESS and possible causative parts] in order and check, and operate Troubleshooting, using [Chapter 2 Troubleshooting].

Image quality FIP states regarding the typical image quality trouble, as follows. FIP-1.P1 Faint print (Low density) FIP-1.P2 Blank print (No image) FIP-1.P3 Solid black FIP-1.P4 Vertical blank lines (White stripes in paper feeding direction) FIP-1.P5 Horizontal band cross out (White stripes in horizontal direction) FIP-1.P6 Vertical stripes FIP-1.P7 Horizontal stripes FIP-1.P8 Partial lack FIP-1.P9 Spots FIP-1.P10 Afterimage FIP-1.P11 Background (Fog) FIP-1.P12 Skew FIP-1.P13 Paper damage FIP-1.P14 No fix FIP-1.P15 Color registration (Color Shift)

3-2

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble Note
When horizontal lines and/or spot occur periodically, it is possibly caused by the trouble of a particular roll. In this case, compare the trouble intervals on the test print with the Pitch Chart. The interval does not necessarily match circumference of the roll. The trouble may be solved easily by the check.

Exit Pinch Roll (FUSER) Exit Roll (FUSER) Heat Roll (FUSER) PHD Fuser Belt (FUSER)

FUSER

BTR (PRINTER)

BTR (PRINTER)

BTR (PRINTER)

BTR (PRINTER)

Drive Roll (PRINTER)

BCR (PHD) BCR Cleaner Roll (PHD)

Drum (PHD) Magnet Roll (PHD) Wsb01046GA

3-3

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Pitch Chart The chart is printed [Stain Check] in the [Test Print] tab of the diagnosis. Page 1 Page 2

13

13

Wsb02028KA

Wsb02027KA

Page 3

Page 4

13 13

Wsb02029KA

Wsb02030KA

Page 5

Wsb02025KA

3-4

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble

3.1.2 Items to Be Confirmed Before Image Quality Troubleshooting


Print Quality Problems Customers may need your help determining the cause of print quality issues such as streaking, fading, or dropouts. Here are some questions that may help you determine why your customer's printer is not printing optionally. First, confirm the following items to understand customer's operating condition. 1 Does your customer's print media fall within the Printer Media Guidelines? (Refer to "Printer Media Guidelines"). 2 3 Is there enough toner? Has the printer been cleaned recently?

Checking printer condition Toner Low toner can cause print quality problems such as fading, streaking, white lines, or dropouts. Have your customer print a small document from a different application to replicate the problem and verify the amount of toner available for printing. When your customers print a document, the Laser Printer Status Monitor should display a dialog box that estimates the amount of toner left in the cartridge. If the toner is low, your customers can sometimes extend the cartridge life by removing the cartridge from the printer, gently shaking it from side-to-side, and replacing it (Rocking the toner cartridge from side-toside loosens toner that may get stuck). Cleaning Paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the printer and cause print quality problems, such as smearing or toner specks. Clean inside the printer to prevent these problems. Prior checks before troubleshooting Check the following items if any print quality problems occur before going to each troubleshooting. Those actions may solve problems easily and simply. If the any problems below have occurred, check and take actions described in each item. 1 Color is out of alignment: a) Clean inside of the printer. b) If you install a new black cartridge and a PHD Unit cleaning has not been done, this problem will happen. Clean inside of the printer. 2 Print is too light: a) The toner may be low. Confirm the amount of the toner and change the toner cartridges if necessary. b) Set the Draft Mode check box to off in the [Advanced] tab on the printer driver. c) If you are printing on an uneven print surface, change the Paper Type settings in the Tray Settings menu. d) Verify that the correct print media is being used. e) The PHD Unit needs to be replaced. Change the PHD Unit.

3-5

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
3 Toner smears or print comes off page: a) If you are printing on an uneven print surface, change the Paper Type settings in the Tray Settings menu. b) Verify that the print media is within the printer specifications. (Refer to "Printer Media Guidelines"). 4 Toner spots appear on the page/printing is blurred: a) Check the toner cartridge to make sure it is installed correctly. b) Change the toner cartridge. 5 Entire page is white: a) Make sure the packaging material is removed from the toner cartridge. b) Check the toner cartridge to make sure it is installed correctly. c) The toner may be low. Change the toner cartridge. 6 Streaks appear on the page: a) The toner may be low. Change the toner cartridge. b) If you are using preprinted forms, make sure the toner can withstand temperatures of 0?C to 35?C. 7 Characters have jagged or uneven edges: a) If you are using downloaded fonts, verify that the fonts are supported by the printer, the host computer, and the software program. 8 Part or all of the page prints in black: a) Check the toner cartridge to make sure it is installed correctly. 9 The job prints, but the top and side margins are incorrect: a) Make sure the Paper Size setting in the Tray Settings is correct. b) Make sure the margins are set correctly in your software program.

3-6

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble

3.1.3 Print Image Quality Specifications


Image Quality Guarantee Conditions The image quality is specified and guaranteed under the following conditions. 1 Environmental Condition Temperature: 10C - 32C Humidity: 15% RH - 85% RH (85% RH at 28C) Note that defect may occur due to condensation after around 30 minutes if the printer is turned on in a critical environment. 2 Guaranteed Paper The print image quality specified in this chapter should be guaranteed when the standard paper is fed from the cassette tray. The print image quality is evaluated on the maximum size of each standard paper. Color print quality: X-Pression 24 lb paper Black and White quality: 4200 paper 3 Paper condition The paper used is flesh paper immediately after unpacked, which has been left in the operating environment for 12 hours before unpacking. 4 Printer condition The print image quality specified in this chapter is guaranteed with the printer in normal condition. 5 Criterion for judgment The print image quality is guaranteed with Spec. In rate = 90% ( l =90%). 6 For Color chart, Parallelism, Perpendicularity, Skew, Linearity, Magnification Error, Registration and Printed Guaranteed Area, refer to each chart below.

3-7

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Chart

Parallelism

3-8

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Perpendicularity

Skew

Linearity

3-9

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Magnification Error

Registration

Guaranteed Printing Area

4mm

4mm

4mm

355.6mm (14inch)
Guaranteed printing area

351.6mm

4mm

210.9mm 215.9mm (8.5inch)

Kmy01001KA

3-10

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble

3.1.4 Image Quality FIP FIP-1.P1 Faint print (Low density)


Trouble substance The density of the image is entirely too faint. ESS and possible causative parts ROS ASSY (PL4.1.1) PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) FRAME ASSY MOT (PL5.1.2) MOTOR ASSY DISP (Y/M/C/K) (PL5.1.3) TONER CARTRIDGE K (PL5.1.21) TONER CARTRIDGE C (PL5.1.22) TONER CARTRIDGE M (PL5.1.23) TONER CARTRIDGE Y (PL5.1.24) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) PWB ESS (PL8.1.9) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on. Remedy Yes Check the printing data. No Go to step 2. Replace the toner with the Xerox toner. Replace the paper with a new dry and recommended one, then go to step 4. Go to step 5. Go to step 7. Go to step 7. Check the original printing data.

ABCDEabcde12345

Step

Check Checking the printing Print the Windows test page. Is the image printed correctly? Checking the Toner Type Is the Xerox Toner seated?

Go to step 3.

Checking the paper condition Is the paper dry and recommended paper? Is the image printed correctly? Checking the menu settings Check the [Advanced] tab of the Printer Driver. Is the [Draft Mode] selected? Is the image printed correctly? Checking the faint color Is there the faint toner? Checked by [Toner Palette] of [Test Print] in [CE Mode] tab of Diagnosis.

Go to step 5.

4 5 6

End of work Cancel the [Draft Mode], then go to step 6. End of work

Go to step 8.

3-11

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Step Check Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGEs Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGEs, and check that their lock keys are in the lock positions. Is the image printed correctly? Checking the TRANSFER ASSY for connection Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Are four HV terminals on the right side of the TRANSFER ASSY, and four springs on the frame (PL4.1.11, 12, 13 and 14) dirty and/ or deformed? Clean or replace the TRANSFER ASSY or SPRING(s), then go to step 10. Remedy Yes No

End of work

Go to step 9.

Go to step 10.

Checking the PHD ASSY for connection Remove the PHD ASSY. Are five HV terminals on the PHD ASSY, and five springs on the frame (PL4.1.10 and PL4.1.15 to 18) dirty and/or deformed?

10

Clean and/or replace the PHD ASSY or SPRING(s), then go to step 11.

Go to step 11.

11

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 12.

3-12

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Step Check Checking the laser beam windows of the ROS ASSY Are the laser beam windows on the ROS ASSY clean? Remedy Yes No

12

Go to step 13.

Clean the window(s) with soft cloth or cotton swab gently.

Checking the laser beam path Are there any foreign substances between the ROS ASSY and PHD ASSY? Remove the foreign substances.

13

Go to step 14.

14

Does the Toner Dispenser Motor function normally? Checked by [Motor Test] - [Yellow Toner Motor, Magenta Toner Motor, Cyan Toner Motor or Black Toner Motor] in [Digital Output] of diagnosis.

Go to step 16.

Replace the MOTOR ASSY DISP (Y, M, C or K) (Refer to REP5.3), then go to step 15. Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11) Go to step 17.

15

Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the PWB ESS Reseat the PWB ESS. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the TRANSFER ASSY Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3) Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the PWBA HVPS Reseat the PWBA HVPS. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

16

End of work

17

End of work

Go to step 18.

18

End of work

Go to step 19.

19

End of work

Go to step 20.

20

End of work

Go to step 21.

21

End of work

Go to step 22.

3-13

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Step Check Checking after replacing the FRAME ASSY MOT Replace the FRAME ASSY MOT. (Refer to REP5.3) Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the ROS ASSY Replace the ROS ASSY. (Refer to REP4.7) Is the image printed correctly? Remedy Yes End of work No Go to step 23. Replace the PWB ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

22

23

End of work

3-14

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble

FIP-1.P2 Blank print (No image)


Trouble substance The entire paper is printed pure white. ESS and possible causative parts ROS ASSY (PL4.1.1) PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) MOTOR ASSY DISP (Y/M/C/K) (PL5.1.3) or FRAME ASSY MOT (PL5.1.2) TONER CARTRIDGE K (PL5.1.21) TONER CARTRIDGE C (PL5.1.22) TONER CARTRIDGE M (PL5.1.23) TONER CARTRIDGE Y (PL5.1.24) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) DRIVE ASSY SUB (PL7.1.1) DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2) DRIVE ASSY PH (PL7.1.4) PWB ESS (PL8.1.9) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on. Remedy Yes Printing data form is not suitable for the printer, then check the printing data form. Replace the toner with the Xerox toner, then go to step 3. End of work No

Step

Check

Checking the printing Print the Windows test page. Is the image printed correctly?

Go to step 2.

Checking the Toner Type Is the Non-Xerox Toner seated?

Go to step 4.

Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating all TONER CARTRIDGEs (Y/M/C/K) Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGEs, and check that their lock keys are in the lock positions. Is the image printed correctly? Checking the TRANSFER ASSY for connection Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Are four HV terminals on the TRANSFER ASSY, and four springs on the frame (PL4.1.11, 12, 13 and 14) dirty and/or deformed? Is the image printed correctly?

Replace the PWB ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

End of work

Go to step 5.

Clean or replace the TRANSFER ASSY or SPRING(s), then go to step 6. End of work

Go to step 7.

Go to step 7.

3-15

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Step Check Remedy Yes No Replace the paper with a new dry and recommended one, then go to step 8. Go to step 9.

Checking the paper condition Is the paper dry and recommended paper? Is the image printed correctly? Checking the life counter value of the TONER CARTRIDGEs Check the life counter value of the TONER CARTRIDGEs in [Parameters] on the diagnosis. Does the remainder value show the near of the end? (Refer to Chapter 2 for details of the life counter value.) Checking the laser beam windows of the ROS ASSY Are the laser beam windows on the ROS ASSY clean?

Go to step 9.

End of work Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE(s). (Refer to REP5.7)

Go to step 10.

10

Go to step 11.

Clean the window(s) with soft cloth or cotton swab gently.

Checking the laser beam path Are there any foreign substances between the ROS ASSY and PHD ASSY? Remove the foreign substances.

11

Go to step 12.

12

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Is the image printed correctly? Checking the Toner Dispenser Motors for function Does the Toner Dispenser Motors function normally? Checked by [Motor Test] - [Yellow Toner Motor, Magenta Toner Motor, Cyan Toner Motor and Black Toner Motor] in diagnosis.

End of work

Go to step 13.

13

Go to step 18.

Go to step 14.

3-16

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Step Check Checking the connector for connection Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and TNR (Y/M/ C/K) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP). Are P/J18, P/J19, P/J181, P/J182, P/J191 and P/J192 connected correctly? 14 Go to step 16. Remedy Yes No

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J18, P/J19, P/J181, P/ J182, P/J191 and/or P/J192 surly, then go to step 15.

15

Is the image printed correctly? Checking the HARN ASSY TNR MOT for continuity Disconnect J18 and J19 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J181, J182, J191 and J192 from the TNR (Y/M/C/K) MOT. Is each cable of J18 <=> J181 and J182 continuous? Is each cable of J19 <=> J191 and J192 continuous? Checking the power to TNR (Y/M/C/K) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) Disconnect J18 and J19 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P18-3pin, P18-8pin, P19-4pin and P19-9pin <= > ground on PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed. Checking the ROS ASSY for connection Check the connections between the ROS ASSY and PWBA MCU. Are P/J40, P/J 41, P/J411 and P/J 412 connected correctly?

End of work

Go to step 16.

16

Go to step 17.

Replace the HARN ASSY TNR MOT.

17

Replace the MOTOR ASSY DISP or FRAME ASSY MOT. (Refer to REP5.3 or REP5.2)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

18

Go to step 20.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J40, P/J41, P/J411 and/or P/J412 surely, then go to step 19.

19 20

Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the PWB ESS Reseat the PWB ESS. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work End of work

Go to step 20. Go to step 21.

21

End of work

Go to step 22.

22

End of work

Go to step 23.

3-17

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Step Check Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the TRANSFER ASSY Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3) Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the PWBA HVPS Reseat the PWBA HVPS. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the ROS ASSY Replace the ROS ASSY. (Refer to REP4.7) Is the image printed correctly? Remedy Yes End of work No Go to step 24.

23

24

End of work

Go to step 25.

25

End of work

Go to step 26. Replace the PWB ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

26

End of work

3-18

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble

FIP-1.P3 Solid black


Trouble substance The entire paper is printed jet-black. ESS and possible causative parts ROS ASSY (PL4.1.1) PWBA HVPS (PL4.1.19) PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) PWB ESS (PL8.1.9) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on. Remedy Yes Printing data is incorrect, then check the printing data. Go to step 3. No

Step

Check Checking the printing Print the Windows test page. Is the image printed correctly? Checking the printing Is the image printed correctly? Checked by printing the [Gradation] in [Test Print] in diagnosis.

Go to step 2.

Go to step 4.

Checking the test printing Replace the PWB Is the image printed correctly? ESS. (Refer to Checked by printing the [Pattern IOT] of [Test Print] in diagnosis. REP8.3) Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the PWB ESS Reseat the PWB ESS. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the PWBA HVPS Reseat the PWBA HVPS. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the ROS ASSY Reseat the ROS ASSY. Is the image printed correctly? End of work

Go to step 4.

Go to step 5.

End of work

Go to step 6.

End of work

Go to step 7.

End of work

Go to step 8.

End of work

Go to step 9.

3-19

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Step Check Checking the ROS ASSY for connection Check the connections between the ROS ASSY and PWBA MCU. Are P/J40, P/J 41, P/J411 and P/J 412 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector(s) P/J40, P/J41, P/J411 and/or P/J412 surely, then go to step 10. Remedy Yes No

Go to step 11.

10 11

Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the PWB ESS Replace the PWB ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the PWBA HVPS Replace the PWBA HVPS. (Refer to REP4.3) Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the ROS ASSY Replace the ROS ASSY. (Refer to REP4.7) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work End of work

Go to step 11. Go to step 12.

12

End of work

Go to step 13.

13

End of work

Go to step 14. Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

14

End of work

3-20

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble

FIP-1.P4 Vertical blank lines (White stripes in paper feeding direction)


Trouble substance There are some extremely faint or completely non-printed parts. Those nonprinted parts cover a wide area vertically, along the paper feeding direction. ESS and possible causative parts ROS ASSY (PL4.1.1)

ABCDEabcde12345

PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) PWB ESS (PL8.1.9) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on. Remedy Yes Printing data is incorrect, then check the printing data. No

Step

Check Checking the printing Print the Windows test page. Is the image printed correctly? Checking the defective parts Print the [Stain Check] of [Test Print] in diagnosis. When the vertical blank lines of periodicity are observed, check the defective parts by comparing the printed vertical blank lines with the Pitch Chart. Are there any vertical blank lines matching the chart? Checking the paper condition Is the paper dry and recommended paper? Is the image printed correctly? Checking the foreign substances on the paper transfer path Are there any foreign substances on the paper transfer path between the TRANSFER ASSY and FUSER ASSY? Is the image printed correctly? Checking the belt surfaces of the TRANSFER ASSY Are there any damages on the belt surface of the TRANSFER ASSY?

Go to step 2.

Replace the Go to step 3. corresponding parts.

Go to step 5.

Replace the paper with a new dry and recommended one, then go to step 4. Go to step 5. Go to step 7. Go to step 7. Go to step 8.

4 5 6 7

End of work Remove the foreign substances, then go to step 6. End of work Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3)

3-21

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Step Check Checking the TRANSFER ASSY for connection Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Are four HV terminals on the TRANSFER ASSY, and four springs on the frame (PL4.1.11, 12, 13 and 14) dirty and/or deformed? Clean or replace the TRANSFER ASSY or SPRING(s). Remedy Yes No

Go to step 9.

Checking the laser beam path Are there any foreign substances between the ROS ASSY and PHD ASSY? Remove the foreign substances.

Go to step 10.

Checking the PHD ASSY for connection Remove the PHD ASSY. Are five HV terminals on the PHD ASSY, and five springs on the frame (PL4.1.10 and PL4.1.15 to 18) dirty and/or deformed?

10

Clean and/or replace the PHD ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 11.

11

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 12.

3-22

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Step Check Checking after reseating the FUSER ASSY Reseat the FUSER ASSY. Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the PWB ESS Reseat the PWB ESS. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the PWBA HVPS Reseat the PWBA HVPS. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the PWB ESS Replace the PWB ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Is the image printed correctly? Checking the ROS ASSY for connection Check the connections between the ROS ASSY and PWBA MCU. Are P/J40, P/J 41, P/J411 and P/J 412 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector(s) P/J40, P/J41, P/J411 and/or P/J412 surely, then go to step 20. Remedy Yes No

12

End of work

Go to step 13.

13

End of work

Go to step 14.

14

End of work

Go to step 15.

15

End of work

Go to step 16.

16

End of work

Go to step 17.

17

End of work

Go to step 18.

18

End of work

Go to step 19.

19

Go to step 21.

20 21

Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the ROS ASSY Replace the ROS ASSY. (Refer to REP4.7) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work End of work

Go to step 21. Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

3-23

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble

FIP-1.P5 Horizontal band cross out (White stripes in horizontal direction)


Trouble substance There are some extremely faint or completely non-printed parts. Those nonprinted parts cover a wide area horizontally, perpendicular to the paper feeding direction. ESS and possible causative parts ROS ASSY (PL4.1.1)

ABCDEabcde12345

PWBA HVPS (PL4.1.19) PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) TONER CARTRIDGE K (PL5.1.21) TONER CARTRIDGE C (PL5.1.22) TONER CARTRIDGE M (PL5.1.23) TONER CARTRIDGE Y (PL5.1.24) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) PWB ESS (PL8.1.9) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on. Remedy Yes Printing data is incorrect, then check the printing data. No

Step

Check Checking the printing Print the Windows test page. Is the image printed correctly? Checking the defective parts Print the [Stain Check] of [Test Print] in diagnosis. Check the defective parts by comparing the printed horizontal band cross out with Pitch Chart. Are there any horizontal band cross out matching the chart? Checking the paper condition Is the paper dry and recommended paper? Is the image printed correctly? Checking the belt surface of the TRANSFER ASSY Are there any damages on the belt surface of the TRANSFER ASSY?

Go to step 2.

Replace the corresponding parts

Go to step 3.

Go to step 5.

Replace the paper with a new dry and recommended one, then go to step 4. Go to step 5. Go to step 6.

4 5

End of work Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3)

3-24

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Step Check Checking the TRANSFER ASSY for connection Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Are four HV terminals on the TRANSFER ASSY, and four springs on the frame (PL4.1.11, 12, 13 and 14) dirty and/or deformed? Clean or replace the TRANSFER ASSY or SPRING(s). Remedy Yes No

Go to step 7.

Checking the laser beam path Are there any foreign substances between the ROS ASSY and PHD ASSY? Checking the PHD ASSY for connection Remove the PHD ASSY. Are five HV terminals on the PHD ASSY, and five springs on the frame (PL4.1.10 and PL4.1.15 to 18) dirty and/or deformed?

Remove the foreign substances.

Go to step 8.

Clean and/or replace the PHD ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 9.

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the FUSER ASSY Reseat the FUSER ASSY. Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 10.

10

End of work

Go to step 11.

11

End of work

Go to step 12.

3-25

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Step Check Checking after reseating the PWB ESS Reseat the PWB ESS. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the PWBA HVPS Reseat the PWBA HVPS. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGEs Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE(s). (Refer to REP5.7) Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the PWB ESS Replace the PWB ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Is the image printed correctly? Checking the ROS ASSY for connection Check the connections between the ROS ASSY and PWBA MCU. Are P/J40, P/J 41, P/J411 and P/J 412 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector(s) P/J40, P/J41, P/J411 and/or P/J412 surely, then go to step 19. Remedy Yes End of work No Go to step 13.

12

13

End of work

Go to step 14.

14

End of work

Go to step 15.

15

End of work

Go to step 16.

16

End of work

Go to step 17.

17

End of work

Go to step 18.

18

Go to step 20.

19 20

Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the PWBA HVPS Replace the PWBA HVPS. (Refer to REP4.3) Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the ROS ASSY Replace the ROS ASSY. (Refer to REP4.7) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work End of work

Go to step 20. Go to step 21. Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

21

End of work

3-26

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble

FIP-1.P6 Vertical stripes


Trouble substance There are vertical black stripes along the paper. ESS and possible causative parts ROS ASSY (PL4.1.1) PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) FUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) PWB ESS (PL8.1.9) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

ABCDEabcde12345

Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on. Remedy Yes Printing data is incorrect, then check the printing data. No

Step

Check Checking the printing Print the Windows test page. Is the image printed correctly? Checking the defective parts Print the [Stain Check] of [Test Print] in diagnosis. When the vertical stripes of periodicity are observed, check the defective parts by comparing the printed vertical stripes with the Pitch Chart. Are there any vertical stripes matching the chart? Checking the TRANSFER ASSY for connection Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Are four HV terminals on the TRANSFER ASSY, and four springs on the frame (PL4.1.11, 12, 13 and 14) dirty and/or deformed?

Go to step 2.

Replace the Go to step 3. corresponding parts.

Clean or replace the TRANSFER ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 4.

3-27

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Step Check Checking the PHD ASSY for connection Remove the PHD ASSY. Are five HV terminals on the PHD ASSY, and five springs on the frame (PL4.1.10 and PL4.1.15 to 18) dirty and/or deformed? Remedy Yes No

Clean and/or replace the PHD ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 5.

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the FUSER ASSY Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Reseat the FUSER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the PWB ESS Reseat the PWB ESS. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the PWBA HVPS Reseat the PWBA HVPS. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 6.

End of work

Go to step 7.

End of work

Go to step 8.

End of work

Go to step 9.

End of work

Go to step 10.

10

End of work

Go to step 11.

3-28

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Step Check Checking the ROS ASSY for connection Check the connections between the ROS ASSY and PWBA MCU. Are P/J40, P/J 41, P/J411 and P/J 412 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector(s) P/J40, P/J41, P/J411 and/or P/J412 surely, then go to step 12. Remedy Yes No

11

Go to step 13.

12 13

Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the FUSER ASSY Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Replace the FUSER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.1) Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the PWB ESS Replace the PWB ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the ROS ASSY Replace the ROS ASSY. (Refer to REP4.7) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work End of work

Go to step 13. Go to step 14.

14

End of work

Go to step 15.

15

End of work

Go to step 16. Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

16

End of work

3-29

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble

FIP-1.P7 Horizontal stripes


Trouble substance There are horizontal black stripes (perpendicular to the paper path direction) along the paper. ESS and possible causative parts ROS ASSY (PL4.1.1)

ABCDEabcde12345

PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) TONER CARTRIDGE K (PL5.1.21) TONER CARTRIDGE C (PL5.1.22) TONER CARTRIDGE M (PL5.1.23) TONER CARTRIDGE Y (PL5.1.24) FUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) PWB ESS (PL8.1.9) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on. Remedy Yes Printing data is incorrect, then check the printing data. No

Step

Check Checking the printing Print the Windows test page. Is the image printed correctly? Checking the defective parts Print the [Stain Check] of [Test Print] in diagnosis. Check the defective parts by comparing the printed horizontal stripes with Pitch Chart. Are there any horizontal stripes matching the chart? Checking the TRANSFER ASSY for connection Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Are four HV terminals on the TRANSFER ASSY, and four springs on the frame (PL4.1.11, 12, 13 and 14) dirty and/or deformed?

Go to step 2.

Replace the Go to step 3. corresponding parts.

Clean or replace the TRANSFER ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 4.

Checking the paper path Are there any contaminations of the toner on the paper path?

Clean the paper path.

Go to step 5.

3-30

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Step Check Checking the PHD ASSY for connection Remove the PHD ASSY. Are five HV terminals on the PHD ASSY, and five springs on the frame (PL4.1.10 and PL4.1.15 to 18) dirty and/or deformed? Remedy Yes No

Clean and/or replace the PHD ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 6.

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the FUSER ASSY Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Reseat the FUSER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 7.

End of work

Go to step 8.

Checking the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y/M/C/K) Are the TONER CARTRIDGEs that meet the specification installed to the correct position?

Go to step 9.

Replace a new TONER CARTRIDGE (Y/ M/C/K) meets the specification. (Refer to REP5.7) Go to step 10.

Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the PWB ESS Reseat the PWB ESS. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the PWBA HVPS Reseat the PWBA HVPS. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

10

End of work

Go to step 11.

11

End of work

Go to step 12.

12

End of work

Go to step 13.

3-31

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Step Check Checking the ROS ASSY for connection Check the connections between the ROS ASSY and PWBA MCU. Are P/J40, P/J 41, P/J411 and P/J 412 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector(s) P/J40, P/J41, P/J411 and/or P/J412 surely, then go to step 14. Remedy Yes No

13

Go to step 15.

14 15

Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the FUSER ASSY Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Replace the FUSER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.1) Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the PWB ESS Replace the PWB ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the ROS ASSY Replace the ROS ASSY. (Refer to REP4.7) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work End of work

Go to step 15. Go to step 16.

16

End of work

Go to step 17.

17

End of work

Go to step 18. Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

18

End of work

3-32

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble

FIP-1.P8 Partial lack


Trouble substance There are some extremely faint or completely missing parts in a limited area on the paper. ESS and possible causative parts ROS ASSY (PL4.1.1)

ABCDEabcde12345

PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) PWB ESS (PL8.1.9) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on. Remedy Yes No Turn on the power of the air conditioner and replace a new dray and recommended paper, then go to step 2. Go to step 3. Go to step 4.

Step

Check

Checking dew condensation Was the printer installed in the room where the air conditioner well works?

Go to step 3.

2 3

Is the image printed correctly? Checking the printing Print the Windows test page. Is the image printed correctly? Checking the defective parts Print the [Stain Check] of [Test Print] in diagnosis. When the partial lacks of periodicity are observed, check the defective parts by comparing the printed partial lacks with the Pitch Chart. Are there any partial lacks matching the chart? Checking after replacing a new paper Replace the paper with a new dry and recommended one. Is the image printed correctly? Checking the belt surface of the TRANSFER ASSY Are there any damages on the belt surface of the TRANSFER ASSY?

End of work Check the printing data.

Replace the Go to step 5. corresponding parts.

End of work Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3)

Go to step 6.

Go to step 7.

3-33

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Step Check Checking the TRANSFER ASSY for connection Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Are four HV terminals on the TRANSFER ASSY, and four springs on the frame (PL4.1.11, 12, 13 and 14) dirty and/or deformed? Clean or replace the TRANSFER ASSY or SPRING(s). Remedy Yes No

Go to step 8.

Checking the PHD ASSY for connection Remove the PHD ASSY. Are five HV terminals on the PHD ASSY, and five springs on the frame (PL4.1.10 and PL4.1.15 to 18) dirty and/or deformed?

Clean and/or replace the PHD ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 9.

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating TONER CARTRIDGEs (Y/M/C/K) Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGEs (Y/M/C/K), and check that their lock keys are in the lock positions. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the PWB ESS Reseat the PWB ESS. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 10.

10

End of work

Go to step 11.

11

End of work

Go to step 12.

12

End of work

Go to step 13.

3-34

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Step Check Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the PWBA HVPS Reseat the PWBA HVPS. Is the image printed correctly? Checking the ROS ASSY for connection Check the connections between the ROS ASSY and PWBA MCU. Are P/J40, P/J 41, P/J411 and P/J 412 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector(s) P/J40, P/J41, P/J411 and/or P/J412 surely, then go to step 16. Remedy Yes End of work No Go to step 14.

13

14

End of work

Go to step 15.

15

Go to step 17.

16 17

Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the PWB ESS Replace the PWB ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the ROS ASSY Replace the ROS ASSY. (Refer to REP4.7) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work End of work

Go to step 17. Go to step 18.

18

End of work

Go to step 19. Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

19

End of work

3-35

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble

FIP-1.P9 Spots
Trouble substance There are toner spots all over the paper disorderedly. ESS and possible causative parts ROS ASSY (PL4.1.1) PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) PWB ESS (PL8.1.9) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

ABCDEabcde12345

Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on. Remedy Yes Clean the contaminations with soft cloth or cotton swab, then go to step 2. End of work No

Step

Check

Checking the contaminations on the paper transfer path Are there any contaminations on the paper transfer path?

Go to step 3.

Is the image printed correctly? Checking the defective parts Print the [Stain Check] of [Test Print] in diagnosis. Check the defective parts by comparing the printed spots with Pitch Chart. Are there any spots matching the chart? Checking the using paper Does the using paper meet the specifications? Is the image printed correctly? Checking the belt surface of the TRANSFER ASSY Are there any damages on the belt surface of the TRANSFER ASSY?

Go to step 3.

Replace the Go to step 4. corresponding parts.

Go to step 6.

Use the paper that meets the specifications, then go to step 5. Go to step 6. Go to step 7.

5 6

End of work Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3)

3-36

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Step Check Checking the TRANSFER ASSY for connection Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Are four HV terminals on the TRANSFER ASSY, and four springs on the frame (PL4.1.11, 12, 13 and 14) dirty and/or deformed? Clean or replace the TRANSFER ASSY or SPRING(s). Remedy Yes No

Go to step 8.

Checking the PHD ASSY for connection Remove the PHD ASSY. Are five HV terminals on the PHD ASSY, and five springs on the frame (PL4.1.10 and PL4.1.15 to 18) dirty and/or deformed?

Clean and/or replace the PHD ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 9.

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating TONER CARTRIDGEs (Y/M/C/K) Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGEs (Y/M/C/K), and check that their lock keys are in the lock positions. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the FUSER ASSY Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Reseat the FUSER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 10.

10

End of work

Go to step 11.

11

End of work

Go to step 12.

3-37

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Step Check Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the PWB ESS Reseat the PWB ESS. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the PWBA HVPS Reseat the PWBA HVPS. Is the image printed correctly? Checking the ROS ASSY for connection Check the connections between the ROS ASSY and PWBA MCU. Are P/J40, P/J 41, P/J411 and P/J 412 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector(s) P/J40, P/J41, P/J411 and/or P/J412 surely, then go to step 17. Remedy Yes End of work No Go to step 13.

12

13

End of work

Go to step 14.

14

End of work

Go to step 15.

15

End of work

Go to step 16.

16

Go to step 18.

17 18

Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the PWB ESS Replace the PWB ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the ROS ASSY Replace the ROS ASSY. (Refer to REP4.7) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work End of work

Go to step 18. Go to step 19.

19

End of work

Go to step 20. Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

20

End of work

3-38

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble

FIP-1.P10 Afterimage
Trouble substance The ghost appears on the paper. The ghost may be the image of the previous page, or a part of the page currently printing. ESS and possible causative parts LED ASSY ERASE (PL4.1.8)

ABCDEabcde12345

PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) FUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) PWB ESS (PL8.1.9) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HARN ASSY LVPS (PL9.1.3)

Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on. Remedy Yes Go to step 2. Check the printing data. No Go to step 3.

Step 1

Check Checking the printing Did the client print the same image of large volume? Checking the printing Print the Windows test page. Is the image printed correctly? Checking the printing Print the [Stain Check] of [Test Print] in diagnosis. Is the image printed correctly? Checking the erase lamps Open the COVER ASSY FRONT, and remove the PHD ASSY. Cheat the safety interlock switch. Does the four erase LEDs light correctly? Checking the connectors for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and LED ASSY ERASE. Are P/J141 and P/J14 connected correctly?

Go to step 3.

End of work

Go to step 4.

Go to step 8.

Go to step 5.

Go to step 6.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J141 and/or P/J14 surely, then go to step 6.

3-39

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Step Check Checking the HARN ASSY LVPS for continuity Disconnect J14 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J141 from the LED ASSY ERASE. Is each cable of J14 <=> J141 continuous? Checking the power to LED ASSY ERASE Disconnect the connector of J14 from the LED ASSY ERASE. Is the voltage across P14-15pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC? Checking the PHD ASSY for connection Remove the PHD ASSY. Are five HV terminals on the PHD ASSY, and five springs on the frame (PL4.1.10 and PL4.1.15 to 18) dirty and/or deformed? Remedy Yes No Replace the HARN ASSY LVPS.

Go to step 7.

Replace the LED ASSY ERASE. (REP4.2)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Clean and/or replace the PHD ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 9.

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Is the image printed correctly? Checking the TRANSFER ASSY for connection Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Are four HV terminals on the TRANSFER ASSY, and four springs on the frame (PL4.1.11, 12, 13 and 14) dirty and/or deformed?

End of work

Go to step 10.

10

Clean or replace the TRANSFER ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 11.

11

Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 12.

3-40

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Step Check Checking after reseating the PWB ESS Reseat the PWB ESS. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the PWBA HVPS Reseat the PWBA HVPS. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the FUSER ASSY Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Replace the FUSER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.1) Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the PWBA MCU Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11) Is the image printed correctly? Remedy Yes End of work No Go to step 13.

12

13

End of work

Go to step 14.

14

End of work

Go to step 15.

15

End of work

Go to step 16.

16

End of work

Go to step 17.

17

End of work

Replace the PWB ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

3-41

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble

FIP-1.P11 Background (Fog)


Trouble substance There is toner stain all over or a part of the page. The stain appears as very bright gray stain. ESS and possible causative parts LED ASSY ERASE (PL4.1.8)

ABCDEabcde12345

PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) PWB ESS (PL8.1.9) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HARN ASSY LVPS (PL9.1.3)

Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on. Remedy Yes Printing data is incorrect, then check the printing data. Clean the contaminations with soft cloth or cotton swab, then go to step 3. End of work No

Step

Check Checking the printing Print the Windows test page. Is the image printed correctly?

Go to step 2.

Checking the contaminations on the paper transfer path Are there any contaminations on the paper transfer path?

Go to step 4.

Is the image printed correctly? Checking the printing Print the Windows test page after printing the color photograph or picture. (If the color photograph or picture printing is impossible, print the [Toner Palette] of [Test Print] in diagnosis. Is the image printed correctly? Checking the erase lamps Open the COVER ASSY FRONT, and remove the PHD ASSY. Cheat the safety interlock switch. Does the four erase LEDs light correctly?

Go to step 4.

End of work

Go to step 5.

Go to step 9.

Go to step 6.

3-42

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Step Check Checking the connectors for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and LED ASSY ERASE. Are P/J141 and P/J14 connected correctly? Reconnect the connector(s) P/J141 and/or P/J14 surely, then go to step 7. Remedy Yes No

Go to step 7.

Checking the HARN ASSY LVPS for continuity Disconnect J14 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J141 from the LED ASSY ERASE. Is each cable of J14 <=> J141 continuous? Checking the power to LED ASSY ERASE Disconnect the connector of J14 from the LED ASSY ERASE. Is the voltage across P14-15pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC? Checking the TRANSFER ASSY for connection Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Are four HV terminals on the TRANSFER ASSY, and four springs on the frame (PL4.1.11, 12, 13 and 14) dirty and/or deformed?

Go to step 8.

Replace the HARN ASSY LVPS.

Replace the LED ASSY ERASE. (REP4.2)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Clean or replace the TRANSFER ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 10.

3-43

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Step Check Checking the PHD ASSY for connection Remove the PHD ASSY. Are five HV terminals on the PHD ASSY, and five springs on the frame (PL4.1.10 and PL4.1.15 to 18) dirty and/or deformed? Remedy Yes No

10

Clean and/or replace the PHD ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 11.

11

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating TONER CARTRIDGEs (Y/M/C/K) Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGEs (Y/M/C/K), and check that their lock keys are in the lock positions. Is the image printed correctly? Checking the ROS ASSY for connection Check the connections between the ROS ASSY and PWBA MCU. Are P/J40, P/J 41, P/J411 and P/J 412 connected correctly?

End of work

Go to step 12.

12

End of work

Go to step 13.

13

Go to step 15.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J40, P/J41, P/J411 and/or P/J412 surely, then go to step 14.

14 15

Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the PWB ESS Reseat the PWB ESS. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work End of work

Go to step 15. Go to step 16.

16

End of work

Go to step 17.

3-44

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Step Check Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the PWBA HVPS Reseat the PWBA HVPS. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the PWB ESS Replace the PWB ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Is the image printed correctly? Remedy Yes End of work No Go to step 18.

17

18

End of work

Go to step 19.

19

End of work

Go to step 20. Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

20

End of work

3-45

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble

FIP-1.P12 Skew
Trouble substance The printed image is not paralleled with both sides of the paper. ESS and possible causative parts HOLDER ASSY RETARD (PL2.1.5) ROLL ASSY FEED (PL3.2.4)

ABCDE

abcde1

2345

ROLL ASSY REGI (PL3.2.9) ROLL REGI METAL (PL3.2.10)

Note
Tray is recommended for paper feeding because sheets fed via SSI is prone to skew depending on how the sheet is placed on SSI. Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on. Remedy Yes No Use the paper that meets the specifications, then go to step 2. Go to step 3. Replace the paper with a new dry and recommended one, then go to step 4. Go to step 5. Replace the defective parts, then go to step 6. Go to step 7. Go to step 8.

Step

Check

Checking the using paper Does the using paper meet the specifications? Is the image printed correctly? Checking the paper condition Is the paper dry and recommended paper? Is the image printed correctly? Checking the COVER ASSY FRONT for latching Open and close the COVER ASSY FRONT. Is the image printed correctly? Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly? Checking the paper feeding tray Is the skewed paper fed from the SSI?

Go to step 3.

End of work

Go to step 5.

4 5 6 7

End of work End of work End of work End of work

End of work

Go to step 9.

Go to step 10.

Go to step 14.

3-46

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Step Check Checking the side guides setting of SSI Reset the side guides. Is the image printed correctly? Checking the paper path Are there any foreign substances on the paper path? Is the image printed correctly? Checking the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL ASSY METAL for rotation Enter the [Motor Test] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis, and then enter the [Regi Clutch]. Does the Roll Assy Regi and Roll Regi Metal rotate? During this check, cheat the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK). Checking after reseating the Paper Cassette Reseat the Paper Cassette. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the paper Reseat the paper in the Paper Cassette. Is the image printed correctly? Checking the side guides of the Paper Cassette Reset the side guides. Is the image printed correctly? Checking the paper path Are there any foreign substances on the paper path? Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the HOLDER ASSY RETARD Reseat the HOLDER ASSY RETARD. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the HOLDER ASSY RETARD Replace the HOLDER ASSY RETARD. (Refer to REP2.3) Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the ROLL ASSY FEED Replace the ROLL ASSY FEED. (Refer to REP3.8) Is the image printed correctly? Checking the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL for rotation Enter the [Motor Test] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis, and then enter the [Regi Clutch]. Does the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL rotate? During this check, cheat the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK). Remedy Yes End of work Remove the foreign substances, then go to step 12. End of work No Go to step 11.

10

11 12

Go to step 13. Go to step 13.

13

End of work

Replace the ROLL ASSY REGI. (Refer to REP3.9)

14

End of work

Go to step 15.

15

End of work

Go to step 16.

16

End of work Remove the foreign substances, then go to step 18. End of work End of work

Go to step 17.

17 18 19

Go to step 19. Go to step 19. Go to step 20.

20

End of work

Go to step 21.

21

End of work

Go to step 22.

22

End of work

Replace the ROLL ASSY REGI. (Refer to REP3.9)

3-47

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble

FIP-1.P13 Paper damage


Trouble substance The paper comes out from the printer wrinkled, folded or worn-out. ESS and possible causative parts HOLDER ASSY RETARD (PL2.1.5) ROLL ASSY FEED (PL3.2.4) ROLL ASSY REGI (PL3.2.9) ROLL REGI METAL (PL3.2.10)

Note
Tray is recommended for paper feeding because sheets fed via SSI is prone to skew depending on how the sheet is placed on SSI.

Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on. Remedy Yes No Turn on the power of the air conditioner, and replace a new dray and recommended paper, then go to step 2. Go to step 3. Use the paper that meets the specifications, then go to step 4. Go to step 5. Replace the paper with a new dry and recommended one, then go to step 6. Go to step 7. Replace the defective parts, then go to step 8. Go to step 9.

Step

Check

Checking dew condensation Was the printer installed in the room where the air conditioner well works?

Go to step 3.

Is the image printed correctly? Checking the using paper Does the using paper meet the specifications? Is the image printed correctly? Checking the paper condition Is the paper dry and recommended paper? Is the image printed correctly? Checking the COVER ASSY FRONT for latching Open and close the COVER ASSY FRONT. Is the image printed correctly? Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 5.

End of work

Go to step 7.

6 7 8

End of work End of work End of work

3-48

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Step Check Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the FUSER ASSY Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Reseat the FUSER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly? Checking the paper feeding tray Is the damaged paper fed from the SSI? Checking the side guides setting of SSI Reset the side guides. Is the image printed correctly? Checking the paper path Are there any foreign substances on the paper path? Is the image printed correctly? Checking the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL for rotation Enter the [Motor Test] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis, and then enter the [Regi Clutch]. Does the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL rotate? During this check, cheat the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK). Checking after reseating the Paper Cassette Reseat the Paper Cassette. Is the image printed correctly? Checking the side guides of the Paper Cassette Reset the side guides. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating a new paper Reseat a new paper in the Paper Cassette. Is the image printed correctly? Checking the paper path Are there any foreign substances on the paper path? Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the HOLDER ASSY RETARD Reseat the HOLDER ASSY RETARD. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the HOLDER ASSY RETARD Replace the HOLDER ASSY RETARD. (Refer to REP2.3) Is the image printed correctly? Remedy Yes End of work No Go to step 10.

10

End of work

Go to step 11.

11

End of work

Go to step 12.

12

Go to step 13.

Go to step 17.

13

End of work Remove the foreign substances, then go to step 15. End of work

Go to step 14.

14 15

Go to step 16. Go to step 16.

16

End of work

Replace the ROLL ASSY REGI. (Refer to REP3.9)

17

End of work

Go to step 18.

18

End of work

Go to step 19.

19

End of work Remove the foreign substances, then go to step 21. End of work End of work

Go to step 20.

20 21 22

Go to step 22. Go to step 22. Go to step 23.

23

End of work

Go to step 24.

3-49

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Step Check Checking after replacing the ROLL ASSY FEED Replace the ROLL ASSY FEED. (Refer to REP3.8) Is the image printed correctly? Checking the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL for rotation Enter the [Motor Test] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis, and then enter the [Regi Clutch]. Does the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL rotate? During this check, cheat the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK). Remedy Yes End of work No Go to step 25.

24

25

End of work

Replace the ROLL ASSY REGI. (Refer to REP3.9)

3-50

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble

FIP-1.P14 No fix
Trouble substance The printed image is not fixed on the paper properly. The image easily comes off when rubbed. ESS and possible causative parts FUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1)

ABCDEabcde12345

PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on. Remedy Yes No Use the paper that meets the specifications, then go to step 2. Go to step 3. Replace the paper with a new dry and recommended one, then go to step 4. Go to step 5. Replace the toner with Xerox Toner, then go to step 6. Go to step 7.

Step

Check

Checking the using paper Does the using paper meet the specifications? Is the image printed correctly? Checking the paper condition Is the paper dry and recommended paper? Is the image printed correctly? Checking the Toner Type Is the Xerox Toner seated? Is the image printed correctly? Checking the power cord for connection Connect the power cord with other wall outlet. (Never connect the power cord into other connector of the same wall outlet.) Is the image printed correctly? Checking after reseating the FUSER ASSY Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Reseat the FUSER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly? Checking after replacing the FUSER ASSY Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Replace the FUSER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.1) Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 3.

End of work

Go to step 5.

4 5 6

End of work Go to step 7. End of work

End of work

Go to step 8.

End of work

Go to step 9.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

End of work

3-51

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble

FIP-1.P15 Color registration (Color shift)


Trouble substance A yellow or black image printed is not overlapped on a cyan or magenta image correctly. ESS and possible causative parts PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21)

ABCDEabcde12345

FUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on. Remedy Yes Go to step 2. Printing data is incorrect, then check the printing data. No End of work

Step

Check Turn OFF/ON the power. Does the color registration (color shift) appear on the printed material when printing? Checking the printing Print the Windows test page. Is the image printed correctly?

Go to step 3.

Checking the paper condition Is the paper dry and recommended paper? Does the color registration appear on the printed material when printing? Checking the COVER ASSY FRONT for latching Open and close the COVER ASSY FRONT. Does the color registration appear on the printed material when printing? Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Does the banding error appear on the printed material when printing? Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Does the banding error appear on the printed material when printing?

Go to step 5.

Replace the paper with a new dry and recommended one, then go to step 4. End of work

Go to step 5.

Go to step 6.

End of work

Go to step 7.

Go to step 8.

Go to step 8.

End of work.

3-52

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Step Check Adjusting the color registration automatically Checked by [Adjust Color Regi] of [Adjust Color Regi] in [Maintenance Mode] of [Admin Menu]. Does the color registration appear on the printed material when printing? Adjusting the color registration manually Checked by [Enter Number] of [Adjust Color Regi] in [Maintenance Mode] of [Admin Menu]. (Refer to user's Manual.) Does the color registration appear on the printed material when printing? Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Does the error appear on the printed material when printing? Checking after replacing the TRANSFER ASSY Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3) Does the error appear on the printed material when printing? Checking after replacing the PWBA MCU Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11) Does the error appear on the printed material when printing? Remedy Yes No

Go to step 9.

End of work

Go to step 10.

End of work

10

Go to step 11.

End of work

11

Go to step 12.

End of work

12

Replace the printer.

End of work

3-53

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting


3.1 Image Quality Trouble
Blank page

3-54

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments

CONTENTS
4.1 Preface .......................................................................................................................4-1
4.1.1 Before starting service procedure ................................................................................................... 4-2 4.1.2 General notes ................................................................................................................................. 4-4

4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) ..........................................................4-5


PL1 COVERS .......................................................................................................................................... 4-5 REP1.1 (SCC) COVER TOP (PL1.1.1)............................................................................................... 4-5 REP1.2 TRAY EXT (PL1.1.2) ............................................................................................................. 4-8 REP1.3 (SCC) COVER REAR (PL1.1.3) .......................................................................................... 4-10 REP1.4 COVER CST (PL1.1.4)........................................................................................................ 4-12 REP1.5 COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR (PL1.1.5) ............................................................................ 4-13 REP1.6 COVER SIDE R (PL1.1.6) ................................................................................................... 4-15 REP1.7 COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7) ........................................................................................ 4-17 REP1.8 LATCH FRONT (PL1.1.8).................................................................................................... 4-20 REP1.9 HARNESS ASSY A-OP (PL1.1.17), KIT COVER FRONT (PL1.1.97, 98, 99) .................... 4-22 REP1.10 SHAFT PIVOT (PL1.1.18) ................................................................................................. 4-25 REP1.11 CONSOLE ASSY PANEL (PL1.1.19)................................................................................ 4-26 REP1.12 (SCC) COVER SIDE L (PL1.1.20)..................................................................................... 4-29 REP1.13 KIT CVR HARNESS (PL1.1.95) ........................................................................................ 4-31 REP1.14 KIT GUIDE BELT (PL1.1.96)............................................................................................. 4-33 PL2 PAPER CASSETTE ....................................................................................................................... 4-35 REP2.1 CASSETTE ASSY 250 (PL2.1.1) ........................................................................................ 4-35 REP2.2 PLATE ASSY BOTTOM (PL2.1.2) ...................................................................................... 4-36 REP2.3 HOLDER ASSY RETARD (PL2.1.5) ................................................................................... 4-38 REP2.4 LATCH BOTTOM L (PL2.1.14), SPRING LATCH B (PL2.1.16).......................................... 4-40 REP2.5 LATCH BOTTOM R (PL2.1.15), SPRING LATCH B (PL2.1.16) ......................................... 4-41 REP2.6 TRAY ASSY EXTENSION (PL2.1.17)................................................................................. 4-42 REP2.7 GUIDE ASSY END (PL2.1.23) ............................................................................................ 4-43 REP2.8 KIT SIDE GUIDE (PL2.1.99) ............................................................................................... 4-44 PL3 PAPER FEEDER............................................................................................................................ 4-47 REP3.1 (SCC) CLUTCH ASSY DRV (PL3.1.1) ................................................................................ 4-47 REP3.2 BEARING REGI (PL3.1.2)................................................................................................... 4-50 REP3.3 UPPER UNIT (REFERENCE ONLY) .................................................................................. 4-51 REP3.4 (SCC) FEEDER ASSY V (PL3.1.3) ..................................................................................... 4-57 REP3.5 STOPPER CST (PL3.1.7) ................................................................................................... 4-58 REP3.6 ARRESTER ENE112D-10A (PL3.1.20)............................................................................... 4-59 REP3.7 KIT SOLENOID FEED (PL3.1.99) ....................................................................................... 4-61 REP3.8 ROLL ASSY FEED (PL3.2.4) .............................................................................................. 4-65 REP3.9 ROLL ASSY REGI (PL3.2.9) ............................................................................................... 4-68 REP3.10 SENSOR PHOTO: SSI NO PAPER (PL3.2.13) ................................................................ 4-71 REP3.11 SENSOR PHOTO: CST NO PAPER (PL3.2.13) ............................................................... 4-73 REP3.12 SENSOR PHOTO: REGI (PL3.2.13) ................................................................................. 4-74 REP3.13 ACTUATOR REGI IN (PL3.2.11), SPRING ACT REGI (PL3.2.12) ................................... 4-76 REP3.14 ACTUATOR SSI (PL3.2.14), SPRING ACT SSI (PL3.2.15).............................................. 4-77 REP3.15 SPRING STP (PL3.2.16), ACTUATOR ASSY NO PAPER (PL3.2.32) ............................. 4-80 PL4 XEROGRAPHICS........................................................................................................................... 4-81

REP4.1 HOLDER CRUM (PL4.1.3), HARN ASSY PHD XPRE (PL9.1.11) ...................................... 4-81 REP4.2 LED ASSY ERASE (PL4.1.8) .............................................................................................. 4-84 REP4.3 (SCC) PWBA HVPS (PL4.1.19) .......................................................................................... 4-86 REP4.4 PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21)......................................................................................................... 4-88 REP4.5 KIT BLOCK PHD RIGHT (PL4.1.97) ................................................................................... 4-90 REP4.6 KIT BLOCK PHD LEFT (PL4.1.98)...................................................................................... 4-93 REP4.7 KIT ROS (PL4.1.99) ............................................................................................................ 4-96 PL5 DISPENSER................................................................................................................................. 4-103 REP5.1 DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1) ........................................................................................... 4-103 REP5.2 FRAME ASSY MOT (PL5.1.2)........................................................................................... 4-111 REP5.3 (SCC) MOTOR ASSY DISP (PL5.1.3) .............................................................................. 4-113 REP5.4 SWITCH (PL5.1.9)............................................................................................................. 4-114 REP5.5 HOUSING ASSY AUGER (PL5.1.10)................................................................................ 4-116 REP5.6 CONNECTOR CRUM (PL5.1.14)...................................................................................... 4-117 REP5.7 TONER CARTRIDGE (K), (C), (M), (Y) (PL5.1.21~24) ..................................................... 4-118 REP5.8 KIT HOLDER TCRU (K), (C), (M), (Y) (PL5.1.96~99) ....................................................... 4-121 PL6 TRANSFER & FUSER.................................................................................................................. 4-123 REP6.1 FUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1) .................................................................................................... 4-123 REP6.2 STOPPER PIVOT (PL6.1.3), GEAR T4 (PL6.1.5), SHAFT ASSY PIVOT (PL6.1.6)......... 4-125 REP6.3 TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7)............................................................................................. 4-130 PL7 DRIVE........................................................................................................................................... 4-133 REP7.1 (SCC) DRIVE ASSY SUB (PL7.1.1).................................................................................. 4-133 REP7.2 (SCC) DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2) ................................................................................ 4-136 REP7.3 GEAR P2 (PL7.1.3) ........................................................................................................... 4-138 REP7.4 (SCC) DRIVE ASSY PH (PL7.1.4) .................................................................................... 4-140 REP7.5 SENSOR PHOTO: COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR (PL7.1.7) ............................. 4-144 PL8 ELECTRICAL ............................................................................................................................... 4-146 REP8.1 (SCC) FAN MAIN (PL8.1.1)............................................................................................... 4-146 REP8.2 DUCT FAN (PL8.1.2)......................................................................................................... 4-148 REP8.3 (ISC) (SCC) PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9).................................................................................... 4-152 REP8.4 MULTI PROTOCOL CARD (PL8.1.11).............................................................................. 4-159 REP8.5 MEMORY CARD (PL8.1.12) ............................................................................................. 4-161 REP8.6 (SCC) PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1) ........................................................................................... 4-164 REP8.7 HARN ASSY INTERLOCK (PL8.2.5) ................................................................................ 4-167 REP8.8 SENSOR HUM (PL8.2.7) .................................................................................................. 4-169 REP8.9 (SCC) HARN ASSY SW PWR (PL8.2.9)........................................................................... 4-171 REP8.10 BREAKER GFI (PL8.2.11)............................................................................................... 4-175 REP8.11 (SCC) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) ........................................................................................ 4-178 REP8.12 PWBA EEPROM (XPRO) (PL8.2.16) .............................................................................. 4-182 REP8.13 ARRESTER ENE112D-10A (PL8.2.22)........................................................................... 4-184

4.3 Adjustments............................................................................................................4-186
ADJ4.3.1 Firmware .............................................................................................................................. 4-186 ADJ4.3.1.1 ESS F/W ...................................................................................................................... 4-186 ADJ4.3.1.2 MCU F/W ..................................................................................................................... 4-189 ADJ4.3.2 Directions for Replacing Important Information Stored Component..................................... 4-192

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.1 Preface

4.1 Preface
Parts removal and replacement procedures are described in major 8 items which correspond to classification of parts list. REP 1 REP 2 REP 3 REP 4 REP 5 REP 6 REP 7 REP 8 COVERS PAPER CASSETTE PAPER FEEDER XEROGRAPHICS DISPENSER TRANSFER & FUSER DRIVE ELECTRICAL

Note
When working on an item which is controlled as a spare part but the procedure therefore is not described, observe carefully how the part is attached before removing the item.

Note
As a general rule, optional items are assumed to be removed from the equipment. However, you may work with optional items attached if it does not disturb your work.

Safety Critical Component (SCC) Control of the safety of components that are designated Safety Critical Components shall conform to Fuji Xerox Co. Ltdstipulated rules and regulations on Safety Critical Components. Important Information Stored Component (ISC) Important Information Stored Components store customers' important information they have entered after machine installation. When replacing Important Information Stored Components, you must replace and discard them, following the procedure described in Chapter 4 Adjustments. Take care never to let customer information leak out.

4-1

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.1 Preface

4.1.1 Before starting service procedure


Start the procedure after turning off the power and removing the power cord from the outlet. When performing the service operation around the FUSER ASSY, ensure that FUSER ASSY and its surrounding area have cooled down sufficiently. Pay sufficient attention to the parts during the procedure because they may be broken or may not perform their functions properly if unreasonable force is applied. Since various types of screws are used, ensure that the right screws are used in their right positions. Use special caution not to confuse the screws for plastic and the ones for sheet metal, because using the wrong type of screw may result in damage to the screw threads or other troubles.

No.

Type

Application Plastic

Shape

How to distinguish

Points to be noted Oblique screwing damages the thread because this screw cuts female threads in the base material as it goes in.

Major application locations

Screw for plastic Silver, tap


Parts etc Plastic

Coarse

Silver-colored Thread is coarser than that of the sheet metal type. Screw tip is thin.

Sheet metal Screw for metal sheet Silver


Parts etc Sheet metal

Silver-colored Diameter of the thread section is uniform.

Screw for metal sheet Silver, with an external tooth washer

Sheet metal

Parts etc Sheet metal

Silver-colored Provided with an external tooth washer. Diameter of the thread section is uniform.

Mounting positions of the ground wires.

4-2

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.1 Preface
Wear a wristband or the like as far as possible to remove static electricity of the human body. Keep the front cover closed. Buzzer goes off when the machine is left powered on with the front cover open for five minutes or longer to prevent the drum deterioration due to exposure to light. When opening the front door in a removal/replacement operation, cover the drum to keep it from being exposed to light. Remove PAPER CASSETTE, PHD ASSY, TONER CARTRIDGE and FUSER ASSY, and put them in a place where they do not affect the procedure. (Note that the service procedures can be performed with those parts in place depending on the target section of removal/replacement.)

FUSER ASSY

PHD ASSY

TONER CARTRIDGE (K)

PAPER CASSETTE TONER CARTRIDGE (C)

TONER CARTRIDGE (M)

TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) Wsb03001GA

4-3

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.1 Preface

4.1.2 General notes


The string (PL X.Y.Z) suffixed to the part name in the procedure denotes that the part corresponds to the plate (PL) X.Y, item Z of [Engineering Parts list], and its shape and fitting position can be checked in [Engineering Parts list]. Directional descriptions used in the procedures are defined as follows: -Front: Direction toward you when facing the front of the printer. -Rear: Direction opposite to the front when facing the front of the printer. -Left: Left-hand direction when facing the front of the printer. -Right: Right-hand direction when facing the front of the printer

Wsb03002GA
Figure: Definitions of Printer Orientation

The string (REP X.Y) that appears in or at the end of the procedure denotes that the related service procedure is described in [REP X.Y]. Screws shown in the illustrations are to be unscrewed and removed using a Phillips head (cross-slot) screwdriver, unless otherwise specified. Black arrows shown in the illustrations denote moving directions. When numbers are assigned to these arrows, they refer to the order in the procedure. Refer to Chapter 7 Connector [P (plug) / J (jack)] for the positions of connectors (P/J).

4-4

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)


PL1 COVERS (SCC) COVER TOP (PL1.1.1) REP1.1
[Removal] 1 Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 2 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 3 4 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the COVER TOP (PL1.1.1) to the printer.

4-5

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
5 Lift up the front side of the COVER TOP to release the COVER TOP from the two pegs on the printer.

Slide the COVER TOP to backward and lift up it to release the COVER TOP from the hooks.

Note
Release the left and right sides of the COVER TOP in order.

4-6

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
7 Remove the COVER TOP from the printer.

4-7

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP1.2
[Removal] 1

TRAY EXT (PL1.1.2)

Open the TRAY EXT (PL1.1.2).

Press the right side of the TRAY EXT to the left, to release the hole of the TRAY EXT from the boss of the printer.

4-8

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
3 Remove the TRAY EXT.

4-9

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP1.3
[Removal] 1 2

(SCC) COVER REAR (PL1.1.3)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 4 5 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6 7 8 9 10 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the COVER REAR (PL1.1.3) to the printer.

4-10

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
11 Remove the COVER REAR from the printer.

4-11

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP1.4
[Removal] 1 2

COVER CST (PL1.1.4)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Press the left and right sides of the COVER CST (PL1.1.4) to release the two hooks from the holes of the printer, remove it.

4-12

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP1.5
[Removal] 1

COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR (PL1.1.5)

Open the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR (PL1.1.5).

Press the upper hinge of the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR to release the boss on the hinge from the hole of the printer, move the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR to arrow direction.

4-13

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
3 Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR.

4-14

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP1.6
[Removal] 1

COVER SIDE R (PL1.1.6)

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 2 3 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 4 5 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

Accesses Position (The 7) shows the procedure number.)

4-15

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
6 Remove the seven screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the COVER SIDE R (PL1.1.6) to the printer.

Release the front hook of the COVER SIDE R.

Remove the COVER SIDE R from the printer.

4-16

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP1.7
[Removal] 1 2

COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 4 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 5 6 7 8 9 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the SHAFT PIVOT. (REP1.10)

Accesses Position (The 10), 11) and 12) show the procedure number.)

Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, leave the relay connector on the COVER ASSY FRONT side.

4-17

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
10 Release the harness of the HARNESS ASSY A-OP (PL1.1.17) from the rib of the printer, disengage the connector (P/J2900) of the HARNESS ASSY B (PL9.1.12).

11

Release the HARNESS ASSY A-OP from the hooks of the printer.

12

Insert the right side under part of the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7) into the inside of the printer.

4-18

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
13 Tilt the COVER ASSY FRONT, release the left side boss of the TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) from the COVER ASSY FRONT.

14

Release the right side boss of the TRANSFER ASSY from the COVER ASSY FRONT, remove the COVER ASSY FRONT from the printer.

4-19

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP1.8
[Removal] 1 2

LATCH FRONT (PL1.1.8)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 4 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 5 6 7 8 9 10 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the SHAFT PIVOT. (REP1.10) Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. (REP1.7)

Note
Described below is the removal procedure common among the left and right LATCH FRONTs. 11 Release the hook of the LATCH FRONT (PL1.1.8), rotate the LATCH FRONT by 90 degrees.

4-20

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
12 Lift up the LATCH FRONT.

4-21

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP1.9

HARNESS ASSY A-OP (PL1.1.17), KIT COVER FRONT (PL1.1.97, 98, 99)

[Removal] 1 2 Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 4 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the SHAFT PIVOT. (REP1.10) Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. (REP1.7) Remove the LATCH FRONT. (REP1.8) Remove the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL. (REP1.11) Remove the KIT CVR HARNESS. (REP1.13) Remove the KIT GUIDE BELT. (REP1.14)

4-22

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
15 Remove the SPRING LATCH OUT (PL1.1.10) from the PLATE LATCH (PL1.1.9).

16

Move the PLATE LATCH to the left.

17

Remove the PLATE LATCH from the COVER ASSY FRONT.

4-23

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
18 Release the HARNESS ASSY A-OP (PL1.1.17) from the hooks of the COVER ASSY FRONT.

19

Pull the HARNESS ASSY A-OP out from the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL side, remove it.

4-24

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP1.10
Note

SHAFT PIVOT (PL1.1.18)

Described below is the removal procedure common among the left and right SHAFT PIVOTs (PL1.1.18). [Removal] 1 2 Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Release the hook of the SHAFT PIVOT (PL1.1.18) to pull out the SHAFT PIVOT.

4-25

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP1.11
[Removal] 1

CONSOLE ASSY PANEL (PL1.1.19)

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 2 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

Note
Take care not to move the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL away from the COVER ASSY FRONT too far because the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL is secured to the HARNESS ASSY A-OP.

Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, take care not to drop the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL. 3 Release the six hooks of the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL (PL1.1.19), using a miniature screwdriver.

4-26

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
4 Remove the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL from the COVER ASSY FRONT.

Disengage the connector (P/J220) of the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL, and then remove the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL.

4-27

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note
Set the core of the HARNESS ASSY A-OP to the space of the COVER ASSY FRONT when attaching the COVER ASSY FRONT.

4-28

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP1.12
[Removal] 1

(SCC) COVER SIDE L (PL1.1.20)

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 2 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 3 4 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

Accesses Position (The 6) shows the procedure number.)

Remove the three screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the COVER SIDE L (PL1.1.20) to the printer.

4-29

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
6 Release the front hook of the COVER SIDE L.

Swing the COVER SIDE L to backward, to release the two notches of the COVER SIDE L from the two hooks of the COVER REAR (PL1.1.3). Remove the COVER SIDE L from the printer.

4-30

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP1.13
[Removal] 1 2

KIT CVR HARNESS (PL1.1.95)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 4 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the SHAFT PIVOT. (REP1.10) Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. (REP1.7) Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the KIT CVR HARNESS (PL1.1.95) to the COVER ASSY FRONT.

4-31

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
12 Remove the KIT CVR HARNESS from the COVER ASSY FRONT.

Note
When attaching the KIT CVR HARNESS, mate the tabs of the KIT CVR HARNESS with the notch and the hole of the COVER ASSY FRONT.

4-32

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP1.14
[Removal] 1 2

KIT GUIDE BELT (PL1.1.96)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 4 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the SHAFT PIVOT. (REP1.10) Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. (REP1.7) Remove the three screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the KIT GUIDE BELT (PL1.1.96) to the COVER ASSY FRONT.

4-33

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
12 Remove the KIT GUIDE BELT from the COVER ASSY FRONT.

Note
When attaching the KIT GUIDE BELT, mate the tabs of the KIT GUIDE BELT with the notch and hole of the COVER ASSY FRONT.

4-34

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

PL2

PAPER CASSETTE CASSETTE ASSY 250 (PL2.1.1)

REP2.1
[Removal] 1

Pull out the CASSETTE ASSY 250 (PL2.1.1) from the printer.

4-35

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP2.2
[Removal] 1 2

PLATE ASSY BOTTOM (PL2.1.2)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Push the LATCH BOTTOM L (PL2.1.14) and the LATCH BOTTOM R (PL2.1.15), lift the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM (PL2.1.2) up.

Release the left and right bosses of the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM by pressing the left and right of the HOUSING CST 250 (PL2.1.18) to outside direction.

Push the left and right hooks of the HOUSING CST 250 to release the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM, remove the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM from the CASSETTE ASSY 250 (PL2.1.1).

Note
When attaching the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM, make sure that the bosses on the under side of the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM were attached to the SPRING N/F L (PL2.1.3) and the SPRING N/F R (PL2.1.4).
LATCH BOTTOM R

LATCH BOTTOM L

Wsb04001FA

4-36

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

PLATE ASSY BOTTOM

SPRING N/F R

SPRING N/F L

Wsb04002FA

4-37

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP2.3
[Removal] 1 2

HOLDER ASSY RETARD (PL2.1.5)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Hold the CASSETTE ASSY 250 (PL2.1.1) and pinch the left and right hooks of the HOLDER ASSY RETARD (PL2.1.5). Swing the HOLDER ASSY RETARD to release the two hooks.

Pull up the HOLDER ASSY RETARD to remove the HOLDER ASSY RETARD from the CASSETTE ASSY 250.

4-38

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note
Mate the under tab of the HOLDER ASSY RETARD with the hole of the CASSETTE ASSY 250 when attaching the HOLDER ASSY RETARD.

4-39

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP2.4
[Removal] 1 2 3

LATCH BOTTOM L (PL2.1.14), SPRING LATCH B (PL2.1.16)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Remove the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM. (REP2.2) Remove the SPRING LATCH B (PL2.1.16) from the bosses of the LATCH BOTTOM L (PL2.1.14) and the HOUSING CST 250 (PL2.1.18)

Shift the LATCH BOTTOM L to inside, remove the LATCH BOTTOM L from the groove of the HOUSING CST 250.

Note
When the LATCH BOTTOM L and the LATCH BOTTOM R are removed at same time, use caution not to confuse their securing positions.
LATCH BOTTOM L

SPRING LATCH B

Wsb04003FA

4-40

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP2.5
[Removal] 1 2 3

LATCH BOTTOM R (PL2.1.15), SPRING LATCH B (PL2.1.16)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Remove the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM. (REP2.2) Remove the SPRING LATCH B (PL2.1.16) from the bosses of the LATCH BOTTOM R (PL2.1.15) and the HOUSING CST 250 (PL2.1.18).

Shift the LATCH BOTTOM R to inside, remove the LATCH BOTTOM R from the groove of the HOUSING CST 250.

Note
When the LATCH BOTTOM L and the LATCH BOTTOM R are removed at same time, use caution not to confuse their securing positions.
LATCH BOTTOM R

SPRING LATCH B

Wsb04004FA

4-41

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP2.6
[Removal] 1 2 3

TRAY ASSY EXTENSION (PL2.1.17)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Shift the TRAY ASSY EXTENSION (PL2.1.17) to backward until it stops. Push the back center of the HOUSING CST 250 (PL2.1.18) to release the stopper of the TRAY ASSY EXTENSION.

Remove the TRAY ASSY EXTENSION from the CASSETTE ASSY 250 (PL2.1.1) by depressing the latch lever of the TRAY ASSY EXTENSION.
TRAY ASSY EXTENSION

Wsb04005FA

4-42

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP2.7
[Removal] 1 2 3 4 5

GUIDE ASSY END (PL2.1.23)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Shift the TRAY ASSY EXTENSION (PL2.1.17) to backward until it stops. Shift the GUIDE ASSY END (PL2.1.23) to frontward until it stops. Push the front center of the TRAY ASSY EXTENSION to release the stopper of the GUIDE ASSY END. Remove the GUIDE ASSY END from the CASSETTE ASSY 250 (PL2.1.1) by depressing the latch lever of the GUIDE ASSY END.
GUIDE ASSY END

Wsb04006FA

4-43

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP2.8
[Removal] 1 2 3

KIT SIDE GUIDE (PL2.1.99)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Remove the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM. (REP2.2) Release the hook that fixes the GEAR PINION (PL2.1.7), remove the GEAR PINION from the CASSETTE ASSY 250 (PL2.1.1).

Shift the GUIDE SIDE L (PL2.1.6) to inside to mate the two under hooks on the GUIDE SIDE L with holes of the HOUSING CST 250 (PL2.1.18).

Remove GUIDE SIDE L from CASETTTE ASSY 250 by sliding GUIDE SIDE L so that the three hooks (left, center, right) on the bottom are released from the holes on HOUSING CST 250. Ensure that the hooks are released one by one from left to right.

Shift the GUIDE SIDE ASSY R (PL2.1.8) to inside to mate the two under hooks on the GUIDE SIDE ASSY R with the holes of the HOUSING CST 250.

Remove GUIDE SIDE R from CASETTTE ASSY 250 by sliding GUIDE SIDE L so that the three hooks (right, center, left) on the bottom are released from the holes on HOUSING CST 250. Ensure that the hooks are released one by one from right to left.

Note
Shift the GUIDE SIDE L and GUIDE SIDE ASSY R to outside before attaching the GEAR PINION.
GEAR PINION

Wsb04007FA

4-44

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

hook

GUIDE SIDE L

Wsb04008FA

4-45

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

hook

GUIDE SIDE R

Wsb04009FA

4-46

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

PL3

PAPER FEEDER (SCC) CLUTCH ASSY DRV (PL3.1.1)

REP3.1
[Removal] 1 2

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 4 5 6 7 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Release the harness of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV (PL3.1.1) from the hook of the DRIVE ASSY PH (PL7.1.4).

Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, leave the relay connector on the printer harness side.

4-47

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
8 Disengage the connector (P/J262) of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV.

Remove the E-ring that fixes the CLUTCH ASSY DRV to the shaft, using a miniature screwdriver, remove the CLUTCH ASSY DRV.

4-48

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note
When attaching the CLUTCH ASSY DRV, mate the notch of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV with the rib of the DRIVE ASSY PH.

4-49

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP3.2
[Removal] 1 2

BEARING REGI (PL3.1.2)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 4 5 6 7 8 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Remove the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. (REP3.1) Release the two hooks of the BEARING REGI (PL3.1.2), remove the BEARING REGI from the shaft.

4-50

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP3.3
[Removal] 1 2

UPPER UNIT (REFERENCE ONLY)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 4 5 6 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the TONER CARTRIDGE (K), (C), (M), (Y). (REP5.7) Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3) Remove the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. (REP3.1) Remove the BEARING REGI. (REP3.2) Remove the FAN MAIN. (REP8.1) Remove the DUCT FAN. (REP8.2) Remove the PWBA ESS. (REP8.3) Remove the PWBA MCU. (REP8.11) Remove the BREAKER GFI. (REP8.10) Remove the SHAFT PIVOT. (REP1.10) Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. (REP1.7) Remove the STOPPER PIVOT, GEAR T4 and SHAFT ASSY PIVOT. (REP6.2) Remove the TRANSFER ASSY. (REP6.3)

4-51

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
Accesses Position (All the numbers show the procedure number.)

23

Remove the one screw (silver, with washer, 6mm) that fixes the grounding terminal of the HARN ASSY GFI GND (PL8.2.10).

24

Disengage the connector (P/J48) of the HARN ASSY SW PWR (PL8.2.9) on the PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1), release the hook of the GUIDE HARNESS AC (PL8.2.6).

4-52

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
25 Remove the GUIDE HARNESS AC from the printer together with the HARN ASSY SW PWR.

26

Remove the two screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the BRACKET MCU R (PL8.2.15) to the printer.

27

Remove the BRACKET MCU R from the printer.

4-53

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
28 Remove the two screws that fix the front side of the printer frame.

29

Remove the two screws that fix the under part of the DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1).

30

Open the HOLDER TCRU (K), (C), (M), and (Y), remove the one screw (silver, tap, 8mm) that fixes the right side of the printer frame.

4-54

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
31 Remove the one screw (silver, M4, 6mm) that fixes the rear side of the DISPENSER ASSY and the one screw (silver, tap, 8mm) that fixes the MCU L (PL8.2.18).

32

Remove the one screw (silver, tap, 8mm) that fixes the left side of the printer frame and the one screw (silver, tap, 8mm) that fixes the BRACKET MCU L.

33

Remove the UPPER UNIT.

4-55

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note
When attaching the UPPER UNIT, route the connection harness of the TRANSFER ASSY through the notch of the UPPER UNIT.

Note
When attaching the UPPER UNIT, mate the two holes of the UPPER UNIT with the bosses of the FEEDER ASSY V.

4-56

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP3.4
[Removal] 1 2

(SCC) FEEDER ASSY V (PL3.1.3)

Remove the UPPER UNIT. (REP3.3) Remove the eight screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the FRAME HVPS (PL4.1.20) to the FEEDER ASSY V (PL3.1.3).

Remove the FRAME HVPS from the FEEDER ASSY V together with the PWBA HVPS (PL4.1.19), remove the FEEDER ASSY V.

4-57

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP3.5
[Removal] 1

STOPPER CST (PL3.1.7)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 2 3 Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4) Remove the one screw (silver, tap, 8mm) that fixes the STOPPER CST (PL3.1.7) to the printer.

Remove the STOPPER CST from the printer.

4-58

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP3.6
[Removal] 1

ARRESTER ENE112D-10A (PL3.1.20)

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 2 3 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 4 5 6 7 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the PLATE EARTH FDR (PL3.1.19) and PLATE EARTH CST (PL3.1.21) to the printer.

Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, do not bend the PLATE EARTH FDR and the PLATE EARTH CST

4-59

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
8 Move the ARRESTER ENE112D-10A (PL3.1.20) from between the PLATEs and the frame, remove it.

ARRESTER ENE112D-10A

Wsb04010FA

4-60

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP3.7
[Removal] 1 2

KIT SOLENOID FEED (PL3.1.99)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 4 5 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3) Remove the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. (REP3.1) Remove the DRIVE ASSY PH. (REP7.4) Remove the SPRING FEED OUT (PL3.1.13) from the printer.

4-61

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
14 Release the hook of the GEAR ASSY FEED (PL3.1.14), remove the GEAR ASSY FEED from the SHAFT ASSY FEED (PL3.2.2).

15

Remove the SPRING LEVER (PL3.1.10) from the printer.

16

Release the hook of the LEVER FEED (PL3.1.11), remove the LEVER FEED from the printer.

4-62

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
17 Release the harness of the SOLENOID FEED MSI (PL3.1.9) from the hooks of the printer.

Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, leave the relay connector on the printer harness side. 18 Release the relay connector from the rib of the printer, disengage the connecter (P/J231) of the SOLENOID FEED MSI.

4-63

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
19 Remove the one screw (silver, tap, 8mm) that fixes the SOLENOID FEED MSI to the printer, remove the SOLENOID FEED MSI.

Note
When attaching the GEAR ASSY FEED, it is easier to put the D-cut surface of the SHAFT ASSY FEED on the front.

Note
When attaching the SPRING FEED OUT, make sure that the SPRING FEED OUT position is correct.

4-64

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP3.8
[Removal] 1 2

ROLL ASSY FEED (PL3.2.4)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 4 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Release the hook of the ROLL CORE MSI (PL3.2.3) on the left of the ROLL ASSY FEED (PL 3.2.4), and move the ROLL CORE MSI to left until it stops. 5 Release the groove on the ROLL ASSY FEED from the vertical pin mounted on the SHAFT ASSY FEED (PL3.2.2) by sliding the ROLL ASSY FEED to the left. 6 Close the COVER ASSY FRONT.

4-65

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
7 Remove the ROLL ASSY FEED from the SHAFT ASSY FEED by rotating the ROLL ASSY FEED 180 degrees.

ROLL CORE MSI

ROLL ASSY FEED

Wsb04011FA

4-66

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

ROLL ASSY FEED

Wsb04012FA

4-67

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP3.9
[Removal] 1 2

ROLL ASSY REGI (PL3.2.9)

Remove the UPPER UNIT. (REP3.3) Release the hook of the ACTUATOR REGI OUT (PL3.2.6), shift the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL (PL3.2.8) to right side.

Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, take care not to drop and lose the SPRING REGI OUT (PL3.2.7). 3 Release the ACTUATOR REGI OUT from the hook on the CHUTE UP (PL3.2.26), open the ACTUATOR REGI OUT.

4-68

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
4 Remove the left and right E-rings that fix the shaft of the ROLL ASSY REGI (PL3.2.9).

Note
When carrying out work shown below, it is easier to push the ROLL REGI METAL (PL3.2.10) to frontward. 5 Remove the GEAR REGI R (PL3.2.22), the BEARING EARTH REGI (PL3.2.21) and the BEARING R (PL3.2.31) from the ROLL ASSY REGI. 6 7 Move the ACTUATOR REGI OUT to right until it stops. Shift the ROLL ASSY REGI to left to remove the right shaft of the ROLL ASSY REGI, remove the ROLL ASSY REGI from the FEEDER ASSY V (PL3.1.3) together with the ACTUATOR REGI OUT and the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL. 8 Remove the ACTUATOR REGI OUT and the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL from the ROLL ASSY REGI.

4-69

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note
After attaching the ACTUATOR REGI OUT and the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL, check the movement of the ACTUATOR REGI OUT and the ACTUATOR REGI IN.
ACTUATOR REGI OUT

BEARING R

NOTE GEAR REGI R BEARING EARTH REGI

ROLL REGI METAL Wsb04013FA ACTUATOR REGI OUT ACTUATOR REGI ROLL

ROLL ASSY REGI Wsb04014FA

4-70

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP3.10
[Removal] 1 2

SENSOR PHOTO: SSI NO PAPER (PL3.2.13)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 4 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Before working, put the paper on the transfer belt to protect from the damage.

Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, take care not to move the BRACKET SNS from the printer too far because they are connected with the harness.

4-71

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
5 Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the BRACKET SNS (PL3.2.28) to the printer, remove the BRACKET SNS.

Release the three hooks that fix the SENSOR PHOTO: SSI NO PAPER (PL3.2.13) to the BRACKET SNS, and remove the SENSOR PHOTO: SSI NO PAPER.

Disengage the connector (P/J233) of the SENSOR PHOTO: SSI NO PAPER.

4-72

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP3.11
[Removal] 1 2

SENSOR PHOTO: CST NO PAPER (PL3.2.13)

Remove the UPPER UNIT. (REP3.3) Release the three hooks that fix the SENSOR PHOTO: CST NO PAPER (PL3.2.13) to the FEEDER ASSY V (PL3.1.3), and remove the SENSOR PHOTO: CST NO PAPER.

Disengage the connector (P/J234) of the SENSOR PHOTO: CST NO PAPER.

4-73

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP3.12
[Removal] 1 2

SENSOR PHOTO: REGI (PL3.2.13)

Remove the UPPER UNIT. (REP3.3) Release the hook of the ACTUATOR REGI OUT (PL3.2.6), shift the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL (PL3.2.8) to right side.

Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, take care not to drop and lose the SPRING REGI OUT (PL3.2.7). 3 Release the ACTUATOR REGI OUT from the hook on the CHUTE UP (PL3.2.26), open the ACTUATOR REGI OUT.

Note
When carrying out the work this procedure, it is easier to push the ACTUATOR REGI IN (PL3.2.11) to downward.

4-74

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
4 Release the three hooks that fix the SENSOR PHOTO: REGI (PL3.2.13) to the FEEDER ASSY V (PL3.1.3), and remove the SENSOR PHOTO: REGI.

Disengage the connector (P/J232) of the SENSOR PHOTO: REGI.

Note
After attaching the ACTUATOR REGI OUT and the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL, check the movement of the ACTUATOR REGI OUT and the ACTUATOR REGI IN.

4-75

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP3.13
[Removal] 1 2 3

ACTUATOR REGI IN (PL3.2.11), SPRING ACT REGI (PL3.2.12)

Remove the UPPER UNIT. (REP3.3) Remove the ROLL ASSY REGI. (REP3.9) Release the left shaft of the ACTUATOR REGI IN (PL3.2.11) from the hook of the CHUTE UP (PL3.2.26).

Remove the ACTUATOR REGI IN and the SPRING ACT REGI (PL3.2.12) by releasing the right shaft of the ACTUATOR REGI IN from the hole of the CHUTE UP.

Remove the SPRING ACT REGI from the ACTUATOR REGI IN.

Note
When attaching the ACTUATOR REGI IN and the SPRING ACT REGI, ensure that the SPRING ACT REGI is hung to ACTUATOR REGI IN and the CHUTE UP correctly.
NOTE

ACTUATOR REGI IN

SPRING ACT REGI

Wsb04025FA

4-76

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP3.14
[Removal] 1 2

ACTUATOR SSI (PL3.2.14), SPRING ACT SSI (PL3.2.15)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 4 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Before working, put the paper on the transfer belt to protect from the damage.

Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, take care not to move the BRACKET SNS from the printer too far because they are connected with the harness.

4-77

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
5 Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the BRACKET SNS (PL3.2.28) to the printer, remove the BRACKET SNS.

6 7

Release the left shaft of the ACTUATOR SSI (PL3.2.14) from the hook of the CHUTE UP (PL3.2.26). Remove the ACTUATOR SSI and the SPRING ACT SSI (PL3.2.15) by releasing the right shaft of the ACTUATOR SSI from the hole of the CHUTE UP.

Remove the SPRING ACT SSI from the ACTUATOR SSI.

4-78

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note
When attaching the ACTUATOR SSI and the SPRING ACT SSI, ensure that the SPRING ACT SSI is hung to ACTUATOR SSI and the CHUTE UP correctly.
NOTE

SPRING ACT SSI

ACTUATOR SSI

Wsb04026FA

4-79

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP3.15

SPRING STP (PL3.2.16), ACTUATOR ASSY NO PAPER (PL3.2.32)

[Removal] 1 2 3 4 Remove the UPPER UNIT. (REP3.3) Remove the FEEDER ASSY V. (REP3.4) Remove the SENSOR PHOTO: CST NO PAPER. (REP3.11) Release the left and right shafts of the ACTUATOR ASSY NO PAPER (PL3.2.32) from the hole of the CHUTE UP by pushing the CHUTE UP (PL3.2.26). Remove the ACTUATOR ASSY NO PAPER and the SPRING STP (PL3.2.16). 5 Remove the SPRING STP from the ACTUATOR ASSY NO PAPER.

Note
When attaching the ACTUATOR ASSY NO PAPER and the SPRING STP, ensure that the SPRING STP is hung to ACTUATOR NO PAPER and the CHUTE UP correctly.

SPRING STP

NOTE

ACTUATOR ASSY NO PAPER

Wsb04027FA

4-80

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

PL4

XEROGRAPHICS HOLDER CRUM (PL4.1.3), HARN ASSY PHD XPRE (PL9.1.11)

REP4.1
[Removal] 1 2

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 4 5 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3) Remove the FAN MAIN. (REP8.1) Remove the DUCT FAN. (REP8.2) Remove the PWBA ESS. (REP8.3) Remove the PWBA MCU. (REP8.11) Remove the BREAKER GFI. (REP8.10) Remove the KIT ROS. (REP4.7) Release the three hooks that fix the HOLDER CRUM (PL4.1.3) to the printer, and remove the HOLDER CRUM. 18 19 Remove the CONNECTOR CRUM of the HARN ASSY PHD XPRO (PL9.1.11) from the printer. Disengage the connector (P/J144) of the PWBA EEPROM (XPRO) (PL8.2.16).

4-81

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
20 Release the HARN ASSY PHD XPRO from the hook of the printer and the GUIDE HARNESS MCU (PL8.2.19), remove it.

HOLDER CRUM

Wsb04015FA

4-82

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

CONNECT CRUM

HARN ASSY PHD XPRO

Wsb04016FA

4-83

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP4.2
[Removal] 1

LED ASSY ERASE (PL4.1.8)

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 2 3 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 4 5 6 7 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the LED ASSY ERASE (PL4.1.8) to the printer.

4-84

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
8 Remove the LED ASSY ERASE from the printer.

Disengage the connector (P/J141) of the LED ASSY ERASE.

4-85

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP4.3
[Removal]

(SCC) PWBA HVPS (PL4.1.19)

Note
Use the wrist strap to protect the PWB from the electrostatic. 1 2 Remove the UPPER UNIT. (REP3.3) Remove the seven screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the PWBA HVPS (PL4.1.19) to the FRAME HVPS (PL4.1.20).

Remove the PWBA HVPS from the FRAME HVPS.

4-86

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note
When attaching the PWBA HVPS, mate the notch and hole of the PWBA HVPS with the tabs of the FRAME HVPS.

4-87

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP4.4
[Removal]

PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21)

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 1 Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
When carrying out the work this procedure, take care not to cover the left and right of the belt guards with the paper. 2 Put the paper on the TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) to protect the belt.

Rotate the four stoppers of the PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) to the counter clockwise direction, to release the lock.

4-88

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
4 Remove the PHD ASSY toward you by pulling it by the left and right handles.

Lift up the PHD ASSY from the printer.

Note
When attaching the PHD ASSY, do not break the belt of the TRANSFER ASSY.

4-89

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP4.5
[Removal] 1

KIT BLOCK PHD RIGHT (PL4.1.97)

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 2 3 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 4 5 6 7 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the LED ASSY ERASE. (REP4.2)

Accesses Position (The 8), 9), 10) and 11) show the procedure number.)

Note
Described below is the removal procedure common among the upper and lower BLOCK STOPPER PHD ADs (PL4.1.7).

4-90

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
8 Release the hook of the BLOCK STOPPER PHD AD (PL4.1.7), using a miniature screwdriver.

Remove the BLOCK STOPPER PHD AD from the printer.

10

Remove the SPRING PHD (PL4.1.4) from the printer.

4-91

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
11 Rotate the LEVER PHD (PL4.1.5) slightly, remove the LEVER PHD from the printer.

4-92

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP4.6
[Removal] 1 2

KIT BLOCK PHD LEFT (PL4.1.98)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 4 5 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3) Remove the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. (REP3.1) Remove the BEARING REGI. (REP3.2) Remove the DRIVE ASSY PH. (REP7.4) Remove the GEAR P2. (REP7.3) Remove the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. (REP7.2)

4-93

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
Accesses Position (The 16), 17), 18) and 19) show the procedure number.)

Note
Described next procedure is the removal procedure common among the upper and lower BLOCK STOPPER PDH Ds (PL4.1.6). 16 Release the hook of the BLOCK STOPPER PHD D (PL4.1.6), using a miniature screwdriver.

17

Remove the BLOCK STOPPER PHD D from the printer.

4-94

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
18 Remove the SPRING PHD (PL4.1.4) from the printer.

19

Rotate the LEVER PHD (PL4.1.5) slightly, remove the LEVER PHD from the printer.

4-95

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP4.7
[Removal] 1 2

KIT ROS (PL4.1.99)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 4 5 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3) Remove the FAN MAIN. (REP8.1) Remove the DUCT FAN. (REP8.2) Remove the PWBA ESS. (REP8.3) Remove the PWBA MCU. (REP8.11) Remove the BREAKER GFI. (REP8.10)

4-96

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
Accesses Position (All the numbers show the procedure number.)

16

Remove the one screw (silver, with washer, 6mm) that fixes the grounding terminal of the HARN ASSY GFI GND (PL8.2.10).

17

Disengage the connector (P/J48) of the HARN ASSY SW PWR (PL8.2.9) on the PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1), release the hook of the GUIDE HARNESS AC (PL8.2.6).

4-97

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
18 Remove the GUIDE HARNESS AC from the printer together with the HARN ASSY SW PWR.

19

Remove the two screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the BRACKET MCU R (PL8.2.15) to the printer.

20

Remove the BRACKET MCU R from the printer.

4-98

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
21 Remove all the connectors on the PWBA LVPS, release the harness of the HARN ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.2) from the GUIDE HARNESS FSR (PL8.2.2).

22

Release the hooks of the GUIDE HARNESS FSR, move the GUIDE HARNESS FSR to remove it from the FRAME ASSY LVPS (PL8.2.3).

4-99

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
23 Remove the two screws (silver, M4, 6mm) and the six screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the FRAME ASSY LVPS to the printer.

24

Remove the one screw (silver, M4, 6mm) that fixes the DRIVE ASSY SUB (PL7.1.1) to the FRAME ASSY LVPS, remove the FRAME ASSY LVPS from the printer together with the PWBA LVPS.

25

Disengage the two connectors (P/J411, 412) of the ROS ASSY (PL4.1.1).

4-100

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
26 Remove the four screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the left and right sides of the SPRING ROSs (PL4.1.2) to the printer. Remove the SPRING ROSs from the printer.

27

Lift up the ROS ASSY slowly from the printer.

4-101

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note
When attaching the ROS ASSY, Mate the under side boss of the ROS ASSY with the hole of the printer.

Note
When attaching the ROS ASSY, ensure that the SPRING ROS is oriented to the direction.

Note
Since two types of screws are used for securing the FRAME ASSY LVPS, ensure that the right screws are used at their right securing positions. The securing positions for tap screws are marked with [T]. The securing positions for metal screws are marked with [M].

4-102

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

PL5

DISPENSER DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1)

REP5.1
[Removal] 1 2

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 4 5 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3) Remove the FAN MAIN. (REP8.1) Remove the DUCT FAN. (REP8.2) Remove the PWBA ESS. (REP8.3) Remove the PWBA MCU. (REP8.11) Remove the BREAKER GFI. (REP8.10) Remove the TONER CARTRIDGE (K), (C), (M), (Y). (REP5.7) Remove the KIT HOLDER TCRU (K), (C), (M), (Y). (REP5.8)

4-103

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
Accesses Position (All the numbers show the procedure number.)

18

Remove the one screw (silver, with washer, 6mm) that fixes the grounding terminal of the HARN ASSY GFI GND (PL8.2.10).

19

Disengage the connector (P/J48) of the HARN ASSY SW PWR (PL8.2.9) on the PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1), release the hook of the GUIDE HARNESS AC (PL8.2.6).

4-104

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
20 Remove the GUIDE HARNESS AC from the printer together with the HARN ASSY SW PWR.

21

Remove the two screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the BRACKET MCU R (PL8.2.15) to the printer.

22

Remove the BRACKET MCU R from the printer.

4-105

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
23 Remove all the connectors on the PWBA LVPS, release the harness of the HARN ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.2) from the GUIDE HARNESS FSR (PL8.2.2).

24

Release the hooks of the GUIDE HARNESS FSR, move the GUIDE HARNESS FSR to remove it from the FRAME ASSY LVPS (PL8.2.3).

4-106

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
25 Remove the two screws (silver, M4, 6mm) and the six screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the FRAME ASSY LVPS to the printer.

26

Remove the one screw (silver, M4, 6mm) that fixes the DRIVE ASSY SUB (PL7.1.1) to the FRAME ASSY LVPS, remove the FRAME ASSY LVPS from the printer together with the PWBA LVPS.

4-107

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
27 Release the hook of the connector of the HARN ASSY TEST RL (PL5.1.28), using pliers, and then remove it from the DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1).

28

Remove the HARN ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.2), HARN ASSY LVPS (PL9.1.3), HARN ASSY 24V (PL9.1.4), HARN ASSY ESS POWER (PL9.1.10) and HARNESS ASSY B (PL9.1.12) from the hooks of the DISPENSER ASSY.

4-108

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
29 Remove the four screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the DISPENSER ASSY to the printer.

30

Remove the one screw (silver, M4, 6mm) that fixes the rear side of the DISPENSER ASSY to the printer.

31

Release the hole of the DISPENSER ASSY from the boss of the printer, move the DISPENSER ASSY to backward. Remove the DISPENSER ASSY from the printer.

4-109

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note
Since two types of screws are used for securing the FRAME ASSY LVPS, ensure that the right screws are used at their right securing positions. The securing positions for tap screws are marked with [T]. The securing positions for metal screws are marked with [M].

4-110

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP5.2
[Removal] 1 2

FRAME ASSY MOT (PL5.1.2)

Remove the DISPENSER ASSY. (REP5.1) Disengage all the connectors of the MOTOR ASSY DISP (PL5.1.3), release all the harness from the hooks of the FRAME ASSY MOT (PL5.1.2).

Remove the five screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the FRAME ASSY MOT to the DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1).

Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, take care not to drop and lose the GEARs. 4 Release the notch of the CONDUCTOR MOTOR (PL5.1.4) from the hook of the FRAME DISP (PL5.1.12), remove the FRAME ASSY MOT from the DISPENSER ASSY.

4-111

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note
Ensure that the notch of the CONDUCTOR MOTOR is attached to the hook of the FRAME DISP.

FRAME ASSY MOT

Wsb04017FA

4-112

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP5.3
[Removal]

(SCC) MOTOR ASSY DISP (PL5.1.3)

Note
Described below is the removal procedure common among the four MOTOR ASSY DISPs. 1 2 Remove the DISPENSER ASSY. (REP5.1) Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fixes the MOTOR ASSY DISP (PL5.1.3) to the DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1), remove the MOTOR ASSY DISP. 3 Disengage the connector of the MOTOR ASSY DISP.
MOTOR ASSY DISP

Wsb04018FA

4-113

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP5.4
[Removal] 1

SWITCH (PL5.1.9)

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 2 3 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 4 5 6 7 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Release the hooks of the SWITCH (PL5.1.9) by using the miniature screwdriver, remove the SWITCH from the printer.

4-114

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
8 Disengage the connector (P/J291) of the SWITCH.

4-115

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP5.5
[Removal]

HOUSING ASSY AUGER (PL5.1.10)

Note
Described below is the removal procedure common among the four HOUSING ASSY AUGERs. 1 2 3 Remove the DISPENSER ASSY. (REP5.1) Remove the FRAME ASSY MOT. (REP5.2) Release the six hooks that fix the HOUSING ASSY AUGER (PL5.1.10) to the DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1), and remove the HOUSING ASSY AUGER.

HOUSING ASSY AUGER

Wsb04019FA

4-116

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP5.6
[Removal]

CONNECTOR CRUM (PL5.1.14)

Note
Described below is the removal procedure common among the four CONNECTOR CRUMs. 1 2 Remove the DISPENSER ASSY. (REP5.1) Release the two hooks that fix the CONNECTOR CRUM (PL5.1.14) to the DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1), and remove the CONNECTOR CRUM. 3 Disengage the connector of the CONNECTOR CRUM.

CONNECTOR CRUM

Wsb04020FA

4-117

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP5.7
[Removal]

TONER CARTRIDGE (K), (C), (M), (Y) (PL5.1.21~24)

Note
Described below is the removal procedure common among the four TONER CARTRIDGEs. 1 2 Open the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR (PL1.1.5). Move the handle of the TONER CARTRIDGE to backward, to release the lock.

Open the HOLDER TCRU.

4-118

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
4 Remove the TONER CARTRIDGE from the HOLDER TCRU.

Note
Shake the TONER CARTRIDGE five or six times for the distributing toner evenly when new toner cartridge.

4-119

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note
When attaching the TONER CARTRIDGE, mate the delta mark of the Handle with the lock mark on the cartridge holder.

4-120

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP5.8
[Removal] 1 2

KIT HOLDER TCRU (K), (C), (M), (Y) (PL5.1.96~99)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 4 5 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6 7 8 9 10 11 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3) Remove the TONER CARTRIDGE (K), (C), (M), (Y). (REP5.7)

Note
Described below is the removal procedure common among the four KIT HOLDER TCRUs.

4-121

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
12 Press the central part of the KIT HOLDER TCRU to release the hole of the KIT HOLDER TCRU from the boss of the FRAME DISP (PL5.1.12). Open the KIT HOLDER TCRU by 90 degrees.

13

Press the boss part of the KIT HOLDER TCRU, remove the KIT HOLDER TCRU from the printer.

4-122

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

PL6

TRANSFER & FUSER FUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1)

REP6.1
[Removal]

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 1 2 Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7). Pull the LEVER to release the lock.

Disengage the connector of the FUSER ASSY by pulling the right side of the FUSER ASSY toward you with the LEVER released.

4-123

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
4 Lift up the FUSER ASSY, move the FUSER ASSY to the right side.

4-124

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP6.2

STOPPER PIVOT (PL6.1.3), GEAR T4 (PL6.1.5), SHAFT ASSY PIVOT (PL6.1.6)

[Removal] 1 2 Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 4 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 5 6 7 8 9 10 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the SHAFT PIVOT. (REP1.10) Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. (REP1.7)

Accesses Position (All the numbers show the procedure number.)

4-125

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
11 Rotate the STOPPER PIVOT (PL6.1.3), mate the tabs of the STOPPER PIVOT with the notches of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2).

12

Remove the STOPPER PIVOT from the printer.

Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, take care not to drop the GEAR T4.

4-126

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
13 Pull out the PIVOT TRANS L (PL6.1.4), remove the GEAR T4 (PL6.1.5) from the printer.

14

Remove the one screw (silver, tap, 8mm) that fixes the SHAFT ASSY PIVOT (PL6.1.6) to the printer.

Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, keep the TRANSFER ASSY slightly lifted for ease of work.

4-127

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
15 Pull out the SHAFT ASSY PIVOT from the printer.

Note
Ensure that the GEAR T4 is oriented to the direction.

4-128

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note
When attaching the STOPPER PIVOT ensure that the flat face of the PIVOT TRANS L is oriented to the direction shown in the right.

4-129

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP6.3
[Removal] 1 2

TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 4 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the SHAFT PIVOT. (REP1.10) Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. (REP1.7) Insert the SHAFT PIVOT (PL1.1.18) to the hole of the frame, to fix the TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7).

4-130

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, take care not to scratch the belt surface of the TRANSFER ASSY. 12 Release the hook of the COVER HARNESS 2 (PL6.1.8), using a miniature screwdriver, and then remove the COVER HARNESS 2.

Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, leave the relay connector on the TRANSFER ASSY harness side. 13 Release the harness from the pegs of the TRANSFER ASSY, disengage the connector (P/J281) of the TRANSFER ASSY.

4-131

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
14 Release the harness coming from printer from hook of the TRANSFER ASSY.

15 16 17

Tilt the TRANSFER ASSY slowly. Remove the STOPPER PIVOT, GEAR T4 and SHAFT ASSY PIVOT. (REP6.2) Remove the TRANSFER ASSY from the printer.

4-132

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

PL7

DRIVE (SCC) DRIVE ASSY SUB (PL7.1.1)

REP7.1
[Removal] 1 2

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 4 5 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3) Remove the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. (REP3.1) Remove the BEARING REGI. (REP3.2) Remove the DRIVE ASSY PH. (REP7.4) Remove the GEAR P2. (REP7.3) Remove the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. (REP7.2) Remove the HARN ASSY INTERLOCK. (REP8.7)

4-133

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
17 Disengage the connector (P/J221) of the DRIVE ASSY SUB (PL7.1.1).

18

Remove the one screw (silver, M4, 6mm) and the four screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the DRIVE ASSY SUB to the printer.

19

Remove the DRIVE ASSY SUB from the printer.

4-134

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note
Since two types of screws are used for securing the DRIVE ASSY SUB, ensure that the right screws are used at their right securing positions. The securing positions for tap screws are marked with [T]. The securing positions for metal screws are marked with [M].

4-135

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP7.2
[Removal] 1 2

(SCC) DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 4 5 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3) Remove the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. (REP3.1) Remove the BEARING REGI. (REP3.2) Remove the DRIVE ASSY PH. (REP7.4) Remove the GEAR P2. (REP7.3)

4-136

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
15 Remove the one screw (silver, M4, 6mm) and the five screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2) to the printer.

16

Remove the DRIVE ASSY MAIN from the printer.

Note
Since two types of screws are used for securing the DRIVE ASSY MAIN, ensure that the right screws are used at their right securing positions. The securing positions for tap screws are marked with [T]. The securing positions for metal screws are marked with [M].

4-137

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP7.3
[Removal] 1 2

GEAR P2 (PL7.1.3)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 4 5 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3) Remove the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. (REP3.1) Remove the DRIVE ASSY PH. (REP7.4) Remove the GEAR P2 (PL7.1.3) from the shaft of the DRIVE ASSY SUB (PL7.1.1).

4-138

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note
Ensure that the GEAR P2 is oriented to the direction.

4-139

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP7.4
[Removal] 1 2

(SCC) DRIVE ASSY PH (PL7.1.4)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 4 5 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6 7 8 9 10 11 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3) Remove the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. (REP3.1)

Accesses Position (The 12) shows the procedure number.)

4-140

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
12 Disengage the two connectors (P/J24, 26) on the PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13), release the harness from the GUIDE HARNESS AC (PL8.2.6).

13

Disengage the connector (P/J211) of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2), release all the harness from the hooks of the DRIVE ASSY PH (PL7.1.4).

4-141

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
14 Remove the one screw (silver, M4, 6mm), the one screw (silver, M3, 6mm) and the one screw (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the DRIVE ASSY PH to the printer.

Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, take care not to drop the coupling gear to inside.

4-142

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
15 Remove the DRIVE ASSY PH from the printer.

16

Disengage the connector (P/J261) of the color mode sensor on the DRIVE ASSY PH, release the HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL (PL9.1.9) from the hook of the DRIVE ASSY PH.

Note
Since three types of screws are used for securing the DRIVE ASSY PH, ensure that the right screws are used at their right securing positions. The securing positions for tap screws are marked with [T]. The securing positions for metal screws are marked with [M].

4-143

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP7.5

SENSOR PHOTO: COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR (PL7.1.7)

[Removal] 1 2 Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 4 5 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3) Remove the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. (REP3.1) Remove the DRIVE ASSY PH. (REP7.4) Lift the lever of the SOLENOID FEED MSI (PL7.1.11) up, rotate the gear to release the cam on the gear from the sensor.

4-144

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
14 Release the three hooks that fix the SENSOR PHOTO: COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR (PL7.1.7) to the DRIVE ASSY PH (PL7.1.4), and remove the SENSOR PHOTO: COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR.

cam

Wsb04021FA

SENSOR PHOTO: COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR

Wsb04022FA

4-145

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

PL8

ELECTRICAL (SCC) FAN MAIN (PL8.1.1)

REP8.1
[Removal] 1 2

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 4 5 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6 7 8 9 10 11 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3) Disengage the FAN MAIN (PL8.1.1) connector (P/J503) on the PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1), release the harness of the FAN MAIN from the hooks of the DUCT FAN (PL8.1.2).

4-146

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
12 Release the four hooks of the DUCT FAN, remove the FAN MAIN from the printer.

Note
Attach the FAN so that the labeled surface faces front.

4-147

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP8.2
[Removal] 1 2

DUCT FAN (PL8.1.2)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 4 5 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3) Remove the FAN MAIN. (REP8.1) Loosen the SCREW KNURLING (PL8.1.5) and then open the PLATE ESS (PL8.1.4).

4-148

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
13 Swing the PLATE ESS to upward slightly, to release the upper tab of the PLATE ESS from the slit of the SHIELD ASSY ESS after releasing the lower tab of the PLATE ESS from the slit of the SHIELD ASSY ESS (PL8.1.3). Remove the PLATE ESS from the printer.

14

Remove the eleven screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the SHIELD ASSY ESS to the printer.

4-149

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
15 Remove the SHIELD ASSY ESS from the printer.

16

Disengage the two connectors (P/J101, 111) on the PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9), release the harness from the hooks of the DUCT FAN (PL8.1.2).

17

Remove the one screw (silver, 6mm) that fixes the DUCT FAN to the printer.

4-150

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
18 Release the two hooks of the DUCT FAN, using a miniature screwdriver, and then remove the DUCT FAN from the printer.

4-151

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP8.3
[Removal]

(ISC) (SCC) PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9)

Note
Use the wrist strap to protect the PWB from the electrostatic. 1 2 Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 4 5 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6 7 8 9 10 11 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3) Remove the FAN MAIN. (REP8.1)

4-152

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
12 Loosen the SCREW KNURLING (PL8.1.5) and then open the PLATE ESS (PL8.1.4).

13

Swing the PLATE ESS to upward slightly, to release the upper tab of the PLATE ESS from the slit of the SHIELD ASSY ESS after releasing the lower tab of the PLATE ESS from the slit of the SHIELD ASSY ESS (PL8.1.3). Remove the PLATE ESS from the printer.

4-153

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
14 Remove the eleven screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the SHIELD ASSY ESS to the printer.

15

Remove the SHIELD ASSY ESS from the printer.

4-154

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
16 Disengage all the connectors of the PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9).

17

Pull out the connector (J401) of the HANESS ASSY ESS POWER (PL9.1.10) and the connector (J29) of the HARNESS ASSY B (PL9.1.12) through the hole of the FRAME ESS (PL8.1.7).

18

Remove the six screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the PWBA ESS and the PLATE IF (PL8.1.8) to the printer, remove the PWBA ESS from the printer together with the PLATE IF.

4-155

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
19 Remove the one screw (silver, 4mm) that fixes the USB connector of the PWBA ESS to the PLATE IF.

20

Remove the two screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the PWBA ESS to the PLATE IF, remove the PWBA ESS from the PLATE IF.

Note
When replacing to new PWBA ESS, attach the NVM ROM of old PWBA ESS to new PWBA ESS.

Note
Do not use the NVM ROM removed from new PWBA ESS.

Note
Do not press the PWBA ESS when removing the NVM ROM.

Note
Take care not to bend the terminal section of the NVM ROM when replacing the NVM ROM.

4-156

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note
There are two NVM ROMs on the PWBA ESS, do not attach the NVM ROM to the wrong position.

Note
When attaching the NVM ROM, Mate the notch of the NVM ROM with the notch the IC socket.

4-157

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note
Insert the tab of the FRAME ESS into the hole of the PLATE IF, when attaching the PWBA ESS and PLATE IF.

4-158

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP8.4
[Removal]

MULTI PROTOCOL CARD (PL8.1.11)

Note
Use the wrist strap to protect the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD from the electrostatic. 1 Loosen the SCREW KNURLING (PL8.1.5) and then open the PLATE ESS (PL8.1.4).

Remove the two SCREW KNURLINGs that fix the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD (PL8.1.11) to the printer.

4-159

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
3 Disengage the connector (P/J3) of the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD from the PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9).

Remove the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD from the printer.

4-160

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP8.5
[Removal]

MEMORY CARD (PL8.1.12)

Note
Use the wrist strap to protect the MEMORY CARD from the electrostatic. 1 Loosen the SCREW KNURLING (PL8.1.5) and then open the PLATE ESS (PL8.1.4).

Swing the PLATE ESS to upward slightly, to release the upper tab of the PLATE ESS from the slit of the SHIELD ASSY ESS after releasing the lower tab of the PLATE ESS from the slit of the SHIELD ASSY ESS (PL8.1.3). Remove the PLATE ESS from the printer.

Note
Remove the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD if the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD attached. (REP8.4)

4-161

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
3 Gently open the two hooks on the connector holding the MEMORY CARD (PL8.1.12) until the MEMORY CARD pops up slightly.

Remove the MEMORY CARD from the PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9).

4-162

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note
When attaching the MEMORY CARD, Mate the notch of the MEMORY CARD with the boss on the socket.

4-163

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP8.6
[Removal]

(SCC) PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1)

Note
Use the wrist strap to protect the PWB from the electrostatic. 1 Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 2 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 3 4 5 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Disengage all the connectors of the PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1).

4-164

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
6 Remove the seven screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the PWBA LVPS to the printer.

Remove the PWBA LVPS from the printer.

4-165

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note
When attaching the PWBA LVPS, mate the two notches of the PWBA LVPS with the tabs of the FRAME ASSY LVPS.

4-166

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP8.7
[Removal] 1

HARN ASSY INTERLOCK (PL8.2.5)

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 2 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 3 4 5 6 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Disengage the connector (P/J44) of the HARN ASSY INTERLOCK (PL8.2.5) on the PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1).

4-167

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
7 Release the clamps that fix the harness of the HARN ASSY INTERLOCK, remove the harness.

Remove the one screw (silver, tap, 16mm) that fixes the HARN ASSY INTERLOCK to the printer, remove the HARN ASSY INTERLOCK.

4-168

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP8.8
[Removal] 1

SENSOR HUM (PL8.2.7)

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 2 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 3 4 5 6 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Remove the one screw (silver, tap, 8mm) that fixes the SENSOR HUM (PL8.2.7) to the printer, remove the SENSOR HUM.

4-169

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
7 Disengage the connector (P/J201) of the SENSOR HUM.

4-170

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP8.9
[Removal] 1 2

(SCC) HARN ASSY SW PWR (PL8.2.9)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 4 5 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3) Remove the BREAKER GFI. (REP8.10) Disengage the five connectors (P/J20, 23, 24, 26 and 28) on the PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13), release the harness from the GUIDE HARNESS AC (PL8.2.6).

4-171

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
13 Remove the one screw (silver, with washer, 6mm) that fixes the grounding terminal of the HARN ASSY GFI GND (PL8.2.10), release the HARN ASSY GFI GND from the GUIDE HARNESS AC.

14

Disengage the connector (P/J48) of the HARN ASSY SW PWR (PL8.2.9) from the PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1).

4-172

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
15 Release the HARN ASSY SW PWR from the GUIDE HARNESS AC, remove the HARN ASSY SW PWR from the printer together with the BRACKET SW (PL8.2.8).

16

Release the hooks of the SWITCH POWER, remove the BRACKET SW from the HARN ASSY SW PWR.

4-173

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note
When attaching the BRACKET SW to the HARN ASSY SW PWR, match the ON/OFF mark of the POWER SWITCH with the mark on the BRACKET SW.

4-174

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP8.10
[Removal] 1 2

BREAKER GFI (PL8.2.11)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 4 5 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6 7 8 9 10 11 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3) Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the BRACKET SW (PL8.2.8) to the printer.

4-175

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note
The MAIN SWITCH and the printer are connected with the harness, so they should not be far apart when carrying out the work described next procedure. 12 Release the BRAKET SW from the hook together with the MAIN SW.

13

Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 12mm) that fix the BREAKER GFI (PL8.2.11) to the printer.

4-176

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
14 Pull out the BREAKER GFI, disengage the three connectors (P/J482, 483, 484). Remove the BREAKER GFI from the printer.

Note
Take care not to engage the connectors to wrong position.

4-177

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP8.11
[Removal]

(SCC) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

Note
Never fail to perform the diagnostic operation. Otherwise the data will be lost in the worst case.

Note
Use the wrist strap to protect the PWB from the electrostatic. 1 2 3 4 5 Perform the diagnostic of NVM Save to evacuate MCU data. Turn off the power to exit. Remove the POWER CORD from outlet. Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 6 7 8 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3) Remove the FAN MAIN. (REP8.1) Remove the PWBA ESS. (REP8.3)

4-178

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
16 Remove the five screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the FRAME ESS (PL8.1.7) to the printer.

17

Swing the FRAME ESS slightly up and back as if it were hinged at the top.

18

Remove the hook of the PWBA ESS from the printer by lifting the FRAME ESS slightly. Remove the FRAME ESS from the printer together with the DUCT FAN (PL8.1.2).

4-179

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
19 Disengage all the connectors of the PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13).

20

Remove the six screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the PWBA MCU to the printer.

4-180

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
21 Remove the PWBA MCU from the printer.

Note
When attaching the PWBA MCU, mate the holes of the PWBA MCU with the tabs of the printer,

Note
Execute the diagnostic operation of NVM Load, and write the data into the PWBA MCU.

4-181

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP8.12
[Removal] 1 2

PWBA EEPROM (XPRO) (PL8.2.16)

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3 4 5 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4) Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4) Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12) Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6) Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3) Remove the FAN MAIN. (REP8.1) Remove the DUCT FAN. (REP8.2) Remove the PWBA ESS. (REP8.3) Remove the PWBA MCU. (REP8.11) Remove the BREAKER GFI. (REP8.10) Remove the KIT ROS. (REP4.7)

4-182

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
17 Disengage the connector (P/J144) of the PWBA EEPROM (XPRO) (PL8.2.16).

18

Remove the one screw (silver, 6mm) that fixes the PWBA EEPROM (XPRO) to the printer, remove the PWBA EEPROM (XPRO).

4-183

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP8.13
[Removal]

ARRESTER ENE112D-10A (PL8.2.22)

Note
Use the wrist strap to protect the PWB from the electrostatic. 1 Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 2 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 3 4 5 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1) Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1) Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the PLATE EARTH DRUM (PL8.2.20) and PLATE EARTH FSR (PL8.2.21) to the printer.

Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, do not bend the PLATE EARTH DRUM and the PLATE EARTH FSR.

4-184

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)
6 Move the ARRESTER ENE112D-10A from between the PLATEs and the frame, remove it.
ARRESTER ENE112D-10A

Wsb04024FA

4-185

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.3 Adjustments

4.3 Adjustments
ADJ4.3.1 Firmware
Upgrade the firmware by downloading it from the PC to the Printer. Network (DocuPrint C1110 Only), USB port and parallel port are supported as communication interfaces. In this document, an example using a USB port will be described. When a USB port or parallel port is to be used, check that "Enable bi-directional support" is disabled (not ticked) in the Printer Port Settings on a PC.

ADJ4.3.1.1 ESS F/W


Work time: Approximately 5 minutes. 1 When "Ready to Print" is displayed in the Control Panel on a printer, activate FWDLMgr.exe.

4-186

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.3 Adjustments
2 Click on the [Agree] button.

Click the [Next] button.

Specify [USB Port] and click the [Next] button.

4-187

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.3 Adjustments
5 Click on the [Finish] button.

After ESS F/W has been downloaded, the printer is automatically rebooted.

Note
Print out the "Printer Settings" and check that the "Firmware Version" has been updated.

4-188

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.3 Adjustments ADJ4.3.1.2 MCU F/W
Work time: Approximately 5 minutes.

When "Ready to Print" is displayed in the Control Panel on the printer, activate FWDLMgr.exe.

Click on the [Agree] button.

4-189

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.3 Adjustments
3 Click the [Next] button.

Specify [USB Port] and click the [Next] button.

Click on the [Finish] button.

4-190

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.3 Adjustments
6 When "Completed. Reboot printer" is displayed a few minutes later, turn the printer OFF and then ON for rebooting.

Note
Print out the "Printer Settings" and check that the "Engine Version" has been updated.

4-191

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments


4.3 Adjustments

ADJ4.3.2 Directions for Replacing Important Information Stored Component


[Purpose] To get a full understanding of how to handle Important Information Stored Components. Data that the customer has entered after machine installation is so important that nobody can be forgiven for a loss or leak of the data. Besides, from the perspective of earning the confidence of the customer, it is indispensable for the CE to be able to realize the components that store such data. The CE should also take great care in replacing such components. [Procedure] This product has the components below store important information. Perform the following procedure. IBG: Collect/discard components, following the way specified separately.

Component Name NVRAM on Controller Board

Stored Information Parameters that can be set by users (IP address, etc.) - Job log - Error log (Fault History, Counter) - DV log/Auditron setting/ Total PV Information/ JBA Information Manipulation Log - Network Settings Information

Work before replacement/abolition - Initial Action Back up data by printing reports and using tools, in order to set the data again. Execute Installation Clear All NVMs in Clear All CE Mode.

Work after replacement - Handling the removed PWB Be sure to initialize the PWB and then take it back to your base. If the PWB cannot be initialized at the customer site, tell the customer the PWB will be initialized at the FX recycling location and that no security problem will occur.

- Final Action Restore the data, using tools. Return settings to their original values, using reports.

4-192

Chapter 5 Parts List

Chapter 5 Parts List

Chapter 5 Parts List CONTENTS 1. Parts List.....................................................................................................................5 - 1


1.1 Caution for use of spare parts illustration ........................................................................................ 5 - 1 1.2 Caution for use of engineering parts list .......................................................................................... 5 - 1 PL1.1 Cover [Illustration]........................................................................................................................ 5 - 3 PL1.1 Cover [List] .................................................................................................................................. 5 - 4 PL2.1 Paper Cassette [Illustration] ........................................................................................................ 5 - 5 PL2.1 Paper Cassette [List] ................................................................................................................... 5 - 6 PL3.1 Paper Feeder (1/2) [Illustration]................................................................................................... 5 - 7 PL3.1 Paper Feeder (1/2) [List].............................................................................................................. 5 - 8 PL3.2 Paper Feeder (2/2) [Illustration]................................................................................................... 5 - 9 PL3.2 Paper Feeder (2/2) [List]............................................................................................................ 5 - 10 PL4.1 Xerographics [Illustration] .......................................................................................................... 5 - 11 PL4.1 Xerographics [List]..................................................................................................................... 5 - 12 PL5.1 Dispenser [Illustration] ............................................................................................................... 5 - 13 PL5.1 Dispenser [List]........................................................................................................................... 5 - 14 PL6.1 Transfer & Fuser [Illustration] .................................................................................................... 5 - 15 PL6.1 Transfer & Fuser [List] ............................................................................................................... 5 - 16 PL7.1 Drive [Illustration]....................................................................................................................... 5 - 17 PL7.1 Drive [List].................................................................................................................................. 5 - 18 PL8.1 Electrical (1/2) [Illustration] ........................................................................................................ 5 - 19 PL8.1 Electrical (1/2) [List] ................................................................................................................... 5 - 20 PL8.2 Electrical (2/2) [Illustration] ........................................................................................................ 5 - 21 PL8.2 Electrical (2/2) [List] ................................................................................................................... 5 - 22 PL9.1 Harness [Illustration].................................................................................................................. 5 - 23 PL9.1 Harness [List]............................................................................................................................. 5 - 24

Chapter 5 Parts List

Chapter 5 Parts List CONTENTS

Chapter 5 Parts List

1. Parts List
1.1 Caution for use of spare parts illustration
- Available spare parts are shown in the illustration by name. - [Ref PL X.Y.Z] shown below the part name denotes the item is "Z" in the plate "PL X.Y" of the engineering part list. - For the detailed composition of the KIT parts, check with the engineering part list.

1.2 Caution for use of engineering parts list


- The figures indicating the illustrations are the item No. in the list and present correspondence between the illustrations and parts. - The notation of PL "X.Y.Z" is composed of the plate (PL), item "X.Y", and parts "Z". - The alphabet characters in the illustrations represent screws and clips as follows: "S": screw, "E": E-ring, "KL": KL clip, "C": C-ring, and "N": nut - " " mark in the illustrations are attached to items indicating assembly parts in the illustrations. - Encircled alphabetical figures in the illustrations indicate interrupted leader lines. Same characters in the illustrations represent lines to be connected. - The mark "(with 2-5)" attached to assembly parts on the illustrations and lists represents that the items "2, 3, 4, and 5" of that plate are contained and the mark "(with 2-5, PL6.1.1) represent that the item "2, 3, 4, and 5" of that plate and the item "1" of the plate "6.1" are contained. - The mark "[Ref PLX.Y.Z]" attached to parts in the illustrations and lists resents that the parts is the same as the parts of the item "Z" of the plate "X.Y". - The mark "" attached to parts in the list represents "Note" or "Reference" about that parts is contained in the same page. For the connector (P/J), parts such as harness, wire, etc. in the list, refer to "Chapter 7, Electric wiring"

Safety Critical Component (SCC) Control of the safety of components that are designated Safety Critical Components shall conform to Fuji Xerox Co. Ltd-stipulated rules and regulations on Safety Critical Components. Important Information Stored Component (ISC) Important Information Stored Components store customers' important information they have entered after machine installation. When replacing Important Information Stored Components, you must replace and discard them, following the procedure described in Chapter 4 Adjustments. Take care never to let customer information leak out.

51

Chapter 5 Parts List

52

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL1.1 Cover [Illustration]


2 1 3

20

19 8 9 97,98,99
(P220)

10

8 11 96

12

13

14 15

6 16 7 (with 8-17,19) 14

(J220)

15

95

21 18 18 17
(P/J2200-P2900) Wsb05001GA

53

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL1.1 Cover [List] ITEM


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 95 96 97 98 99

PARTS No.
848E 20100 050E 24202 848E 20072 848E 20121 848K 10662 848E 20092 848K 11425 848K 11415 848K 13735 003E 73361 -809E 58520 003E 78561 -------962K 60030 806E 20160 848K 09883 848K 09893 848E 20082 -675K 63130 675K 63140 675K 63110 675K 63120 675K 63100
(SCC) COVER TOP

DESCRIPTION
TRAY EXT (SCC) COVER REAR COVER CST COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR COVER SIDE R COVER ASSY FRONT FX (with 8-17,19) COVER ASSY FRONT IBG H (with 8-17,19) COVER ASSY FRONT IBG L (with 8-17,19) LATCH FRONT PLATE LATCH SPRING LATCH OUT BUTTON LATCH (SCC) COVER FRONT FX (SCC) COVER FRONT IBG H (SCC) COVER FRONT IBG L GUIDE BELT DAMPER FRONT L DAMPER FRONT S COVER HARNESS HARNESS ASSY A-OP (J220-P/J2200-P2900) SHAFT PIVOT CONSOLE ASSY PANEL FX CONSOLE ASSY PANEL IBG (SCC) COVER SIDE L BADGE X KIT CVR HARNESS (with 14-16) KIT GUIDE BELT (with 13-15) KIT COVER FRONT (IBG) H (with 12,21) KIT COVER FRONT (IBG) L (with 12,21) KIT COVER FRONT (FX) (with 12,21)

A.C
32B1 32B2 32B3 32B4 32B5 32B6 32B7 32B7 32B7 32B8 32B9 32BB 32BC 32BD 32BE 32BF 32BG 32BH 32BJ 32BK 71B1 32BL 7510 7510 32BM 32BN 32BP 32BQ 32BR 32BS 32BT

54

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL2.1 Paper Cassette [Illustration]


1 (with 2-25)

2 22

20 3 4 5 6 7 8

21

9 11 10 7 12 14 16 13 15 16 24 17 23

25 18

19

Wsb05002GA

55

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL2.1 Paper Cassette [List] ITEM


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Deleted 99

PARTS No.
050K 61260 050K 61430 015K 75520 809E 72190 809E 72200 019K 09470 038E 36920 007E 75020 038K 18430 848E 19100 038E 36940 807E 22360 807E 22370 038E 36950 003E 73390 003E 73930 809E 82580 050K 61170 -003E 76710 032E 26410 032E 26420 019K 09240 038K 18440 003E 76750 809E 72211 896E 53160 896E 57850 675K 62840

DESCRIPTION
CASSETTE ASSY 250 FX(with 2-19) CASSETTE ASSY 250 IBG(with 2-19)

A.C
5012 5012 50B1 50B2 50B3 5233 50B4 50B5 50B6 51B1 51B2 51B3 51B4 51B5 50B7 50B8 50B9 50BB 50BC 50BD 50BE 50BF 50BG 50BH 50BJ 50BK 50BL 50BL 50BM

PLATE ASSY BOTTOM SPRING N/F L SPRING N/F R HOLDER ASSY RETARD GUIDE SIDE L GEAR PINION GUIDE SIDE ASSY R COVER SSI GUIDE SIDE SSI L RACK GUIDE SIDE SSI L RACK GUIDE SIDE SSI R GUIDE SIDE SSI R LATCH BOTTOM L LATCH BOTTOM R SPRING LATCH B TRAY ASSY EXTENSION HOUSING CST 250 HANDLE CST GUIDE BOTTOM L GUIDE BOTTOM R PAD ASSY BOTTOM GUIDE ASSY END LATCH HSG END SPRING LATCH LABEL INSTRUCTION FX LABEL INSTRUCTION IBG KIT GUIDE SIDE (with 6-8)

56

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL3.1 Paper Feeder (1/2) [Illustration]

Deleted 99 (with 1,2)


(J262)

99 (with 9-14

98 (with 9-14) 14 (with 15,16)


(J23) (J28)

13

15

16

17
(J281)

18
(P231)

12 11 10
(J231) (J234) (J232) (J233)

9 8

[Ref PL3.2.1]

19 5 3 (with 4,5,7-13,16-21,PL3.2.1,PL8.2.7,PL9.1.6) 21
Wsb05003GA

20

57

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL3.1 Paper Feeder (1/2) [List] ITEM


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 99

PARTS No.
121K 42520 013E 30830 059K 56391 ---003E 73341 ----------962K 57541 ---675K 54150

DESCRIPTION
(SCC) CLUTCH ASSY DRV BEARING REGI (SCC) FEEDER ASSY V (with 4,5,7-13,16-21,PL3.2.1,PL8.2.7,PL9.1.6) CHASSIS FDR R FOOT -STOPPER CST CHASSIS FDR L SOLENOID FEED MSI SPRING LEVER LEVER FEED SPRING FEED IN SPRING FEED OUT GEAR ASSY FEED (with 15,16) GEAR FEED OUT GEAR FEED IN BEARING (SCC) HARN ASSY L SIDE (J23,J28-P231,J232,J233,J234,J281) PLATE EARTH FDR ARRESTER ENE112D-10A PALTE EARTH CST KIT SOLENOID FEED (with 9-14)

A.C
50C1 50C2 50C3 50C4 50C5 50C6 50C7 50C8 50C9 50CB 50CC 50CD 50CE 50CF 50CG 50CH 50CJ 71C1 50CK 50CL 50CM 5092

58

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL3.2 Paper Feeder (2/2) [Illustration]


1 (with 2-16,20-33) 3 4 2 3 6 8 7 9 5

10
(P232)

33 11 12 16 32 (with 17-19) 17 18

31

REGI SENSOR

13

19

14 15
(P234)

13
CST NO PAPER SENSOR

29

30

20

21

22

26 28
(P233)

24 13

23 25

SSI NO PAPER SENSOR

27
Wsb05004KA

59

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL3.2 Paper Feeder (2/2) [List] ITEM


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

PARTS No.
--059E 03110 059K 50731 -120E 27831 809E 71020 120E 27931 059K 47041 -120E 27820 809E 70960 930W 00113 120E 27850 809E 71030 809E 70981 -----------674E 00991 ---120K 92294 --

DESCRIPTION
CHUTE ASSY FDR REGI (with 2-16,20-33)

A.C
50D1 50D2 50D3 5033 50D4 50D5 50D6 50D7 50D8 50D9 50DB 50DC 50DD 50DE 50DF 50DG 50DH 50DJ 50DK 50DL 50DM 50DN 50DP 50DQ 50DR 50DS 50DT 50DV 50DW 50DX 50DY 50E1 50E2

SHAF ASSY FEED ROLL CORE MSI ROLL ASSY FEED BEARING EARTH ACTUATOR REGI OUT SPRING REGI OUT ACTUATOR REGI ROLL ROLL ASSY REGI ROLL REGI METAL ACTUATOR REGI IN SPRING ACT REGI SENSOR PHOTO ACTUATOR SSI SPRING ACT SSI SPRING STP STOPPER ACT SPRING ACT NP ACTUATOR NO PAPER BEARING M EARTH BEARING EARTH REGI GEAR REGI R GEAR REGI M SPRING REGI R M PLATE EARTH REGI CHUTE UP CHUTE LOW BRACKET SNS SPRING REGI L M BEARING M BEARING R ACTUATOR ASSY NO PAPER (with 17-19) PLATE WEIGHT

5 10

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL4.1 Xerographics [Illustration]


99 (with 1,2x2pcs) 2 22 23
(J41) (J40) (J411)

(J412)

98 (with 4,5,6x2pcs) 6 4 5 6 9 9 9 9 10 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 14 19 7 5 8 3 97 (with 4,5,7x2pcs) 7


(P141)

21

(P161)

20

Wsb05005GA

5 11

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL4.1 Xerographics [List] ITEM


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 97 98 99

PARTS No.
--019E 66470 ----122K 94041 ----------105K 22661 --962K 52060 962K 52070 675K 54241 675K 54251 604K 43050
(SCC) ROS ASSY

DESCRIPTION
SPRING ROS HOLDER CRUM SPRING PHD LEVER PHD BLOCK STOPPER PHD D BLOCK STOPPER PHD AD LED ASSY ERASE SPRING TRACKING SPRING CF SPRING TR4 SPRING TR3 SPRING TR2 SPRING TR1 SPRING D4 SPRING D3 SPRING D2 SPRING D1 (SCC) PWBA HVPS FRAME HVPS PHD ASSY (SCC) HARN ASSY ROS RE (J40-J411) HARN ASSY ROS VIDEO (J41-J412) KIT BLOCK PHD RIGHT (with 4,5,7x2pcs) KIT BLOCK PHD LEFT (with 4,5,6x2pcs) KIT ROS (with 1,2x2pcs)

A.C
1310 13B1 4533 31B1 31B2 31B3 31B4 4421 71D1 71D2 71D3 71D4 71D5 71D6 71D7 71D8 71D9 71DB 7320 31B5 4510 13B2 13B3 31B6 31B7 1310

5 12

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL5.1 Dispenser [Illustration]


1 (with 2,9-11,14-16,25-27) 2 (with 3-8) 4 5 6 6 3
(J191) (P191)

3
(J192) (P192)

6 6

3
(J182) (P182)

7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8

27

25
(J181) (P181)

3
(J291)

(J19) (J18)

30 10 10 10 13 14 13 (P314) 14 13 (J313) 13 (P313) 14 13 (J312) 13 (P312) 14 13 (J311) 13 (P311) 10

9 11 (with 12,13) 12
(J29) (J504) (P291)

26

28
(P5041)

(J314)

15 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 17 18 19 20

(J31)

21 22 23 24

29

96 (with 17,29) 97 (with 18,29) 98 (with 19,29) 99 (with 20,29)


Wsb05006GA

5 13

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL5.1 Dispenser [List] ITEM


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 96 97 98 99

PARTS No.
094K 92290 801K 28430 127K 51010 -----110E 10200 848K 02570 ---113E 45540 ----------962K 52050 962K 51990 962K 52150 962K 57560 -809E 71190 604K 46340 604K 46350 604K 46360 604K 46370

DESCRIPTION
DISPENSER ASSY (with 2,9-11,14-16,25-27)

A.C
4020 4030 4031 40B1 40B2 40B3 40B4 40B5 71E1 40B6 40B7 40B8 40B9 71E2 40BB 40BC 401K 401C 401M 401Y 409K 409C 409M 409Y 71E3 71E4 71E5 71E6 40BD 40BE 401K 401C 401M 401Y

FRAME ASSY MOT (with 3-8) (SCC) MOTOR ASSY DISP CONDUCTOR MOTOR FRAME MOTOR GEAR IDLER GEAR IDLER AUG GEAR IDLER AGI SWITCH HOUSING ASSY AUGER FRAME ASSY DISP (with 12,13) FRAME DISP SEAL DISP AUG CONNECTOR CRUM SPRING DISP JOINT ASSY DISP HOLDER TCRU K HOLDER TCRU C HOLDER TCRU M HOLDER TCRU Y TONER CARTRIDGE (K) TONER CARTRIDGE (C) TONER CARTRIDGE (M) TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) (SCC) HARN ASSY TNR MOT (J18,J19-J181,J182,J191,J192) HARN ASSY TONER CRUM (J31-J311,J312,J313,J314) HARN ASSY SIDE SW (J29-J291) HARN ASSY TEST RL (J504-P5041) LABEL HOLDER SPRING-SHUTTER KIT HOLDER TCRU K (with 17,29) KIT HOLDER TCRU C (with 18,29) KIT HOLDER TCRU M (with 19,29) KIT HOLDER TCRU Y (with 20,29)

5 14

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL6.1 Transfer & Fuser [Illustration]


1 2
(P171)

(J171) (J17) (J47)

99 (with 3-6) 3 4 5

6
(P281)

7
Wsb05007GA

5 15

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL6.1 Transfer & Fuser [List] ITEM


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PARTS No.
126K 25041 --962K 52020 962K 57490 003E 73241 -807E 15192 006K 25551 848K 03270 848E 09620

DESCRIPTION
FUSER ASSY (FX) FUSER ASSY 115V (IBG) FUSER ASSY 220V (IBG)

A.C
43AA 43AA 43AA 71F1 71F1 50F1 50F2 50F3 50F4 50F5 50F6

HARN ASSY FUSER 100V (J17,J47-P171) HARN ASSY FUSER 200V (J17,J47-P171) STOPPER PIVOT PIVOT TRANS L GEAR T4 SHAFT ASSY PIVOT TRANSFER ASSY COVER HARNESS 2

5 16

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL7.1 Drive [Illustration]

2
(P221)

5 6
(P211)

8 10
(P261) COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR (J24)

4
Wsb05008KA

5 17

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL7.1 Drive [List] ITEM


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PARTS No.
007K 94691 007K 94685 807E 15100 007K 94705 --930W 00113 130E 87090 809E 70900 809E 78840 013E 30830

DESCRIPTION
(SCC) DRIVE ASSY SUB (with6) (SCC) DRIVE ASSY MAIN (with5) GEAR P2 (SCC) DRIVE ASSY PH (with7-9) (SCC) MOTOR ASSY MAIN (SCC) MOTOR ASSY SUB

A.C
4523 4521 50G1 5093 4521 4523 50G2 50G3 50G4 50G5 50G6

SENSOR PHOTO SENSOR PHOTO (ALTERNATE PARTS) SPRING D3 SPRING C BEARING REGI

5 18

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL8.1 Electrical (1/2) [Illustration]


2

(J503)

6 8 5 10 10

7 5 5 9 (with 10)
(P101) (P111)

11

12
(P401) (P3)

(P29) Wsb05009GA

5 19

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL8.1 Electrical (1/2) [List] ITEM


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

PARTS No.
127E 85360 054E 31592 ------960K 37040 960K 36925 960K 36943 -960K 36690 133K 25240 133K 25250

DESCRIPTION
(SCC) FAN MAIN DUCT FAN SHIELD ASSY ESS PLATE ESS SCREW KNURLING WASHER FRAME ESS PLATE IF (ISC)(SCC) PWB ESS FX (with 10) (ISC)(SCC) PWB ESS IBG H (with 10) (ISC)(SCC) PWB ESS IBG L (with 10) NVM ROM MULTI PROTOCOL CARD (IBG-H OPTION) MEMORY CARD 256MB (IBG-H OPTION) MEMORY CARD 512MB (IBG-H OPTION)

A.C
3301 31C1 31C2 31C3 31C4 31C5 31C6 31C7 7630 7630 7630 76B1 72B1 72B2 72B3

5 20

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL8.2 Electrical (2/2) [Illustration]

(P501) (P502) (P503) (P504) (P47) (P44)

1
(P40) (P48)

2 3

(J44)

20
(P40) (P15) (P14) (P17) (P101) (P31) (P19) (P18) (P29)

21
(P41) (P10) (P11) (P42) (P22) (P21) (P24) (P26) (P23) (P28)

22

(P16) (P20)

15
(P144)

16

(J48) (T484)

(P201)

14 17 19 18 8

(J482) (J483)

(J484)

10

13 12

11

Wsb05010GA

5 21

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL8.2 Electrical (2/2) [List] ITEM


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

PARTS No.
105K 22382 105K 22721 ---962K 52120 -130E 93460 -962K 62110 962K 62120 962K 52160 962K 59630 908W 01201 117K 34750 117E 26280 917W 03106 917W 03110 917W 03111 917W 03109 917W 03108 917W 03107 960K 37262 --960K 32640 -----108E 98760

DESCRIPTION
(SCC) PWBA LVPS 100V (SCC) PWBA LVPS 220V

A.C
7310 7310 31D1 31D2 32C1 31D3 72C1 31D4 7121 7121 71G1 71G1 71G2 7122 7122 7122 7122 7122 7122 7122 7122 7210 31D5 31D6 71G3 31D7 31D8 31D9 31DB 31DC 71G4

GUIDE HARNESS FSR


FRAME ASSY LVPS -HARN ASSY INTERLOCK (SW-J44) GUIDE HARNESS AC SENSOR HUM BRACKET SW (SCC) HARN ASSY SW PWR 100V (SW-J48,J482,J483) (SCC) HARN ASSY SW PWR 200V (SW-J48,J482,J483) (SCC) HARN ASSY GFI GND 100V (J484-T484) (SCC) HARN ASSY GFI GND 200V (J484-T484) BREAKER GFI POWER CORD -JPN POWER CORD-AP-TW POWER CORD-FXA/FANZ POWER CORD-FXCL POWER CORD-FXK POWER CORD-FXP POWER CORD-AG/THFX/ICO POWER CORD-FXS/FXM/FXHK (SCC) PWBA MCU EDGING SADDLE

12

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

BRACKET MCU R PWBA EEPROM (XPRO) CLAMP BRACKET MCU L GUIDE HARNESS MCU PLATE EARTH DRUM PLATE EARTH FSR ARRESTER ENE112D-10A

5 22

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL9.1 Harness [Illustration]


(J10) (J21)

(J11) (J101) (J211)

(J22)

(J111)

(J14)

(J221) (J26)

(J501) (J15) (J141)

(J261) (J40) (P262)

10 4
(J42)

(J401) (J502) (J16)

11

5
(J161) (J20) (J144) (P422) (J29)

12

(J201)

(J2900)

Wsb05011GA

5 23

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL9.1 Harness [List] ITEM


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

PARTS No.
962K 52080 962K 52090 962K 52110 962K 52100 962K 51950 962K 51960 962K 52030 962K 61720 962K 52040 962K 51980 962K 52130 962K 52000 962K 52190

DESCRIPTION
HARN ASSY ESS (J10-J101) HARN ASSY ESS VIDEO (J11-J111) (SCC) HARN ASSY LVPS (J14-J141,J501) (SCC) HARN ASSY 24V (J15-J502) (SCC) HARN ASSY HVPS (J16-J161) HARN ASSY HUM (J20-J201) (SCC) HARN ASSY MAIN MOT FX (J21-J211) (SCC) HARN ASSY MAIN MOT IBG (J21-J211) (SCC) HARN ASSY SUB MOT (J22-J221) (SCC) HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL (J26-J261,P262) HARN ASSY ESS POWER (J40-J401) HARN ASSY PHD XPRO (J42-J144,P422) HARNESS ASSY B (J29-J2900)

A.C
71H1 71H2 71H3 71H4 71H5 71H6 71H7 71H8 71H9 71HB 71HC 71HD 71HE

5 24

Chapter 6 General

Chapter 6 General

Chapter 6 General CONTENTS 6.1 Configuration of Printer.............................................................................................6 - 1


6.1.1 Product Name ............................................................................................................................... 6 - 1 6.1.2 Basic Configuration....................................................................................................................... 6 - 1 6.1.3 Functional Configuration ............................................................................................................... 6 - 1

6.2 Electrical Properties..................................................................................................6 - 2


6.2.1 Power Source ............................................................................................................................... 6 - 2 6.2.2 Power Consumption...................................................................................................................... 6 - 2 6.2.3 Rush Current................................................................................................................................. 6 - 2

6.3 Mechanical Properties ..............................................................................................6 - 3


6.3.1 Dimensions/Mass of Printer .......................................................................................................... 6 - 3 6.3.2 Dimensions/Mass of Consumables and CRUs ............................................................................. 6 - 3 6.3.2.1 PHD Unit .............................................................................................................................. 6 - 3 6.3.2.2 FUSER CRU ........................................................................................................................ 6 - 3 6.3.2.3 Black toner cartridge ............................................................................................................ 6 - 4 6.3.2.4 Cyan toner cartridge ............................................................................................................ 6 - 4 6.3.2.5 Magenta toner cartridge ....................................................................................................... 6 - 4 6.3.2.6 Yellow toner cartridge .......................................................................................................... 6 - 4 6.3.3 Installation Space (min. installation space)................................................................................... 6 - 5

6.4 Functions ..................................................................................................................6 - 6


6.4.1 Recording System......................................................................................................................... 6 - 6 6.4.2 Exposure System.......................................................................................................................... 6 - 6 6.4.3 Development System.................................................................................................................... 6 - 6 6.4.4 Fixing System ............................................................................................................................... 6 - 6 6.4.5 Resolution ..................................................................................................................................... 6 - 6 6.4.6 Operation Mode ............................................................................................................................ 6 - 6 6.4.7 Warm-up Time .............................................................................................................................. 6 - 7 6.4.8 FPOT (First Print Output Time)*1 ................................................................................................. 6 - 7 6.4.9 Continuous Printing Speed ........................................................................................................... 6 - 7 6.4.10 Input Properties........................................................................................................................... 6 - 8 6.4.10.1 Paper pick-up system ......................................................................................................... 6 - 8 6.4.10.2 Paper pick-up capacity........................................................................................................ 6 - 8 6.4.11 Output Properties........................................................................................................................ 6 - 8 6.4.11.1 Paper delivery system......................................................................................................... 6 - 8 6.4.11.2 Paper delivery capacity....................................................................................................... 6 - 8 6.4.11.3 Delivery paper size/mass.................................................................................................... 6 - 8 6.4.11.4 Full stack detection ............................................................................................................. 6 - 8 6.4.12 Manual Duplex ............................................................................................................................ 6 - 8 6.4.13 Paper .......................................................................................................................................... 6 - 9 6.4.13.1 Paper type .......................................................................................................................... 6 - 9 6.4.13.2 Paper size ........................................................................................................................... 6 - 9

6.5 Consumables..........................................................................................................6 - 11
6.5.1 Items of Consumables ................................................................................................................ 6 - 11 6.5.2 Consumable Life ......................................................................................................................... 6 - 11 6.5.3 Periodic Replacing Parts (Reference)......................................................................................... 6 - 11

Chapter 6 General

Chapter 6 General CONTENTS 6.6 Operating Environment...........................................................................................6 - 13


6.6.1 Installation Temperature / Humidity ............................................................................................ 6 - 13 6.6.2 Installation Altitude...................................................................................................................... 6 - 13 6.6.3 Installation Horizontality .............................................................................................................. 6 - 13 6.6.4 Ambient Lighting ......................................................................................................................... 6 - 13 6.6.5 Storage Temperature of a Toner Cartridge................................................................................. 6 - 13

6.7 Safety / Environment Conditions ............................................................................6 - 14


6.7.1 Safety Standard .......................................................................................................................... 6 - 14 6.7.2 Laser Safety Standard ................................................................................................................ 6 - 14 6.7.3 EMI.............................................................................................................................................. 6 - 14 6.7.4 Noise........................................................................................................................................... 6 - 14

6.8 Print image Quality .................................................................................................6 - 15


6.8.1 Image Quality Guarantee Conditions.......................................................................................... 6 - 15 6.8.1.1 Environmental conditions.................................................................................................... 6 - 15 6.8.1.2 Guaranteed paper............................................................................................................... 6 - 15 6.8.1.3 Paper condition ................................................................................................................... 6 - 15 6.8.1.4 Printer condition .................................................................................................................. 6 - 15 6.8.1.5 Image quality guaranteed area .......................................................................................... 6 - 15 6.8.1.6 Criterion .............................................................................................................................. 6 - 15

6.9 Option .....................................................................................................................6 - 16


6.9.1 Option to be Installed by Users................................................................................................... 6 - 16

6.10 ESS Specification .................................................................................................6 - 17


6.10.1 External Interface...................................................................................................................... 6 - 17 6.10.1.1 USB .................................................................................................................................. 6 - 17 6.10.1.2 Ethernet ............................................................................................................................ 6 - 17 6.10.2 Network Protocol....................................................................................................................... 6 - 18 6.10.2.1 Printing Protocol................................................................................................................ 6 - 18 6.10.2.2 Other Protocols ................................................................................................................. 6 - 19 6.10.3 Decomposer.............................................................................................................................. 6 - 20 6.10.3.1 PDL ................................................................................................................................... 6 - 20 6.10.3.2 Font................................................................................................................................... 6 - 20 6.10.3.3 Image Area ....................................................................................................................... 6 - 20 6.10.3.4 PostScript 3 Fonts............................................................................................................. 6 - 20 6.10.4 Job Control................................................................................................................................ 6 - 21 6.10.4.1 Cancel Print ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 21 6.10.4.2 Job Recovery .................................................................................................................... 6 - 21 6.10.4.3 Job Time Out .................................................................................................................... 6 - 21 6.10.4.4 Printer Auditron (DPC1110 only) ...................................................................................... 6 - 21 6.10.4.5 RAM DISK......................................................................................................................... 6 - 21 6.10.4.6 IP Filter.............................................................................................................................. 6 - 21 6.10.5 Logging ..................................................................................................................................... 6 - 22 6.10.5.1 Job Logging ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 22 6.10.5.2 Error Logging .................................................................................................................... 6 - 22 6.10.5.3 Billing Count...................................................................................................................... 6 - 22 6.10.6 Non-Genuine Mode................................................................................................................... 6 - 22

Chapter 6 General

Chapter 6 General CONTENTS


6.10.7 Utility Print................................................................................................................................. 6 - 23 6.10.7.1 Printer Settings List........................................................................................................... 6 - 23 6.10.7.2 Font List Print.................................................................................................................... 6 - 23 6.10.7.3 Job Log Print..................................................................................................................... 6 - 23 6.10.7.4 PCL Macro List Print ......................................................................................................... 6 - 23 6.10.7.5 Print Meter Print ................................................................................................................ 6 - 23 6.10.7.6 Stored Document List Print ............................................................................................... 6 - 23 6.10.7.7 Error Log Print................................................................................................................... 6 - 24 6.10.7.8 Supported Language ........................................................................................................ 6 - 24 6.10.7.9 Demonstration Print .......................................................................................................... 6 - 24 6.10.7.10 PCL Macro List Print ....................................................................................................... 6 - 24 6.10.7.11 Print Meter Print .............................................................................................................. 6 - 24 6.10.8 Software Specifications............................................................................................................. 6 - 25 6.10.8.1 Firmware Update Tool ...................................................................................................... 6 - 25 6.10.8.2 Linux Driver (FX-PDF Driver)............................................................................................ 6 - 25 6.10.8.3 Mac Driver (FX-PDF Driver).............................................................................................. 6 - 25 6.10.8.4 Utility Software .................................................................................................................. 6 - 26 6.10.8.5 3rd Party Software Support............................................................................................... 6 - 26 6.10.8.6 Linkage with FX Brand Software....................................................................................... 6 - 26 6.10.8.7 Linkage with Other Brand Software .................................................................................. 6 - 27

6.11 Tools and Service Consumables..........................................................................6 - 29


6.11.1 Tools ......................................................................................................................................... 6 - 29 6.11.2 Service Consumable................................................................................................................. 6 - 29

6.12 Installation Procedure DocuPrint C1110 ..............................................................6 - 30


6.12.1 Check the Contents .................................................................................................................. 6 - 30 6.12.2 Remove the Shipping Tapes..................................................................................................... 6 - 31 6.12.3 Set the Toner Cartridges........................................................................................................... 6 - 31 6.12.4 Set the Drum Cartridge ............................................................................................................. 6 - 32 6.12.5 Connect the Power Cord........................................................................................................... 6 - 34 6.12.6 Switch On the Power ................................................................................................................ 6 - 35 6.12.7 Connect the Network Cable ...................................................................................................... 6 - 36 6.12.8 Set the IP Address .................................................................................................................... 6 - 36 6.12.9 Install the Print Driver................................................................................................................ 6 - 39 6.12.10 Connect the USB Cable.......................................................................................................... 6 - 40 6.12.11 Load the Paper ....................................................................................................................... 6 - 40 6.12.12 View the User Guide (PDF) .................................................................................................... 6 - 42

6.13 Installation Procedure DocuPrint C1110B ............................................................6 - 43


6.13.1 Check the Contents .................................................................................................................. 6 - 43 6.13.2 Remove the Shipping Tapes..................................................................................................... 6 - 44 6.13.3 Set the Toner Cartridges........................................................................................................... 6 - 44 6.13.4 Set the Drum Cartridge ............................................................................................................. 6 - 45 6.13.5 Install the Print Driver................................................................................................................ 6 - 48 6.13.6 Connect the USB Cable............................................................................................................ 6 - 49 6.13.7 Connect the Power Cord........................................................................................................... 6 - 49 6.13.8 Switch On the Power ................................................................................................................ 6 - 49

Chapter 6 General 6.13.9 Load the Paper ......................................................................................................................... 6 - 50 6.13.10 View the User Guide (PDF) .................................................................................................... 6 - 52

6.14 Printer Environment Settings................................................................................6 - 53


6.14.1 Supported Operating Environments.......................................................................................... 6 - 53 6.14.2 Setting the Network Environment (DocuPrint C1110 only) ....................................................... 6 - 55 6.14.3 Installing a Printer Driver........................................................................................................... 6 - 63

6.15 Control Panel Manu Tree ....................................................................................6 - 64

Chapter 6 General

6.1 Configuration of Printer


6.1.1 Product Name
Product Name DocuPrint C1110 Destination Taiwan AP/Korea China DocuPrint C1110B Taiwan AP/Korea China XJ Code XJ-TNJ XJ-TNK XJ-TNL XJ-TNM XJ-TNN XJ-TNP Product Code TL300451 TL300452 TL300453 TL300454 TL300455 TL300456 Serial No. 100001~199999 200001~299999 300001~399999 500001~599999 600001~699999 700001~799999

6.1.2 Basic Configuration


The printer has the following basic configurations depending on the destination. print engine main unit (SSI and 250 feeder unit as the standard paper feeding) consumables (CRU)

Wsb08001GA

6.1.3 Functional Configuration


Functional configuration of this printer is shown below.

Wsb08002GA

61

Chapter 6 General

6.2 Electrical Properties


6.2.1 Power Source
Two types of power source as follows are available for this printer, which are selected according to the specifications. - 100V/120V printer:............. voltage: 100-127VAC 10% (90 - 140V), frequency: 50/60Hz 3Hz current: 11A or less phase: Single-phase two-wire system - 220/240V printer: ............... voltage: 220-240VAC 10% (198 - 264V), frequency: 50/60Hz 3Hz current: 5A or less (230V printer) phase: Single-phase two-wire system

6.2.2 Power Consumption


Power consumption in each operation mode at rated voltage input Operation mode Running mode (F/C) Running mode (B/W) Standby mode Sleep mode Low Power mode* Power Consumption 420W or less 420W or less 95W or less 110V: 7W or less 220V: 9W or less 18W or less

* The power consumption meets International Energy Star Program.

6.2.3 Rush Current


When the power switch is turned on, the inrush current shall be maximum 50A (Cold start) / 135A (Hot start) at first 2.5ms, and 80A (120V/220V/240V) / 85A (100V) within 10ms.

62

Chapter 6 General

6.3 Mechanical Properties


6.3.1 Dimensions/Mass of Printer
Width(mm) 400 Depth(mm) 370 Height(mm) 380 Mass(kg) 18 (with CRU)

* Depth of M/C is without paper tray.

Wsb08003GA

6.3.2 Dimensions/Mass of Consumables and CRUs


6.3.2.1 PHD Unit Width: 332mm Depth: 138mm Height: 196mm Mass: 3.4kg Reference: The PHD Unit has CRUM (CRU memory) to record information.

Wsb08006KA

6.3.2.2 FUSER CRU Width: 393mm Depth: 121mm Height: 130mm Mass: 1.5kg

Wsb08004KA

63

Chapter 6 General 6.3.2.3 Black toner cartridge Width: 185.8mm Depth: 63mm Height: 40.5mm Mass: 0.1kg Reference:The Black toner cartridge has CRUM (CRU memory) to record information.

Wsb08005KA

6.3.2.4 Cyan toner cartridge Width: 185.8mm Depth: 63mm Height: 40.5mm Mass: 0.1kg Reference:The Cyan toner cartridge has CRUM (CRU memory) to record information.

Wsb08005KA

6.3.2.5 Magenta toner cartridge Width: 185.8mm Depth: 63mm Height: 40.5mm Mass: 0.1kg Reference:The Magenta toner cartridge has CRUM (CRU memory) to record information.

Wsb08005KA

6.3.2.6 Yellow toner cartridge Width: 185.8mm Depth: 63mm Height: 40.5mm Mass: 0.1kg Reference:The Yellow toner cartridge has CRUM (CRU memory) to record information.

Wsb08005KA

64

Chapter 6 General

6.3.3 Installation Space (min. installation space)


Minimum space as shown below is required to install the printer when it is used for normal objects. (Space occupied by the operator is not included.) Top view
100mm

100mm

250mm

600mm

Wsb08007GA

Front view

100mm

400mm

250mm
Wsb08008GA

Side view
Front Cover

600mm

100mm
Wsb08009GA

65

Chapter 6 General

6.4 Functions
6.4.1 Recording System
Tandem electro-photographic system employing OPC drum and direct transfer by the transport belt

6.4.2 Exposure System


Four laser beams semiconductor laser beam scanning system

6.4.3 Development System


Double components trickle development

6.4.4 Fixing System


Free belt NIP Quick thermal fusing system

6.4.5 Resolution
600 dots/25.4mm (fixed)

6.4.6 Operation Mode


The printer can be operated in either of 4 operation modes. The modes are switched over by command from the printer controller or change of printer operation, etc. Proceeding from power ON, low power mode or sleep mode to standby mode will take place after going through a warm up stage. - Running mode State in running or recording operation. Fixing system: Held at operating temperature. Exposure system: Operating status Recording system: Operating status - Standby mode Ready state Fixing system: Held at ready temperature. Exposure system: Stop status Recording system: Stop status - Low Power mode Complete resting state. Compatible to E-Star and BAM requirement. Fixing system: Stop status Exposure system: Stop status Recording system: Stop status -Sleep mode Resting state from the sleep state. Fixing system: Stop status Exposure system: Stop status Recording system: Stop status

66

Chapter 6 General

6.4.7 Warm-up Time


When nominal voltage (100V, 115V, 220V) is applied, the printer will proceed to standby mode from POWER-ON within 16 seconds. Reference: Measured at 22C, 55% RH, nominal voltage, plain paper mode.

6.4.8 FPOT (First Print Output Time)*1


21.5 sec*2 (when loading A4 SEF in the tray 1) *1 The time from when the printer receives a print job until the first page is delivered in the output tray. *2 The values are measured based on the test pattern of Fuji Xerox.

6.4.9 Continuous Printing Speed


The continuous printing speed is shown in the below. OS XP OS X PDL PCL6 PCL6 PS PS Test Chart J11E J11E J11E J11E Paper Size A4 SEF A4 SEF A4 SEF A4 SEF Paper Type Plain Plain Plain Plain Paper Tray Tray Tray Tray Tray Color/ BW Color BW Color BW Average Print Speed 78.0s, or less 61.5s, or less 645s (Buckeye) x 12/20, or less 390s (Buckeye) x 16/25, or less

NOTE

Measurement is conducted five times. Print speed is caluculated as average of the three values after the maximum and minimum values are excluded.

Color: 12 sheets/min* BW: 16 sheets/min* *When continuously printing a single document of A4 size loaded in SEF.

67

Chapter 6 General

6.4.10 Input Properties


6.4.10.1 Paper pick-up system - Paper pick-up with paper tray Feeding method of this printer is ARRF method. 6.4.10.2 Paper pick-up capacity - Paper pick-up with paper tray 250 sheet Paper Tray - SSI paper pick-up 1 sheet : 250 sheets or below 27.6mm of standard paper

6.4.11 Output Properties


6.4.11.1 Paper delivery system Paper can be delivered by the following method. - FACE DOWN delivery 6.4.11.2 Paper delivery capacity - FACE DOWN delivery 250 sheets (Letter/A4 standard paper) 6.4.11.3 Delivery paper size/mass - FACE DOWN delivery All paper sizes applicable to this printer 6.4.11.4 Full stack detection non

6.4.12 Manual Duplex


The printer supports manual duplex function. The user operation is as follows. - The user chooses manual duplex function on the printer driver and starts printing. - After job submission, the help window instructs duplex operation comes up on the PC screen. - When side-1 printing is completed, Continue lamp on the operation panel starts blinking. - The user picks up side-1-printed paper on the output tray and set them back to the input tray. - The user presses Continue button on the operation panel. - The printer starts printing side-2.

NOTE

This function is available only for PCL6. Mixed paper size job can not be duplex.

68

Chapter 6 General

6.4.13 Paper
6.4.13.1 Paper type - Standard: Manual feeder: Plain, Bond, Heavyweight 1 (106 - 163 g/m2), Heavyweight 2 (164 - 216 g/m2), Labels, Coated 1 (60 - 105 g/m2), Coated 2 (106 - 163 g/m2), Coated 3 (164 - 216 g/m2), Envelope, Recycled Tray 1: Plain, Bond, Heavyweight 1 (106 - 163 g/m2), Heavyweight 2 (164 - 216 g/m2), Labels, Coated 1 (60 - 105 g/m2), Coated 2 (106 - 163 g/m2), Coated 3 (164 - 216 g/m2), Envelope, Recycled - Manual 2-sided printing: Manual feeder: Plain, Bond, Heavyweight 1 (106 - 163 g/m2), Heavyweight 2 (164 - 216 g/m2), Coated 1 (60 - 105 g/m2), Coated 2 (106 - 163 g/m2), Recycled Tray 1: Plain, Bond, Heavyweight 1 (106 - 163 g/m2), Recycled Important * Use only the recommended paper. Using paper other than that recommended for the printer can cause printing problems. Do not use ink jet paper or postcards made out of recycled paper. Printing on used paper or on its reverse side may impair print quality. * For information about the recommended paper, contact our Customer Support Center or your dealers. 6.4.13.2 Paper size - Manual feeder: A4, B5, A5, 8.5 x 14", 8.5 x 13", 8.5 x 11", 7.25 x 10.5", COM-10 (4.1 x 9.5"), Monarch (3.9 x 7.5"), DL (110 x 220 mm), C5 (162 x 229 mm), custom size paper (width: 76.2 - 215.9 mm; length: 127 - 355.6 mm) - Tray 1: A4, B5, A5, 8.5 x 14", 8.5 x 13", 8.5 x 11", 7.25 x 10.5", COM-10 (4.1 x 9.5"), Monarch (3.9 x 7.5"), DL (110 x 220 mm), C5 (162 x 229 mm), custom size paper (width: 76.2 - 215.9 mm; length: 127 - 355.6 mm) - Manual 2-sided printing: A4, B5, A5, 8.5 x 14", 8.5 x 13", 8.5 x 11", 7.25 x 10.5",

69

Chapter 6 General custom size paper (width: 76.2 - 215.9 mm; length: 127 - 355.6 mm) - Image loss: 4 mm from the top, bottom, left, and right edges

6 10

Chapter 6 General

6.5 Consumables
Consumables are usually replaced by costumers. In the event of recovery of failure attributable to consumables or isolation of failure, you may replace them.

6.5.1 Items of Consumables


- Black toner cartridge Cartridge to supply black toner to the development unit. Black toner cartridge has CRUM (CRU memory) to record information. - Yellow toner cartridge Cartridge to supply yellow toner to the development unit. Yellow toner cartridge has CRUM (CRU memory) to record information. - Magenta toner cartridge Cartridge to supply magenta toner to the development unit. Magenta toner cartridge has CRUM (CRU memory) to record information. - Cyan toner cartridge Cartridge to supply cyan toner to the development unit. Cyan toner cartridge has CRUM (CRU memory) to record information.

6.5.2 Consumable Life


- Black toner cartridge: - Yellow toner cartridge: - Magenta toner cartridge: - Cyan toner cartridge: 2kPV 2kPV 2kPV 2kPV

6.5.3 Periodic Replacing Parts (Reference)


- PHD (Drum Cartridge) - FUSER Unit - Feed Roller Unit 20kPV 50kPV 50kPV

6 11

Chapter 6 General

PL6.1.1 FUSER ASSY

PL4.1.21 PHD ASSY

PL5.1.21 TONER CARTRIDGE (K) PL2.1.5 SEPARATOR ROLLER ASSY PL5.1.22 TONER CARTRIDGE (C)

PL5.1.23 TONER CARTRIDGE (M)

PL5.1.24 TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) Wsb08010GA

6 12

Chapter 6 General

6.6 Operating Environment


6.6.1 Installation Temperature / Humidity
Installation temperature and humidity on the condition without condensation is as follows. At operating: 5-32 C, 15-85%RH (No condensation) At standby: minus 20-40 C, 5-85%RH (No condensation)

6.6.2 Installation Altitude


0 to 3,500m

6.6.3 Installation Horizontality


Longitudinal levelness of table surface on which the printer is installed:1 degree or under Lateral levelness of table surface on which the printer is installed :1 degree or under

6.6.4 Ambient Lighting


3,000 Lux or less (without no direct sun beams)

6.6.5 Storage Temperature of a Toner Cartridge


The guaranteed period of the print cartridge before unpacked is as follows: Normal conditions: 24 months under 0 to 35C, 15 to 80% RH. Harsh conditions: Up to one month under -20 to 0C and 35 to 40C, 5 to 15% RH and 80 to 95% RH. The storage altitude shall be 0 to 3,500m. Can be extended to 0 to 15,000m when shipped by air. (Provided that the cargo bay is pressurized to 70.9275Kpa or higher.)

6 13

Chapter 6 General

6.7 Safety / Environment Conditions


6.7.1 Safety Standard
- 110V system UL60950 3rd Edition CSA C22.2 No.60950-00 - 200V system IEC60950 3rd Edition / EN60950 2000

6.7.2 Laser Safety Standard


- 110V system FDA21CFR Chapter 1, Subchapter J, Section 1010, 1040 - 200V system IEC60825-1 Amendment 1 + Amendment 2 / EN60825-1 Amendment 1 + Amendment 2 Class 1 Laser Product, CE Directive, Nordic Agency Approvals

6.7.3 EMI
- 110V system (US) FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class B - 200V system (EC) EN55022 (CISPR Publication 22), Class B

6.7.4 Noise
Noise of priting is as follows. Noise Printer During printing During stand-by Unit B: acoustic power level (LwAd) Unit (dBA): radiated sound pressure (by stander point ) (LpAm) Sound power level (B) 6.3 4.0 Sound pressure (dBA) 55 26

*Measured according to ISO7779 and declared according to ISO9296.

6 14

Chapter 6 General

6.8 Print image Quality


6.8.1 Image Quality Guarantee Conditions
The image quality is specified and guaranteed under the following conditions. 6.8.1.1 Environmental conditions Environment condition for evaluating image quality Temperature: 10-32 C Humidity: 15-85%RH 6.8.1.2 Guaranteed paper The print image quality specified here is guaranteed with standard paper fed from the paper tray. Evaluation is performed with the maximum size of each standard paper. - Black and White printing: FX paper A4 - Color printing: FX C2 paper A4 6.8.1.3 Paper condition The paper used is fresh paper immediately after unpacked, which has been left in the operating environment for 12 hours before unpacking. 6.8.1.4 Printer condition The print image quality specified in this section is guaranteed with the printer in normal condition. 6.8.1.5 Image quality guaranteed area The print image quality specified in this section is guaranteed in the guaranteed image quality area specified in this manual. (Refer to Chapter 3) 6.8.1.6 Criterion The print image quality is guaranteed with the Spec. In rate = 90% ( = 90%).

6 15

Chapter 6 General

6.9 Option
6.9.1 Option to be Installed by Users
Users can install the following units. - Additional Memory (256MB/512MB) - Network Expansion Card

6 16

Chapter 6 General

6.10 ESS Specification


6.10.1 External Interface
6.10.1.1 USB Item Connector Protocol Supported Client Type-B x 1 USB2.0, HighSpeed Windows 98SE/Me/2000/XP (32/64bit)/Server 2003 (32/64bit)/Vista Mac OSX Linux Specification

6.10.1.2 Ethernet Item Connection Protocol Supported Client 10 Base-T/100Base-T See 10.2 Network Protocol for details Windows 98SE/Me/2000/XP (32/64bit)/Server 2003 (32/64bit)/Vista Mac OSX Linux Specification

6 17

Chapter 6 General

6.10.2 Network Protocol


6.10.2.1 Printing Protocol Maximum Session*2 1

Protocol

Transport

Supported Client Windows 98SE, Me, 2000, XP (32/64), Server 2003 (32/64), VISTA Linux*4 Mac OS X*4 Windows 98SE, Me, 2000, XP (32/64), Server 2003 (32/64), VISTA Linux*4 Windows 98SE, Me, 2000, XP (32/64), Server 2003 (32/64), VISTA Mac OS 10.3,10.4*4 Windows 98SE, Me, 2000, XP (32/64), Server 2003 (32/64), VISTA Windows 98SE, Me, 2000 NetWare5, 6,6.5*3 Mac OS X*4 Windows 98SE, Me, 2000, XP (32/64), Server 2003 (32/64), VISTA

LPR

TCP/IP

Port9100

TCP/IP

IPP

*1

TCP/IP TCP/IP NetBEUI

5 5 5 1 1 1

SMB*1

NetWare TCP/IP*5 (DS-PServer)*1 EtherTalk*1 FTP ATP/DDP TCP/IP

*1: Optional multi-protocol processor card is required *2: Maximum session is defined as the number of print request acceptable at the same time. *3: NetWare 6.5 is required to apply support pack 1.1 or later provided by Novell. *4: Supported PS Driver. *5: Available for versions later than NetWare5. BS-Pserver mode is not supported. Only DS-Pserver mode is available.

6 18

Chapter 6 General 6.10.2.2 Other Protocols Protocol Transport Support Supported MIB] MIB-II (RFC1213) HostResources MIB (RFC1514) PrinterMIB (RFC1759) XCMI2.4 [Client] (Windows 2000/XP, x64) Netscape Communicator 7.x or later Internet Explorer 6.0 or later Firefox 1.5 or later (Mac OS X 10.2 or later) Firefox 1.5 or later Safari 2.0 or later JavaScript must be set/ready to operate on the above browsers. [Supported Server OS] Windows NT 4.0 Server, Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server 2003 Linux (RedHat8/9, SuSE9), Unix(Solaris 9) [Supported Server OS] Windows NT 4.0 Server, Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server 2003 Unix(Solaris 9) [Supported OS] Unix (Solaris 9) [Supported OS] Windows NT 4.0 Server, Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server 2003 E-Mail Alert [Supported Mail Server] Lotus Notes, MS-Exchange, Eudora Firmware Update Supported OS] Mac OS 10.2 or later [Supported OS] Windows 2000 Server, Windows 2003 Server, Unix

SNMP

UDP/IP

HTTP / HTTPS*1 TCP/IP (CWIS)

DHCP

UDP/IP

BOOTP

UDP/IP

RARP AutoIP WINS*1

TCP/IP TCP/IP TCP/IP

SMTP/POP3 FTP Bonjour DDNS*1

TCP/IP TCP/IP UDP/IP TCP/IP

*1: Optional Multi-Protocol Card is required

6 19

Chapter 6 General

6.10.3 Decomposer
6.10.3.1 PDL PDL/Emulation PCL5c Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No PCL6 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes PS3

Interface/Protocol USB LPR Port9100 IPP SMB NetWare (P-Server) EtherTalk (A-PAP) FTP Yes: Supported, No: Not supported 6.10.3.2 Font

81 fonts and 36 symbols for PCL, 137 fonts for PS3 are available as built in font. 6.10.3.3 Image Area Usable Area Size Unprintable Area Printable Area Maximum : 215.9mm (8.5 in.) x 355.6mm (14 in.) 4.1 mm each from four edges (left, right, top and bottom) of paper Maximum : 207.9mm (8.18 in.) x 347.6mm (13.68 in.)

Print Image Quality Guaranteed Same as Printable Area Area 6.10.3.4 PostScript 3 Fonts 137 fonts for PS3 are available as built-in fonts.

6 20

Chapter 6 General

6.10.4 Job Control


6.10.4.1 Cancel Print A print job in process can be cancelled at the operation panel. 6.10.4.2 Job Recovery When a job fails due to recoverable error like a paper jam, the printer automatically restarts the job after the jammed paper is removed. 6.10.4.3 Job Time Out When job transmission is interrupted for a certain period of time (Time can be changed at the operation panel and unlimited time can be selected), the print data is deleted as an error. 6.10.4.4 Printer Auditron (DPC1110 only) Auditron is a function to specify the availability of color print and to limit print volume per user. Only administrators are allowed to make limitation settings from the CWIS. User name and password is embedded in the print job in order to identify who the job is sent from. User name and password are entered by user from the printer driver. The printer can support maximum 5 accounts. 6.10.4.5 RAM DISK RAM DISK functions when memory is expanded, realizing Collation, Secure Print, Proof Print, Form Overlay, and Font Download. 6.10.4.6 IP Filter The user can select to accept or reject jobs for the specified IP address. Up to 5 IP addresses can be specified. IP filter is available only to LPR and Port 9100.

6 21

Chapter 6 General

6.10.5 Logging
6.10.5.1 Job Logging The printer can retain up to 20 job logs. Job log can be printed instantly according to the user's request or automatically printed when the number of the retained job logs has reached 10. Job log includes the following information: Job sent date and time Input interface (USB, Lpd, Port9100) Document name (File name) Output color User name/Host name Number of printed pages (Color, B/W) Number of printed impressions (Color, B/W) Paper size Result (Successful, Error, etc.) 6.10.5.2 Error Logging The printer can retain up to 42 jam errors and up to 42 fatal errors. The user can pirnt error log by the panel operation. Jam error log includes the following information: PV counter when jam has occurred Name of Jam Fatal error log includes the following information: PV counter when error has occurred Error code 6.10.5.3 Billing Count

NOTE NOTE
Counter Color Print Counter B/W Print Counter Total Print Counter

The same data is stored in two or more addresses in one IC. Datacheck (checksum etc.) is conducted. When ESS is replaced, IC can be transferred. (IC is mounted on socket) Description Count the number of paper printed in color Count the number of paper printed in B/W Count the total number of paper printed in color and B/W

6.10.6 Non-Genuine Mode


When life of toner cartridge has ended, the printer stops accepting print request (life of toner cartridge is counted by the counter in CRUM). Taking into consideration that some users use refilled toner cartridges, the printer can accept print request by the users panel operation even if life of toner cartridge has ended. When the mode has changed so that the printer does not stop even after life of toner cartridge ends, the printer displays a message on the operation panel to inform the user of the mode change. When the printer operates in this mode, print image quality is not guaranteed. Also, remaining toner level is not displayed (as CRUM data can not be guaranteed).

6 22

Chapter 6 General

6.10.7 Utility Print


6.10.7.1 Printer Settings List Printer Settings List can be printed according to the user's request. Printer Settings List is printed in B/W on A4 or letter size paper in the automatically selected paper tray. Printer Settings List includes the following information: [Title] [Product name logo] [General] Total Impressions, Total Color Impressions, Total Black Impressions, Memory Capacity, Printer language, Number of Fonts Available, PostScript Version, PostScript Serial Number, Firmware Version, Boot Version, Engine Version, PostScript CRD Version, Default Paper, Default Plain, Default Label, Default Language [Network] Firmware Version, MAC Address, Ethernet Settings, TCP/IP, LPR, Port9100, IPP*, FTP, Netware*, Bonjour, HTTPS-SSL/TLS*, EtherTalk*, SNMP, E-Mail Alert, Internet Services, IP Filter *: Optional Multi-Protocol Card is required. [Print Volume] Print volume for each paper size 6.10.7.2 Font List Print Font List can be printed by the user's request. Font List is printed in B/W on A4 or letter size paper in the automatically selected paper tray. PCL or PS Font List can be printed using the control panel. Font List is printed on A4 or Letter paper in the automatically selected paper tray. YMCK color patterns are printed on the Font List. (PCL Printer Driver Only) 6.10.7.3 Job Log Print The printer can store a record of recently printed jobs and print Job Log. Job Log can be instantly printed or automatically printed when the number of print jobs processed has reached the specified number. Job Log is printed in B/W on A4 paper in the tray. 6.10.7.4 PCL Macro List Print PCL Macro List can be printed by the user's operation. PCL Macro List is printed on A4 or Letter size paper in the automatically selected paper tray. 6.10.7.5 Print Meter Print Print Meter Print can be printed by the user's operation. Print Meter is printed on A4 or Letter size paper in the automatically selected paper tray. 6.10.7.6 Stored Document List Print The list of documents stored in the printer by Secure Print/Proof Print can be printed by the user's operation. The list is printed on A4 or Letter size paper in the automatically selected paper tray.

6 23

Chapter 6 General 6.10.7.7 Error Log Print Error History Report can be printed according to the user's request. Error History Report in B/W on A4 or letter size paper in the automatically selected paper tray. 6.10.7.8 Supported Language The user can switch language on the operation panel or EWS (Language used in the EWS is switched in conjunction with the language used in the PC Browser.

NOTE
6.10.7.9 Demonstration Print

The PC Browser must be able to indicate that language.

The following three types are under consideration for Demonstration Print menus. Demo Print |-A4 Sample Demonstration Print (A4)

6.10.7.10 PCL Macro List Print PCL Macro List can be printed by the user's operation. PCL Macro List is printed on A4 size paper in the automatically selected paper tray. 6.10.7.11 Print Meter Print Print Meter Print can be printed by the user's operation. Print Meter is printed on A4 size paper in the automatically selected paper tray.

6 24

Chapter 6 General

6.10.8 Software Specifications


6.10.8.1 Firmware Update Tool By using firmware update tool, firmware update is easy operation once update data is acquired until it is completed. This tool runs under the Windows environment. This tool runs under the USB and network environment. Language: English 6.10.8.2 Linux Driver (FX-PDF Driver) The PDF driver that prints using the FX-PDF function of the device is provided. For distribution, operation check is performed in the following environments (but, no guarantee of proper operation). - ERed Hat Enterprise Linux v.4 WS - ENovell SUSE Linux desktop 10. For printing system, depends on CUPS (Common Unix Printing System). Tcl/Tk 8.3.5 or above is necessary to be installed. For language, supports English The RPM format installer is provided (including un-installation function) The following print functions are available. - Number of copies, Collate, Paper size*, Output color, Print mode, 2-sided print, Layout, Paper type, Paper tray, Job type *: Custom size is not supported. The following functions are displayed on the UI because this driver is common between the models. But, it is disabled on this printer due to device limitation. - Stapler, Punch The Linux driver is provided on the Web. Language: English 6.10.8.3 Mac Driver (FX-PDF Driver) The PDF driver that prints using the FX-PDF function of the device is provided. Supports Mac OS X 10.3 and 10.4 (When 10.3 is custom-installed, "BSD system" also needs to be installed) (For 10.4, Macintosh with Intel CPU is included) Depends on CUPS, the OS-standard printing system. For language, supports English only. The installer is provided. The uninstaller is not provided. The following print functions are available. - Number of copies, Collate, Paper size, Paper orientation, N-up, Page order specification, Output color, Print mode, Paper type, Paper tray, Job type, Authentication settings

6 25

Chapter 6 General *: Custom size is not supported. The Mac driver is provided on the Web and Driver CD KIT. Language: English 6.10.8.4 Utility Software - Network Setting Tool (Wired LANFIP Setup Utility)(Product H only) Network setting is available. Network Setting Tool is included in the Software Pack CD-ROM. - DPU (Direct Print Utility) For Windows 98/Me - FX USB For Windows 98/Me Font Download Tool PCL5 forms and fonts can be downloaded to RAM DISK. 6.10.8.5 3rd Party Software Support The following 3rd Party Softwares are supported: - Mail Client Software (for StatusMessenger) - Microsoft Outlook Express (6 or later) - Microsoft Outlook2003 - Netscape (Mail) (7 or later) - Ftp Client Software - Console command of Windows Me/2000/XP/x64 XP - Console command of Mac OSX, Linux (Red Hat Enterprise Linux v.4 WS,Novell SUSE Linux desktop 10. )*1 *1: Support only FTP user command from command line 6.10.8.6 Linkage with FX Brand Software The printer links up with the following softwares provided by FX - DocuHouse Linkage with printer management software "DocuHouse" is possible. DocuHouse history service is supported. Features and performance: Comply with the acceptance criteria of DocuHouse program Support timing: Post Launch (Comply with the support schedule of DocuHouse program) Table below shows the Language and Supported DocuHouse. English OS DocuHouse
*1

KO/TC/SC OS Supported*2

Supported

*1: Support with Windows2000, Windows XP and Windows Server 2003, Vista(include x64). *2: Using English UI

6 26

Chapter 6 General - PrintXchange PrintXchange is not supported - ARC-opl ARC-opl is not supported (currently Japanese version only) - CentreWare Flow Services CentreWare Flow Services is not supported - TrustMark Basic TrustMark Basic is not supported (currently domestic ART-EX version only) 6.10.8.7 Linkage with Other Brand Software The printer links up with the following softwares provided by other companies (except for FX). - Citrix MetaFrame and Presentation Server - SAP SAP R/3 - Print Utility for MetaFrame (Linkage with Citrix MetaFrame) Citrix MetaFrame and Presentation Server are supported. Develop basic linkage software, Print Utility for MetaFrame for linkage. Features and performance: Comply with the standard of basic distribution output program. Support timing: PostLaunch (Comply with the support schedule of the basic linkage program. About within one month after product launch) - Interstage (Advance Certified) The printer does not link up with Fujitsu Interstage. - SAP R/3 FX device type file (V1.x.x.) is provided. (See Table Language & Device Type Name) Test script of FX device type file (English and Japanese prepared) must be output properly. The development division performs the test. (CPF) Support timing: At Launch Reference URL http://www.fujixerox.co.jp/solution/kikanbunsan/sap/ Language English Korean Chinese (simplified) Chinese (Traditional) Language & Device Type Name (V1.xx) Device name (PCL) Device type name (PS) ZFXPCL ZKPFXPCL ZCNFXPCL ZTWFXPCL ZFXPST -

Language English Korean Chinese (simplified) Chinese (Traditional)

Language & Device Type Name (V2.xx) Device name (PCL) Device type name (PS) ZFXPST -

6 27

Chapter 6 General - IBM AS400 (IBM Printing Utility for Personal Communication) Japan only. Not supported. - JP1(Drop all model support) from SRD) Not supported.

6 28

Chapter 6 General

6.11 Tools and Service Consumables


6.11.1 Tools
There are no tools that are specific to this machine. Basic Tool

6.11.2 Service Consumable


There are no service consumables that are specific to this machine.

6 29

Chapter 6 General

6.12 Installation Procedure DocuPrint C1110


6.12.1 Check the Contents
- Printer

- Control panel label (Can be placed on the control panel as necessary) - Setup Guide - Safety Notes

- Power cord - Driver CD Kit - PS Driver Library CD

NOTE

Interface cables and paper must be purchased separately. When you purchase additional memory, install it following the User Guide (PDF) provided with the Driver CD Kit. When you purchase the optional network expansion card, install it following the installation guide.

6 30

Chapter 6 General

6.12.2 Remove the Shipping Tapes


Shipping Tapes

Do not remove these tapes in this step.

6.12.3 Set the Toner Cartridges

Press and slide the orange latches of the four toner cartridges towards the front of the printer. 3

6 31

Chapter 6 General

6.12.4 Set the Drum Cartridge


Remove the Drum Cartridge

Drum cartridge

Belt unit

NOTE
Pull the cartridge frontward and out, securely holding the tabs on both sides.

Do not force the lock levers past 90 degrees.

NOTE

Hold the Drum Cartridge firmly so as not to drop it.

6 32

Chapter 6 General Remove the 8 Pieces of Yellow Tapes

Do not remove the protective sheet in this step.

Insert the Drum Cartridge and Remove the Sheet

Insert the cartridge until the line on the gray tab meets the white line on the printer. 7

NOTE

Do not force the lock levers past 90 degrees.

6 33

Chapter 6 General

10

6.12.5 Connect the Power Cord

6 34

Chapter 6 General

6.12.6 Switch On the Power

To use a network connection, go to 6.12.7. To use a USB connection, go to 6.12.9.

6 35

Chapter 6 General

6.12.7 Connect the Network Cable

6.12.8 Set the IP Address


The following explains the how to set the IP address using the control panel. For a details on the procedure and other network settings, refer to the User Guide.
1 1

Menu Report / List

2 times

Menu Admin Menu


3

Admin Menu Wired Network


4 4

Wired Network Ethernet


5 5

Wired Network TCP/IP


6 6

TCP/IP IPv4
or

6 36

Chapter 6 General
7 7

IPv4 Get IP Address


8 8

Get IP Address DHCP/Autonet *


9 9

4 times

Get IP Address Panel


10

10

Reboot to apply settings Get IP Address Panel *


11 11

IPv4 Get IP Address


12 12

IPv4 IP Address
13 13

IP Address 000.000.000.000*
14 14

IP Address 192.000.000.000 Ex. 192.168.1.100


15 15

IP Address 192.000.000.000
16 Repeat steps 14 and 15 to set the IP address. 16

IP Address 192.168.001.100

6 37

Chapter 6 General
17 17

Reboot to apply settings IP Address 192.168.001.100*


18 18

IPv4 Subnet Mask


19 19

Subnet Mask 000.000.000.000*


20 Set the subnet mask in the same way as the IP address. 20

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.000*


21

21

IPv4 Gateway Address


22 22

Gateway Address 000.000.000.000*


23 Set the gateway address in the same way as the IP address. 23

Gateway Address 192.168.001.254*

24 Switch the printer off and then on again.

Refer to 6.14.2 setting the Network Environment.

6 38

Chapter 6 General

6.12.9 Install the Print Driver

Driver CD Kit

Click here for [Documentation (HTML)] that explains the procedure in detail. 2

3a

To Use a Network Connection To Use a USB Connection

3b

4 Install the print driver following the on-screen instructions.

6 39

Chapter 6 General

6.12.10 Connect the USB Cable


NOTE
Be sure to switch off the printer before connecting the USB cable.

6.12.11 Load the Paper

2a When loading A5/B5/A4/8.5 x 11"/7.25 x 10.5" paper

Adjust the guides to the size of the paper.

6 40

Chapter 6 General 2b When loading 8.5 x 13"/8.5 x 14" paper Slide the length guide to the edge of the tray.

Extend the tray.

Adjust the guides to the size of the paper.

6 41

Chapter 6 General

6.12.12 View the User Guide (PDF)

Driver CD Kit

NOTE

To view the User Guide, You must have Adobe Reader installed on your computer.

4 Select your printer's User Guide following the on-screen instructions. Finish

6 42

Chapter 6 General

6.13 Installation Procedure DocuPrint C1110B


6.13.1 Check the Contents
- Printer

- Control panel label (Can be placed on the control panel as necessary) - Setup Guide - Safety Notes

- Power cord - Driver CD Kit

NOTE

Interface cables and paper must be purchased separately. When you purchase additional memory, install it following the User Guide (PDF) provided with the Driver CD Kit.

6 43

Chapter 6 General

6.13.2 Remove the Shipping Tapes


Shipping Tapes

Do not remove these tapes in this step.

6.13.3 Set the Toner Cartridges

Press and slide the orange latches of the four toner cartridges towards the front of the printer. 3

6 44

Chapter 6 General

6.13.4 Set the Drum Cartridge


Remove the Drum Cartridge

Drum cartridge

Belt unit

NOTE
Pull the cartridge frontward and out, securely holding the tabs on both sides.

Do not force the lock levers past 90 degrees.

NOTE

Hold the Drum Cartridge firmly so as not to drop it.

6 45

Chapter 6 General Remove the 8 Pieces of Yellow Tapes

Do not remove the protective sheet in this step.

Insert the Drum Cartridge and Remove the Sheet

Insert the cartridge until the line on the gray tab meets the white line on the printer. 7

NOTE

Do not force the lock levers past 90 degrees.

6 46

Chapter 6 General

10

6 47

Chapter 6 General

6.13.5 Install the Print Driver

Driver CD Kit

Click here for [Documentation (HTML)] that explains the procedure in detail. 2

4 Install the print driver following the on-screen instructions.

6 48

Chapter 6 General

6.13.6 Connect the USB Cable

6.13.7 Connect the Power Cord

6.13.8 Switch On the Power

6 49

Chapter 6 General

6.13.9 Load the Paper

2a When loading A5/B5/A4/8.5 x 11"/7.25 x 10.5" paper

Adjust the guides to the size of the paper.

2b When loading 8.5 x 13"/8.5 x 14" paper Slide the length guide to the edge of the tray.

Extend the tray.

Adjust the guides to the size of the paper.

6 50

Chapter 6 General

6 51

Chapter 6 General

6.13.10 View the User Guide (PDF)

Driver CD Kit

NOTE

To view the User Guide, You must have Adobe Reader installed on your computer.

4 Select your printer's User Guide following the on-screen instructions. Finish

6 52

Chapter 6 General

6.14 Printer Environment Settings


This chapter describes the supported operating environments and necessary settings to use the printer.

6.14.1 Supported Operating Environments


The DocuPrint C1110 can be used as both a local and a network printer, while the DocuPrint C1110 B can be used only as a local printer. When used as a local printer, the printer is connected directly to a computer. When used as a network printer, the printer is connected to a computer over a network. To use the printer as a network printer, set all ports you want to use to [Enable] on the control panel. (default: [Enable])

DocuPrint C1110 Internet IPP

DocuPrint C1110

Local Connection USB

Network Connection LPD/SMB/Port9100/EtherTalk/FTP DocuPrint C1110 B

Network Connection NetWare/Windows Shared Printer

Server

Local Connection USB

6 53

Chapter 6 General Supported Operating Systems and Operating Environments

NOTE

The supported operating systems are subject to change without prior notice. Visit our web site for the latest information. indicates the items that can be configured only on the DocuPrint C1110.

Connection Method Port Name

Local USB*2

Network (DocuPrint C1110 only) Port 9100 TCP/ IP O O Ether Talk*1 Apple Talk

LPD TCP/ IP O O

NetWare*1 TCP/ IP O O IPX/ SPX O O

SMB*1 Net BEUI O TCP/ IP O O

IPP*1

FTP TCP/ IP O O

WSD*1 TCP/ IP

Protocol Windows 2000 Windows XP (x32/x64) Windows Server 2003 (x32/x64) Windows Vista (x32/x64) Mac OS X 10.2.8/ 10.3.9/10.4

O O

TCP/IP O O

O O

O O

O O*3

O O

*1: The network expansion card (optional) must be installed. *2: USB port must be set on the computer connected to the printer. *3: Supported on Mac OS X 10.3.9 or 10.4. Note (DocuPrint C1110 only) When printing from Macintosh, refer to the User Guide on the PostScript Driver Library CD-ROM.

6 54

Chapter 6 General

6.14.2 Setting the Network Environment (DocuPrint C1110 only)


This section explains how to install your printer in a TCP/IP environment. When installing the printer in a different environment, refer to the `CD-ROM Documentation (HTML)' on the CD-ROM of the Driver CD Kit. Setting IP Address To use TCP/IP protocol, you must configure an IP address for the printer. If your printer has the network expansion card (optional) installed, the printer can print using the IPv6 communication as well as the IPv4 communication. The following explains how to set the IP address in IPv4 mode. When using the IP address in IPv6 mode, refer to " Using the Printer in an IPv6 Environment". Setting the IP Address in IPv4 Mode By default, the printer is set to obtain its IP address (via the [Get IP Address] setting on the control panel) using [DHCP/Autonet]. Thus, when the printer is connected to a network that has a DHCP server, the printer automatically obtains its IP address from the server. Print the [Printer Settings] list to see if the printer already has an IP address. If the printer does not have an IP address, set [Get IP Address] to [Panel] and configure the address.

NOTE

The printer can obtain its IP address also by using a BOOTP or RARP server. If using a BOOTP or RARP server, set [Get IP Address] to [BOOTP] or [RARP]. If using a DHCP server, the printer's IP address may change without notice. Make sure to check the IP address periodically. To use DHCP in a WINS (Windows Internet Name Service) environment, the network expansion card (optional) must be installed.

Printing the [Printer Settings] List Use the following procedure to print the [Printer Settings] list.

Press the <Menu> button to display the menu screen.


2

Menu Report / List

Press the < > or <Eject/Set> button to accept the selection. [Printer Settings] is displayed.
3

Report / List Printer Settings

Press the <Eject/Set> button to print the report. The report is printed.

6 55

Chapter 6 General Example of the [Printer Settings] list

NOTE

The following example uses the printer with the network expansion card (optional) not installed. If the network expansion card is installed to your printer, some items to be listed may differ.

If an IP address is listed, skip the following procedure. If an IP address is not listed, or if you want to change the current IP address, configure the setting using the following procedure.

To Set the IP Address on the Control Panel Use the following procedure to configure the printer's IP address on the control panel. Depending on your network environment, your printer also needs a subnet mask and gateway address. Consult your network administrator for the settings required for your printer. -To Set the IP Address
1

Press the <Menu> button to display the menu screen.


2

Menu Report / List

Press the < > button until [Admin Menu] is displayed.


Note If you went past the desired item, return to the item by pressing the < 3 > button.

Menu Admin Menu

Press the < > or <Eject/Set> button to accept the selection. [Wired Network] is displayed.
Note If you pressed the < > button on the wrong item, return to the previous screen by pressing the < > button. To start over from the beginning, press the <Menu> button. 4

Admin Menu Wired Network

Press the < > or <Eject/Set> button to accept the selection. [Ethernet] is displayed.
5

Wired Network Ethernet

Press the < > button until [TCP/IP] is displayed.

Wired Network TCP/IP

6 56

Chapter 6 General

Press the < > or <Eject/Set> button to accept the selection. [IPv4] or [IP Mode] is displayed. If [IP Mode] is displayed, press the < > button to display [IPv4].
7

TCP/IP IPv4

Press the < > or <Eject/Set> button to accept the selection. [Get IP Address] is displayed.
8

IPv4 Get IP Address

Press the < > or <Eject/Set> button to accept the selection. The current setting is displayed.
9

Get IP Address DHCP/Autonet*

Press the < > button until [Panel] is displayed.


10

Get IP Address Panel

Confirm your selection by pressing the <Eject/Set> button. The display shows [Reboot to apply settings] for 3 seconds and returns to the setting screen. You will reboot the printer after setting the gateway address. Go on to the next step.
11

Get IP Address Panel*

Press the < > button to return to [Get IP Address].


12

IPv4 Get IP Address

Press the < > button to display [IP Address].


13

IPv4 IP Address

Press the < > or <Eject/Set> button to accept the selection. The current IP address is displayed.
14

IP Address 000.000.000.000*

Enter the value in the first field using the < > or < > button, and press the < > button.
Note If you do not need to change the setting, press the < next field. > button to advance to the > or

IP Address 192.000.000.000

Pressing and holding down the <

< > button increments the value by 10. To return to the previous field, press the < > button.

6 57

Chapter 6 General
15

Enter the rest of the fields in the same manner. After entering the last (4th) field, press the <Eject/Set> button to confirm your entry.
16

IP Address 192.168.001.100*

If you want to set a subnet mask and gateway address, press the < > button and proceed to Step 17. If you want to finish the setting, proceed to Step 24. To Set the Subnet Mask/Gateway Addressl
17

Press the < > button until [Subnet Mask] is displayed.


18

IPv4 Subnet Mask

Press the < > or <Eject/Set> button to accept the selection. The current subnet mask is displayed.
19

Subnet Mask 000.000.000.000*

Enter the subnet mask in the same way you entered the IP address, and press the <Eject/Set> button to confirm your entry.
20

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.000*

Press the < > button to return to [Subnet Mask].


21

IPv4 Subnet Mask

Press the < > button to display [Gateway Address].


22

IPv4 Gateway Address

Press the < > or <Eject/Set> button to accept the selection. The current gateway address is displayed.
23

Gateway Address 000.000.000.000*

Enter the gateway address in the same way you entered the IP address, and press the <Eject/Set> button to confirm your entry.
24

Gateway Address 192.168.001.254*

The setting is now complete. Reboot the printer by switching the power off and then on again.
25

Print the [Printer Settings] list to verify your settings.

6 58

Chapter 6 General Using the Printer in an IPv6 Environment If the printer is connected to a network with an IPv6 router that advertises network prefixes, the printer automatically configures the IPv6 stateless address. For details, consult your system administrator. You can check the IPv6 link-local address and IPv6 stateless address by printing out the [Printer Settings] list. Printing the [Printer Settings] List Use the following procedure to print the [Printer Settings] list and check the addresses.

Press the <Menu> button to display the menu screen.


2

Menu Report / List

Press the < > or <Eject/Set> button to accept the selection. [Printer Settings] is displayed.
3

Report / List Printer Settings

Press the <Eject/Set> button to print the report. The report is printed. Example of the [Printer Settings] list

IPv6 link-local address

IPv6 stateless addresses are listed here if they are automatically configured.

NOTE

To set an IP address manually, set the IP address under the [Properties] tab > [TCP/IP] on CentreWare Internet Services. For information on how to access CentreWare Internet Services, refer to " Configuring the Printer Using CentreWare Internet Services". To specify an IPv6 address, enter the address and then "64" after a slash (/) under the [Properties] tab > [Protocol Settings] > [TCP/IP] on CentreWare Internet Services. For details, consult your system administrator.

6 59

Chapter 6 General Configuring the Printer Using CentreWare Internet Services CentreWare Internet Services is a service that allows you to monitor or remotely configure the printer using a web browser when the printer is on a TCP/IP network. Some of the control panel settings can be set also on the service's [Properties] tab.

NOTE

CentreWare Internet Services cannot be used when your printer is a local printer.

Supported Operating Environments CentreWare Internet Services has been tested to work on the following web browsers. On Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows Vista - Microsoft Internet Explorer 6/7 - Mozilla Firefox 2 On Mac OS X 10.4 - Mozilla Firefox 2 - Safari 2 Setting Up a Web Browser When accessing CentreWare Internet Services, we recommend you to set your web browser: - not to use a proxy server when specifying the printers IP address. - to enable JavaScript.

NOTE

If you access CentreWare Internet Services using a proxy server, the response from the service may be slow or the window of the service may not be displayed. Some buttons on the service do not appear when JavaScript is not running or disabled. In such case, the buttons are displayed as URL links. For information on how to set up your web browser, refer to the online help for the web browser.

If you want to change the display language of CentreWare Internet Services, change the display language of your web browser.

NOTE

For information on how to change the display language of your web browser, refer to the online help for the web browser.

6 60

Chapter 6 General Setting Up the Printer To use CentreWare Internet Services, you must configure the printer's IP address and enable [InternetServices] (default: [Enable]). When [InternetServices] is set to [Disable], change it to [Enable] on the control panel. Refer to Protocol (User Guide p.88) CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items The followings are the main features on each tab of CentreWare Internet Services.

Tab Name Status

Feature General Displays the printer's product name, IP address, and status. Printer Status Displays the sizes and remaining volumes of the paper loaded in the paper trays, the status of the output tray, and the remaining life of consumables. Fault Status Displays the status of the control panel and error information (error location and details). Displays the job status list and job history list. Description Displays the printer's product name and serial number. It also sets the printer's name*, installation location*, contact person*, and administrator's e-mail address*. Configuration Displays the specifications of the print features, page description languages, and memory information. Usage Counters Displays the total number of color and monochrome pages printed to date. Initialization Initializes the NV memory or reboots the printer. Security* Sets the settings for IPsec. It also creates/manages/deletes self-signed certificates and enables SSL/TLS communication. This item appears only when the network expansion card (optional) is installed. StatusMessenger* The printer can notify its status via e-mail to users who have been registered through this feature. You can set the e-mail addresses of the users and the items or events that the users will be notified of. Internet Services Settings* Sets whether or not to automatically update the window of CentreWare Internet Services and the interval at which the window is updated (in seconds). This also enables or disables the Administrator Mode and sets the administrator's ID and password, if the Administrator Mode is enabled. The default system administrator ID and password are "11111" and "x-admin", respectively. Make sure to change the password before using the Administrator Mode. Port Status Enables or disables each port. Port Settings Sets the settings for Ethernet. Protocol Settings* Sets the details of each protocol.

Jobs Properties

Print

Print Auditron* This feature allows you to control user access to the printer. If enabling this feature, register users who are granted access to the printer. Displays a link to customer support.

Support

* These items can be configured only on CentreWare Internet Services and not on the control panel. The security features are not supported on the model available in China.

6 61

Chapter 6 General Using CentreWare Internet Services Follow these steps when accessing CentreWare Internet Services. 1. Start your computer and launch a web browser. 2. In the URL field, enter the IP address or URL of the printer, and press the <Enter> key. The top page of CentreWare Internet Services is displayed Example - IP address Example - URL

Example - IPv6 address

Note When specifying a port number, enter ":" (colon) and then "80" (the factory default port number) after the address. To find out the printers port number, print the [Printer Settings] list from the printer. The port number can be changed under the [Properties] tab > [Protocol Settings] > [HTTP]. If you change the port number, you must enter ":" (colon) and then the port number after the address.

When SSL/TLS server communication is enabled, enter "https" before the address instead of "http". This feature is not supported on the model available in China. For information about the Authentication/Auditron Administration and data encryption features, refer to "7.7 Security Features" (User Guide P. 146) and "7.8 Authentication and Auditron Administration Features (DocuPrint C1110 only)" (User Guide P. 155).

Using the Online Help For details on each setting item, refer to the online help for CentreWare Internet Services. You can browse the online help by clicking the [Help] button on the service.

6 62

Chapter 6 General

6.14.3 Installing a Printer Driver


To print from your computer, install a PCL print driver using the CD-ROM of the Driver CD Kit. The installation procedure varies depending on how your computer is connected to the printer. For installation instructions, refer to the `CD-ROM Documentation (HTML)' on the CD-ROM.
Note Refer to the CD-ROM Documentation (HTML) also when installing ContentsBridge Utility or other software.

Uninstalling a Print Driver and Other Software To Uninstall a Print Driver Your print driver can be uninstalled using the uninstallation tool contained on the CD-ROM of the Driver CD Kit. For more information, refer to the `CD-ROM Documentation (HTML)' on the CDROM. To Uninstall Other Software When uninstalling other software installed from the Driver CD Kit, refer to the "Readme" file provided for each software. The "Readme" files can be viewed under the `Product Information (HTML)' in the Driver CD Kit.

6 63

Chapter 6 General

6.15 Control Panel Manu Tree

Control Panel Menu Tree


Basic Control Panel Functions
To move up and down the menus: To select a menu or move to the right: To cancel a selection or return to the left: To confirm an entry: To exit the menu screen: < > or < > button < > or <Eject/Set> button < > button <Eject/Set> button <Menu> button

Character/Number Entry Functions


To increase or decrease a value: To move between digits or fields: To reset a value to the default: < > or < > button < > or < > button < > and < > buttons

Print Menus
Ready to Print < > button Select User ID User01

The print menus appear on the display only when additional memory of 256 MB or above is installed.

Print Menu Secure Print

Password+SET key [xxxxxxxxxxxx]

Select Document All Documents

All Documents Print and Delete All Documents Print and Save All Documents Delete document1 Print and Delete document1 Print and Save document1 Delete Enter Quantity Use PC settings Enter Quantity xxx Set(s)

Enter Quantity Use PC Settings Enter Quantity xxx Set(s)

Secure Print No Jobs

Select Document document1

Enter Quantity xxx Set(s)

Print Menu Sample Print

Select User ID User01

Select Document All Documents

All Documents Print and Delete All Documents Print and Save All Documents Delete document1 Print and Delete document1 Print and Save document1 Delete

Proof Print No Jobs

Select Document document1

Enter Quantity xxx Set(s)

6 64

Chapter 6 General

Conventions for the Administrator Menus


: Main menus : Items that appear/do not appear depending on the options installed in the printer. * : Default

Administrator Menus
Ready to Print

<Menu> button

Password

If the control panel is locked with a password, [0000] enter the password here.

Report / List

Printer Settings, Panel Settings, PCL Font List, PCL Macro List, PS Font List, PDF Font List, Job History, Error History, Print Meter, Demo Print, Stored Documents

Meter Readings

Meter 1, Meter 2, Meter 3, Meter 4

Wired Network

*1 *1

Continued on the next page To A Continued on the next page To B Continued on the next page To C Continued on the next page To D Continued on the next page To F Continued on the next page To G

USB Settings

System Settings

Maintenance Mode Admin Menu PDF PCL

PostScript *1 Panel Settings

Continued on the next page To H Continued on the next page To I

*1 : This item appears only on the DocuPrint C1110. Tray Settings Tray 1 Paper Type PS Error Report Plain On *, Paper*, Recycled Paper, Off Paper, Heavyweight 1, Bond Heavyweight 2, Labels, Coated 1, Coated 2, Coated 3, Envelope A4 Portrait*, A5 Portrait, B5 Portrait, 8.5 x 11" P, 8.5 x 13" P, 8.5 x 14" P, 7.25 x 10.5" P, Env3.9 x 7.5" P, Env3.9 x 7.5" L, Env 110x220mm P, Env 110x220mm L, Env 162x229mm P, Env4.1 x 9.5" P

Paper Size

Custom Size

Length Y Width X

xxxmm* xxxmm*

Display Screen

On*, Off

6 65

Chapter 6 General

A (The items appear only on the DocuPrint C1110.)


Wired Network Ethernet Auto*, 10BASE-T Half, 10BASE-T Full, 100BASE-TX Half, 100BASE-TX Full

TCP/IP

IP Mode IPv4

Dual Stack*, IPv4, IPv6 Get IP Address IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway Address DHCP / Autonet*, BOOTP, RARP, DHCP, Panel 000.000.000.000*

IPsec

Disable These items do not appear on the model available in China.

Protocol

LPD, Port 9100, IPP, SMB (TCP/IP), SMB (NetBEUI), FTP, WSD, E-mail Printing, StatusMessenger, InternetServices, EtherTalk Compat, Bonjour (mDNS)

Enable*, Disable

HTTP - SSL/TLS

Disable*, Enable

This item appears only when a certificate is registered in the printer. These items do not appear on the model available in China. NetWare NetWare IP NetWare IPX Enable*, Disable

SNMP

SNMP (UDP/IP) SNMP (IPX)

Enable*, Disable

IPX/SPX

Auto*, Ethernet II, Ethernet 802.3, Ethernet 802.2, Ethernet SNAP

IP Filter

No.n / Address No.n / Mask No.n / Mode n: 1-5

000.000.000.000* Off*, Accept, Reject

Initialize NVM

Ready to Init

Adobe Protocol

Auto*, Standard, BCP, TBCP, Binary

B (The items appear only on the DocuPrint C1110.)


USB Settings Adobe Protocol TBCP*, Binary, Auto, Standard, BCP

6 66

Chapter 6 General

C
System Settings Low Power Timer 3 Minutes* 3 - 60 Minutes (increment: 1 min.)

Sleep Mode

Enable*, Disable

These items do not appear on the model available in China.

Sleep Mode Timer

2 Minutes*

2 - 120 Minutes (increment: 1 min.)

Audio Tones

Control Panel, Invalid Key, Machine Ready, Job Completed, Fault Tone, Alert Tone, Out of Paper, Low Toner Alert, Base Tone 30 Seconds*

Off, On*

Job Time-out

Off or 5 - 300 Seconds (increment: 1 sec.)

Auto Job History

Off*, On Off*, Top Left, Top Right, Bottom Left, Bottom Right Off*, On Off*, On Off*, Larger Size, Closest Size Millimeters(mm)*, Inches (") On*, Off Off*, On A4*, 8.5 x 11"

Print ID

Print Text

RAM Disk

Substitute Tray

mm / inch

Interrupt Print

Print Priority

DefaultPaperSize

D
Maintenance Mode Adjust PaperType Paper Type Plain Paper Labels Lightweight, Heavyweight*

Adjust BTR

Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Bond Paper, Heavyweight 1, Heavyweight 2, Labels, Coated 1, Coated 2, Coated 3, Envelope Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Bond Paper, Heavyweight 1, Heavyweight 2, Labels, Coated 1, Coated 2, Coated 3, Envelope On*, Off

0* -6 - +6 (unit: 1)

Adjust Fuser

0* -2 - +2 (unit: 1)

Auto Adjust Regi

To E (next page)

6 67

Chapter 6 General

From E (previous page)

([Maintenance Mode] continued) PlainAdjust Auto Paper Color Regi Chart Enter Adjustment Fast Scan Slow Scan Y=0 M=0 C=0 -9 - +9 (unit: 1) Ready to Adjust

Adjust ColorRegi Paper Type

Adjust Altitude

0m*, 1000m, 2000m, 3000m

Clean Developer

Are you sure?

Toner Refresh

Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black

Are you sure?

Drum Refresh

Are you sure?

Print Meter

Reset?

Initialize NVM

Ready to Init

Storage Disk

Ready to Init

F
PDF Adjust Paper Type Quantity Plain 1 Set(s) Paper * 1 - 999 sets

Print Mode

Normal*, High Quality, High Speed

Password

[1234567890123]

32 characters Code 0x20 - 0x7d

Collated

Off*, On When [DefaultPaperSize] is [A4]

Output Size

Auto, A4*

Auto, 8.5x11"*

When [DefaultPaperSize] is [8.5 x 11"]

Layout

Auto %*, 100% (No Zoom), Booklet, 2 Pages Up, 4 Pages Up

Output Color

Color (Auto)*, Black

6 68

Chapter 6 General

G
PCL Adjust Size Output Paper Type A4*, A5, B5, 8.5 x 11", 8.5 x 13", 8.5 x 14", 7.25 x 10.5", Env 3.9 x 7.5", Env 110 x 220mm, Env 162 x 229mm, Env 4.1 x 9.5" Custom Size Length Y Width X xxxmm* xxxmm*

Orientation

Portrait*, Landscape Courier* Select from 81 fonts

Font

Symbol Set

Roman-8*

Select from 36 sets

Font Size

12.00*

4.00 - 50.00 (increment: 0.25 pt)

Font Pitch

10.00*

6.00 - 24.00 (increment: 0.01 cpi)

Form Lines

64*

5 - 128 (increment: 1)

Quantity

1*

1 - 999 (increment: 1)

Image Enhance

On*, Off Disable*, Enable Disable*, Enable Off*, Add-LF, Add-CR, CR-XX Black*, Color

HexDump

Draft Mode

Line Termination

Output Color

H (The items appear only on the DocuPrint C1110.)


PostScript Adjust PS Error Paper Report Type On*, Paper Plain Off Off*, xx Minutes Auto*, Select FromTray Black, Color*

PS Job Time-out

1 - 900 Minutes (increment: 1 min.)

PaperSelect Mode

Default Color

I
Panel Settings Adjust PS Panel Error Lock Paper Report Type Off Plain On ,, Paper ** Off On

Change Password

Current Password

New Password

Reenter

These items appear only when [Panel Lock] is [On].

6 69

Chapter 6 General

6 70

Chapter 7 Wiring Data

CONTENTS
7.1 Connector [P (plug) / J (jack)].....................................................................................7-1
7.1.1 List of P/J ........................................................................................................................................ 7-1 7.1.2 IOT P/J layout diagram ................................................................................................................... 7-3

7.2 Connection Wiring Diagram........................................................................................7-7


7.2.1 Symbols in the General Connection Wiring Diagram...................................................................... 7-7 7.2.2 General Wiring Diagram ................................................................................................................. 7-9

7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts..................................................................7-10


7.3.1 Notes on Using the Wiring Diagram between Parts...................................................................... 7-10 7.3.2 Configuration of the Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts...................................................... 7-12 1 DC POWER SUPPLY ....................................................................................................................... 7-14 2 FEEDER, SSI & REGI ...................................................................................................................... 7-16 3 DRIVE ............................................................................................................................................... 7-18 4 ROS .................................................................................................................................................. 7-20 5 XEROGRAPHIC ............................................................................................................................... 7-22 6 HIGH VOLTAGE ............................................................................................................................... 7-24 7 DEVELOPER .................................................................................................................................... 7-26 8 FUSER.............................................................................................................................................. 7-28 9 CONTROLLER ................................................................................................................................. 7-30

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.1 Connector [P (plug) / J (jack)]

7.1 Connector [P (plug) / J (jack)]


7.1.1 List of P/J
Printer P/J 3 10 11 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 26 28 29 29 31 40 40 41 42 44 47 48 101 101 111 141 144 161 171 Coordiates D-139 I-156 I-156 H-157 H-156 I-158 H-157 H-158 H-158 J-158 J-157 J-157 J-158 J-158 J-158 J-158 C-140 I-158 H-157 C-136 I-156 I-156 J-157 G-136 F-136 G-137 D-138 I-157 E-138 G-107 G-151 F-153 H-106 Remarks Connects PWBA ESS and MULTI PROTOCOL CARD Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY ESS Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY ESS VIDEO Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY LVPS Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY 24V Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY HVPS Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY FUSER Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY TNR MOT Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY TNR MOT Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY HUM Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY MAIN MOT Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY SUB MOT Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY L SIDE Connects PWBA MCU and DRIVE ASSY PH (Color Mode Switching Solenoid) Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY KSNR REGCL Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY L SIDE Connects PWBA ESS and HARNESS ASSY B Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY SIDE SW Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY TONER CRUM Connects PWBA LVPS and HARNESS ASSY ESS POWER Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY ROS RE Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY ROS VIDEO Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY PHD XPRO Connects PWBA LVPS and HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK Connects PWBA LVPS and HARNESS ASSY FUSER Connects PWBA LVPS and HARNESS ASSY SW PWR Connects PWBA ESS and HARNESS ASSY ESS Not Connect (Debug only) Connects PWBA ESS and HARNESS ASSY ESS VIDEO Connects LED ASSY ERASE and HARNESS ASSY LVPS Connects PWBA EEPROM and HARNESS ASSY PHD XPRO Connects PWBA HVPS and HARNESS ASSY HVPS Connects FUSER ASSY and HARNESS ASSY FUSER

7-1

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.1 Connector [P (plug) / J (jack)]
P/J 181 182 191 192 201 211 220 221 231 232 233 234 261 262 281 291 311 312 313 314 401 411 412 422 482 483 484 501 502 503 504 2811 5041 2200/ 2900 Coordiates C-152 C-151 C-151 C-150 H-140 J-138 E-106 H-138 C-125 F-125 G-125 F-124 H-139 I-139 C-108 H-107 H-110 H-109 H-108 H-108 C-139 D-122 D-123 G-150 G-140 G-140 G-141 D-136 C-136 C-136 D-136 D-107 I-107 H-111 Remarks Connects DISPENSER ASSY (Motor Assy DISP Y) and HARNESS ASSY TNR MOT Connects DISPENSER ASSY (Motor Assy DISP M) and HARNESS ASSY TNR MOT Connects DISPENSER ASSY (Motor Assy DISP C) and HARNESS ASSY TNR MOT Connects DISPENSER ASSY (Motor Assy DISP K) and HARNESS ASSY TNR MOT Connects FEEDER ASSY V (HUM Sensor) and HARNESS ASSY HUM Connects DRIVE ASSY MAIN (Main Motor) and HARNESS ASSY MAIN MOT Connects CONSOLE ASSY PANEL and HARNESS ASSY A-OP Connects DRIVE ASSY SUB (Sub Motor) and HARNESS ASSY SUB MOT Connects FEEDER ASSY V (Feed Solenoid) and HARNESS ASSY L SIDE Connects FEEDER ASSY V (REGI Sensor) and HARNESS ASSY L SIDE Connects FEEDER ASSY V (SSI No Paper Sensor) and HARNESS ASSY L SIDE Connects FEEDER ASSY V (CST No Paper Sensor) and HARNESS ASSY L SIDE Connects DRIVE ASSY PH (Color Mode Switching Sensor) and HARNESS ASSY KSNR REGCL Connects CLUTCH ASSY DRV and HARNESS ASSY KSNR REGCL Connects TRANSFER ASSY (Harness Assy CTD SNR2) and HARNESS ASSY L SIDE Connects DISPENSER ASSY (Side Cover Switch) and HARNESS ASSY SIDE SW Connects DISPENSER ASSY (Connector CRUM Y) and HARNESS ASSY TONER CRUM Connects DISPENSER ASSY (Connector CRUM M) and HARNESS ASSY TONER CRUM Connects DISPENSER ASSY (Connector CRUM C) and HARNESS ASSY TONER CRUM Connects DISPENSER ASSY (Connector CRUM K) and HARNESS ASSY TONER CRUM Connects PWBA ESS and HARNESS ASSY ESS POWER Connects ROS ASSY and HARNESS ASSY ROS RE Connects ROS ASSY and HARNESS ASSY ROS VIDEO Connects PHD ASSY ( Eeprom PHD) and HARNESS ASSY PHD XPRO Connects BREAKER GFI and HARNESS ASSY SW PWR Connects BREAKER GFI and HARNESS ASSY SW PWR Connects BREAKER GFI and HARNESS ASSY GFI GND Connects PWBA LVPS and HARNESS ASSY LVPS Connects PWBA LVPS and HARNESS ASSY 24V Connects PWBA LVPS and FAN MAIN Connects PWBA LVPS and HARNESS ASSY TEST RL Connects ADC Sensor and HARNESS ASSY CTD SNR2 (TRANSFER ASSY) Not Connects (Used in production process only) Connects HARNESS ASSY A-OP and HARNESS ASSY B

7-2

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.1 Connector [P (plug) / J (jack)]

7.1.2 IOT P/J layout diagram

101

102

103

220 171 291

104

105

106

2811
107

5041 141 314

108

281
109

313 312

110

311

111

112

2200/2900

113

114

115

Wsb07001FA

7-3

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.1 Connector [P (plug) / J (jack)]

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

411

123

412
124

125

126

231
127

233 234 232

128

129

130

Wsb07002FA

7-4

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.1 Connector [P (plug) / J (jack)]

131

132

133

504 501 502 47 48 44

134

503 40

135

136

137

221 101 111 401 211

138

139

3 29

140

141

262 261 201 483 482 484

142

143

144

145

Wsb07003FA

7-5

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.1 Connector [P (plug) / J (jack)]

146

144
147

422

148

149

150

192 191

151

182
152

181
153

154

155

40
156

41

10 11 42 22 21 24 26 23 28

161

157

158

15 14 17 101 31 19 18 29 16 20

159

160

Wsb07004FA

7-6

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.2 Connection Wiring Diagram

7.2 Connection Wiring Diagram


7.2.1 Symbols in the General Connection Wiring Diagram
The symbols in the general connection wiring diagram are described below.

Symbol

Description Represents an interconnection between parts using wiring harness or wire. Represents an interconnection which differs according to the specifications. Represents an interconnection between parts using a conductive member such as a plate spring. Represents a connection between parts by tightening of a screw.

Indicates a frame ground.

Represents a connector. The connector No. is indicated inside the box.

Represents a connection terminal with a plate spring on the printed circuit board. The connector (terminal) No. is indicated inside the box.

Represents a connector directly connected to the printed circuit board. The connector No. is indicated inside the box.

The box containing a part name represents a part. "PL X.Y.Z" indicates the item "Z" of the plate (PL) "X.Y" described in Chapter 5 "Parts List."

Represents a functional part within a part, and indicates the name of the functional part.

Represents a section in "7.3. Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts," and indicates its section No.

7-7

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.2 Connection Wiring Diagram
Symbol Description Represents a screw for fixing wiring harness and a conductive member such as a plate spring.

Represents a conductive member such as a plate spring.

7-8

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.2 Connection Wiring Diagram

7.2.2 General Wiring Diagram

Fuser FUSER ASSY PL6.1.1 P/J171 PWBA MCU PL8.2.13 Used in production process only. J5041

PWBA LVPS PL8.2.1 P/J47 P/J504

P/J48

HARN ASSY SW PWR PL8.2.9

P/J482 P/J483

BREAKER GFI PL8.2.11

P/J503 P/J17 P/J29 SWITCH PL5.1.9 P/J291 P/J44 P/J502

FAN MAIN PL8.1.1 HARN ASSY INTERLOCK PL8.2.5 DC Power Supply

ROS

ROS ASSY PL4.1.1

P/J411 P/J412

P/J40 P/J41

P/J15 P/J14

1 9

P/J501 Controller P/J40

High Voltage

PWBA HVPS PL4.1.19 P161 P/J16

P/J141 PHD ASSY PL4.1.21 P/J10 EEPROM PHD P/J422 P/J42 P/J11

LED ASSY ERASE PL4.1.8

P/J401 PWB ESS PL8.1.9 P/J101 P/J111 P/J29 P/J2900 CONSOLE ASSY PANEL PL1.1.19 P/J220

PWBA EEPROM PL8.2.16

P/J144 P/J18 P/J181

Developer MOTOR ASSY DISP (Y) PL5.1.3

SENSOR HUM PL8.2.7

P/J201

P/J20 P/J182 MOTOR ASSY DISP (M) PL5.1.3

TRANSFER ASSY PL6.1.7

ADC SENSOR P/J2811 P/J281 P/J28 P/J19 P/J191 MOTOR ASSY DISP (C) PL5.1.3

5 2

Xerographic

Feeder, SSI & Regi

P/J192

MOTOR ASSY DISP (K) PL5.1.3

SOLENOID FEED MSI PL3.1.9 P/J231

P/J23

P/J31

P/J314

CONNECTOR CRUM (K) PL5.1.14

REGI SENSOR PL3.2.13

P/J232

P/J313

CONNECTOR CRUM (C) PL5.1.14

SSI NO PAPER SENSOR PL3.2.13 CST NO PAPER SENSOR PL3.2.13 CLUTCH ASSY DRV PL3.1.1

P/J233

P/J312

CONNECTOR CRUM (M) PL5.1.14

P/J311 P/J234

CONNECTOR CRUM (Y) PL5.1.14

P/J262

P/J26 Drive P/J21 P/J211 DRIVE ASSY MAIN PL7.1.2

P/J22

P/J221

DRIVE ASSY SUB PL7.1.1

P/J24

COLOR MODE SWITCHING SOLENOID

DRIVE ASSY PH PL7.1.4

P/J261

COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR

WSB07001KC

7-9

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts

7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts


7.3.1 Notes on Using the Wiring Diagram between Parts
The following describes the legend of the wiring diagrams between parts shown on the following pages.

Symbols

Description

Denotes a plug.

Denotes a jack.

P/JXX
YY

Denotes Pin yy and Jack yy of the connector Pxx and Jxx.

PWBA HNB DRV (PL X.Y.Z)

Denotes the parts. PL X.Y.Z implies the item "Z" of plate (PL) "X.Y" in Chapter 5. Parts List.

Heater

Denotes functional parts attached with functional parts name.

Control

Denotes the control and its outline in PWB.

DEVE_A

Denotes a connection between parts with harnesses or wires, attached with signal name/contents.

REGI CLUTCH ON(L)+24VDC

Denotes the function, and logic value of the signal to operate the function (Low: L, High: H). The given voltage is for signal in high status. The arrow indicates the direction of signal.

7-10

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts
Symbols
EXIT PAPER SENSED(L)+3.3VDC

Description Denotes the function, and logic value of the signal when the function operated (Low: L, High: H). The given voltage is for signal in high status. The arrow indicates the direction of signal.

Denotes a connection between wires.

I/L +24VDC

Denotes DC voltage when the interlock switch in HNB MCU WITH CPU turns on.

+5VDC +3.3VDC

Denotes DC voltage.

SG

Denotes signal ground.

AG

Denotes analog ground.

RTN

Denotes the return.

7-11

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts

7.3.2 Configuration of the Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts


The interconnection wiring diagram is divided into 9 sections. 1 to 9 indicate details of the interconnections of parts. 1 DC POWER SUPPLY Connections of PWBA LVPS with PWBA MCU. Connections of HARN ASSY SW PWR with PWBA LVPS. Connections of BREAKER GFI with HARN ASSY SW PWR. Connections of FAN MAIN with PWBA LVPS. Connections of HARN ASSY INTERLOCK with PWBA LVPS. Connections of SWITCH with PWBA MCU. 2 FEEDER, SSI & REGI Connections of SOLENOID FEED MSI with PWBA MCU. Connections of REGI SENSOR with PWBA MCU. Connections of SSI NO PAPER SENSOR with PWBA MCU. Connections of CST NO PAPER SENSOR with PWBA MCU. Connections of CLUTCH ASSY DRV with PWBA MCU. 3 DRIVE Connections of DRIVE ASSY PH with PWBA MCU. Connections of DRIVE ASSY MAIN with PWBA MCU. Connections of DRIVE ASSY SUB with PWBA MCU. 4 ROS Connections of ROS ASSY with PWBA MCU. 5 XEROGRAPHIC Connections of PWBA EEPROM with PWBA MCU. Connections of PHD ASSY with PWBA MCU. Connections of SENSOR HUM with PWBA MCU. Connections of LED ASSY ERASE with PWBA MCU. Connections of TRANSFER ASSY with PWBA MCU. 6 HIGH VOLTAGE Connections of PWBA HVPS with PWBA MCU.

7-12

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts
7 DEVELOPER Connections of MOTOR ASSY DISP (Y) with PWBA MCU. Connections of MOTOR ASSY DISP (M) with PWBA MCU. Connections of MOTOR ASSY DISP (C) with PWBA MCU. Connections of MOTOR ASSY DISP (K) with PWBA MCU. Connections of CONNECTOR CRUM (Y) with PWBA MCU. Connections of CONNECTOR CRUM (M) with PWBA MCU. Connections of CONNECTOR CRUM (C) with PWBA MCU. Connections of CONNECTOR CRUM (K) with PWBA MCU. 8 FUSER Connections of FUSER ASSY with PWBA MCU. Connections of FUSER ASSY with PWBA LVPS. Connections of PWBA MCU with PWBA LVPS. 9 CONTROLLER Connections of PWB ESS with PWBA MCU. Connections of CONSOLE ASSY PANEL with PWB ESS. Connections of PWBA LVPS with PWB ESS.

7-13

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts 1 DC POWER SUPPLY

PWBA LVPS PL8.2.1 P/J44 POWER CONTROL 1

HARN ASSY INTERLOCK PL8.2.5

PWBA MCU PL8.2.13

I/L +24VDC

SWITCH PL5.1.9

2 1

P/J291 P/J29 R/H COVER OPEN SG HARN ASSY SIDE SW PL5.1.27

1 2

HARN ASSY LVPS PL9.1.3 P/J501 1 2 3 4 +5VDC SG +3.3VDC SG

+5VDC P/J14 14 13 12 11 +3.3VDC

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 HARN ASSY 24V PL9.1.4 P/J502 1 2

LV TYPE DEEP SLEEP SLEEP 24V ON FAN ON FAN LOW FAN ALARM I/L OPEN

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 INTERLOCK +24VDC

I/L +24VDC SG

P/J15 1 2

P/J503 1 FAN CONTROL 2 3 FAN +24VDC FAN ALARM SG HARN ASSY SW PWR PL8.2.9

FAN MAIN PL8.1.1

P/J48 1 2 3

BREAKER GFI PL8.2.11 LINE NUT P/J483 P/J482 P/J484

4 2

3 1

T484 HARN ASSY GFI GND PL8.2.10

WSB07002KC

7-14

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts

Signal line name LV TYPE DEEP SLEEP SLEEP 24V ON FAN ON FAN LOW FAN ALARM

Description

Control signal of the LVPS

Drive control signal of the SIDE FAN

LVPS overcurrent protection circuit This circuit stops all outputs, if the power supply voltage 24VDC, 5VDC, or 3.3VDC is shorted. LVPS overvoltage protection circuit This circuit stops all outputs, if the power supply voltage 24VDC, 5VDC, or 3.3VDC exceeds the specified voltage respectively. At this time, the operating point is 36VDC or less for 24VDC, 7VDC or less for 5VDC and 3.3VDC. Low Power mode and Sleep mode The output of the following power supply are stopped according to the these signals.

Output Signal Sleep (Low Power mode) Deep sleep (Sleep mode)

+24VDC OFF OFF

+5VDC OFF OFF

+3.3VDC ON OFF

7-15

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts 2 FEEDER, SSI & REGI

PWBA MCU PL8.2.13 P/J23 1 2


+3.3VDC

HARN ASSY L SIDE PL3.1.18 P/J231 I/L +24VDC CST FEED CL ON (L) +24VDC 2 1 1 2 SOLENOID FEED MSI PL3.1.9

3 4 5
+3.3VDC

PULL UP +3.3VDC SG REGI SENSED (L) +3.3VDC

P/J232 3 2 1

REGI SENSOR PL3.2.13

6 7 8
+3.3VDC

PULL UP +3.3VDC SG PAPER EMPTY SENSED (H) +3.3VDC

P/J233 3 2 1

SSI NO PAPER SENSOR PL3.2.13

P/J234 9 10 11 PULL UP +3.3VDC SG PAPER EMPTY SENSED (L) +3.3VDC 3 2 1 CST NO PAPER SENSOR PL3.2.13

INTERLOCK +24VDC

HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL PL9.1.9 P/J26 4 5 I/L +24VDC REGI CL ON (L) +24VDC P/J262 2 1 1 2 CLUTCH ASSY DRV PL3.1.1

WSB07003GA

7-16

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts

Signal line name CST FEED CL ON (L) +24VDC REGI SENSED (L) +3.3VDC PAPER EMPTY SENSED (H) +3.3VDC PAPER EMPTY SENSED (L) +3.3VDC

Description ON/OFF signal of the SOLENOID FEED MSI Paper detect signal of the Regi part by the Sensor Photo (REGI SENSOR) Paper detect signal of the SSI by the Sensor Photo (SSI NO PAPER SENSOR) Paper detect signal of the Paper Cassette by the Sensor Photo (CST NO PAPER SENSOR)

REGI CL ON (L) +24VDC ON/OFF signal of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV

7-17

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts 3 DRIVE

PWBA MCU PL8.2.13

DRIVE ASSY PH PL7.1.4

INTERLOCK +24VDC P/J24 1 2 I/L +24VDC K MODE SOL ON (L) +24VDC

COLOR MODE SWITCHING SOLENOID

+3.3VDC

HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL PL9.1.9

P/J26 1 2 3

PULL UP +3.3VDC SG
K MODE SENSED (L) +3.3VDC

P/J261 3 2 1 COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR

INTERLOCK +24VDC P/J21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 INTERLOCK +24VDC P/J22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

HARN ASSY MAIN MOT PL9.1.7 P/J211 SG I/L +24VDC SG I/L +24VDC SG MAIN MOT ON MAIN MOT ALARM MAIN MOT CLK MAIN MOT LOW MAIN MOT CW/CCW 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 M DRIVE ASSY MAIN PL7.1.2

HARN ASSY SUB MOT PL9.1.8 P/J221 SG I/L +24VDC SG I/L +24VDC SG SUB MOTO ON SUB MOT ALARM SUB MOT CLK SUB MOT LOW SUB MOT BRAKE 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 M DRIVE ASSY SUB PL7.1.1

WSB07004KC

7-18

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts

Signal line name K MODE SOL ON (L) +24VDC K MODE SENSED (L) +3.3VDC MAIN MOT ON MAIN MOT ALARM MAIN MOT CLK MAIN MOT LOW MAIN MOT CW/CCW SUB MOT ON SUB MOT ALARM SUB MOT CLK SUB MOT LOW SUB MOT BRAKE

Description ON/OFF signal of the COLOR MODE SWITCHING SOLENOID Color mode detect signal of the DRIVE ASSY PH by the Sensor Photo (COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR)

Drive control signal of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN

Drive control signal of the DRIVE ASSY SUB

7-19

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts 4 ROS

PWBA MCU PL8.2.13

ROS ASSY PL4.1.1

INTERLOCK +24VDC

HARNESS ASSY ROS RE PL4.1.22 P/J40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ROS MOT ON SG I/L +24VDC ROS MOT CLK SOS LD ERR PCONT SG V REF K V REF C V REF M V REF Y ENB SG +3.3V LD P/J411 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 +5VDC SOS SG 3 2 1 PWBA SOS 1 2 3 4 5 CLK LOCK ROS MOT ON SG +24VDC 5 4 3 2 1 ROS MOT

from Xerography

HARNESS ASSY ROS VIDEO PL4.1.23 P/J41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SG DATA K SG DATA C SG DATA M SG DATA Y P/J412 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

WSB07006KD

7-20

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts

Signal line name ROS MOT ON ROS MOT CLK SOS V REF K V REF C V REF M V REF Y LD ERR PCONT DATA K DATA C DATA M DATA Y

Description Drive control signal of the ROS MOTOR Reference signal for scan start of LASER

Emission control signal of the laser diode

Error signal of the laser diode Power control signal of the laser diode

Video signal of the laser diode

7-21

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts 5 XEROGRAPHIC

PWBA MCU PL8.2.13 P/J42


+3.3VDC

HARN ASSY PHD XPRO PL9.1.11 P/J144 DATA CLOCK +3.3VDC SG 4 3 2 1 PWBA EEPROM PL8.2.16 1 2 3 4

PHD ASSY PL4.1.21 P/J422 5


+3.3VDC

+3.3VLD DATA CLOCK +3.3VDC SG +3.3VLD

6 5 4 3 2 1

EEPROM PHD

6 7 8 9 10

to ROS HARN ASSY HUM PL9.1.6 P/J20


+5VDC

P/J201 TEMP. SG HUMI. +5VDC 4 3 2 1 SENSOR HUM PL8.2.7

1 2 3 4

+3.3VDC

HARN ASSY LVPS PL9.1.3 P/J14 15 16 17 +3.3VDC ERASE Y/M/C ON (L) +3.3VDC ERASE K ON (L) +3.3VDC P/J141 3 2 1 LED ASSY ERASE PL4.1.8

HARN ASSY L SIDE PL3.1.18 P/J28 1 2 3 4 5 +5VDC ADC SENSOR LED REM ADC V MONI SG P/J281 5 1 4 2 3 3 2 4 1 5

TRANSFER ASSY PL6.1.7 P/J2811 5 4 3 2 1 ADC SENSOR

WSB07007KC

7-22

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts

Signal line name CLOCK DATA CLOCK DATA TEMP. HUMI. ERASE K ON (L) +3.3VDC ERASE Y/M/C ON (L) +3.3VDC ADC SENSOR LED REM ADC V MONI

Description Control signal of the PWBA EEPROM Control signal of the EEPROM PHD Temperature data in the printer by the SENSOR HUM (Analog value) Humidity data in the printer by the SENSOR HUM (Analog value) ON/OFF signal of the LED ASSY ERASE Toner patch density data measured by the ADC SENSOR (Analog value) Remote signal of the LED of ADC SENSOR Control signal of the ADC SENSOR

7-23

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts 6 HIGH VOLTAGE

PWBA MCU PL8.2.13

PWBA HVPS PL4.1.19

P/J16 10 +3.0V REF 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 TR MON CF MON HV DO HV LD HV CLK +3.0V REF SG MAIN CLK SG I/L +24V

P/J161 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

E I D H C G B F

BCR BTR

Developer

C
BTR : Bias Transfer Roll BCR : Bias Charge Roll

WSB07008KB

7-24

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts

Signal line name TR MON CF MON HV DO HV LD HV CLK MAIN CLK

Description

Control signal of the HVPS

7-25

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts 7 DEVELOPER

PWBA MCU PL8.2.13 INTERLOCK +24VDC P/J18 1 2 3 INTERLOCK +24VDC 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 INTERLOCK +24VDC P/J19 1 2 3 4 INTERLOCK +24VDC 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Y DISPENSE MOT A Y DISPENSE MOT B I/L +24VDC Y DISPENSE MOT XA Y DISPENSE MOT XB M DISPENSE MOT A M DISPENSE MOT B I/L +24VDC M DISPENSE MOT XA M DISPENSE MOT XB P182 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 HARN ASSY TNR MOT PL5.1.25 P181 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 J182 MOTOR ASSY DISP (M) PL5.1.3 J181 MOTOR ASSY DISP (Y) PL5.1.3

N.C. C DISPENSE MOT A C DISPENSE MOT B I/L +24VDC C DISPENSE MOT XA C DISPENSE MOT XB

P191 5 4 3 2 1 P192 K DISPENSE MOT A K DISPENSE MOT B I/L +24VDC K DISPENSE MOT XA K DISPENSE MOT XB 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

J191 MOTOR ASSY DISP (C) PL5.1.3

J192 MOTOR ASSY DISP (K) PL5.1.3

+3.3VDC

HARN ASSY TONER CRUM P/J31 PL5.1.26 DATA Y IN 1 CLK Y OUT 2 +3.3VDC 3 SG 4 DATA M IN CLK M OUT +3.3VDC SG

P/J311 4 3 2 1 P/J312 4 3 2 1 P/J313 4 3 2 1 P/J314 4 3 2 1 CONNECTOR CRUM (K) PL5.1.14 CONNECTOR CRUM (C) PL5.1.14 CONNECTOR CRUM (M) PL5.1.14 CONNECTOR CRUM (Y) PL5.1.14

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

DATA C IN CLK C OUT +3.3VDC SG DATA K IN CLK K OUT +3.3VDC SG

WSB07009KB

7-26

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts

Signal line name Y DISPENSE MOT A Y DISPENSE MOT B Y DISPENSE MOT XA Y DISPENSE MOT XB M DISPENSE MOT A M DISPENSE MOT B M DISPENSE MOT XA M DISPENSE MOT XB C DISPENSE MOT A C DISPENSE MOT B C DISPENSE MOT XA C DISPENSE MOT XB K DISPENSE MOT A K DISPENSE MOT B K DISPENSE MOT XA K DISPENSE MOT XB DATA Y IN CLK Y OUT DATA M IN CLK M OUT DATA C IN CLK C OUT DATA K IN CLK K OUT

Description

Drive control signal of the MOTOR ASSY DISP (Y)

Drive control signal of the MOTOR ASSY DISP (M)

Drive control signal of the MOTOR ASSY DISP (C)

Drive control signal of the MOTOR ASSY DISP (K)

Control signal of the CONNECTOR CRUM (Y) Control signal of the CONNECTOR CRUM (M) Control signal of the CONNECTOR CRUM (C) Control signal of the CONNECTOR CRUM (K)

7-27

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts 8 FUSER

PWBA MCU PL8.2.13 P/J17 8 7 6

FUSER ASSY PL6.1.1 HARN ASSY FUSER PL6.1.2 VC VD SG P/J171 1 8 2 7 3 6 P/J175 1 3 2 2 3 1 P/J176 5 4 SG STS 4 5 5 4 1 2 2 1 P/J172 1 3 2 2 3 1 P/J173 1 2 3 EXIT SENSOR PWBA LVPS PL8.2.1 STS

NC SNS

+3.3VDC

3 2 1

FUSER EXIT SENSED (L) +3.3VDC SG PULL UP +3.3VDC

6 3 7 2 8 1

P/J14
10 9 xHEAT1 FUSER ON

P/J501
5 6

LAMP CONTROL

P/J171 1 P/J47 3 1 N HEAT1 LINE 2 3

1 2 3

P1711 P1712 P1713

Heater

Thermostat

P/J504 1 2 J5041 1

Used in production 2 process only. 3

RELAY TEST LOW RELAY TEST HIGH

HARN ASSY TEST RL PL5.1.28

230V Spec. P/J171 1 P/J47 3 1 LINE N HEAT1 2 3 2 3

WSB07010GC

7-28

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts

Signal line name VC VD STS FUSER EXIT SENSED (L) +3.3VDC FUSER ON RELAY TEST LOW RELAY TEST HIGH

Description Temperature data measured by Temp. Sensor for controlling temperature (analog value) Heat Roll surface temperature data measured by Temp. Sensor for detecting high temperature (analog value) Paper detect signal of the Fuser Exit by the Sensor Photo (EXIT SENSOR) Lighting signal of Fuser Lamp Test signal of the LVPS (Used in production process only)

7-29

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts 9 CONTROLLER

PWB ESS PL8.1.9 P/J101 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

HARN ASSY ESS PL9.1.1 TEST PRINT SG +3.3VDC DEEP SLEEP SG STS CMD CREADY SREADY SG VSYNC K VSYNC C VSYNC M VSYNC Y SG HSYNC SG

PWBA MCU PL8.2.13 P/J10 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

+3.3VDC

+3.3VDC

HARN ASSY ESS VIDEO PL9.1.2 P/J111 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 P/J11 SG DATA K SG DATA C SG DATA M SG DATA Y 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

+5VDC +3.3VDC

HARN ASSY ESS POWER PL9.1.10 P/J401 1 2 3 4 +5VDC SG +3.3VDC SG P/J40 1 2 3 4

PWBA LVPS PL8.2.1


+5VDC +3.3VDC

HARNESS ASSY B PL9.1.12 P/J29 7


+5VDC

HARNESS ASSY A-OP PL1.1.17 P/J2900 1 7 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SG DATA CLK +5VDC WAKE UP LED ON +3.3VDC P/J220 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CONSOLE ASSY PANEL PL1.1.19


+5VDC

6 5 4 3 2 1

WSB07011GA

7-30

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts

Signal line name TEST PRINT DEEP SLEEP STS CMD CREADY SREADY VSYNC K VSYNC C VSYNC M VSYNC Y HSYNC DATA K DATA C DATA M DATA Y DATA CLK WAKE UP LED ON

Description Control signal for the TEST PRINT mode Control signal for the DEEP SLEEP mode Status signal transmitted fro the PWBA MCU to the PWB ESS Command signal transmitted from the PWB ESS to the PWBA MCU Signal for indicating weather or not the printer is ready for receiving command signal Signal for indicating registration position of each of images Y, M, C and K Signal for data

Video data of four colors

Control signal of the CONSOLE ASSY

7-31

Chapter 7 Wiring Data


7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts

7-32

Chapter 8 Accessories

Chapter 8 Accessories
Table of Contents

Table of Contents
8.1 Network Expansion Card (Optional) .........................................................................8-1
8.1.1 8.1.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 Checking the Package Contents ............................................................................................ 8-1 Installation Procedure............................................................................................................. 8-2 Checking the Package Contents ............................................................................................ 8-5 Installation Procedure............................................................................................................. 8-5 Changing the Accessory Configuration on the Print Driver .................................................... 8-9

8.2 Additional Memory (256MB/512MB) .........................................................................8-5

Chapter 8 Accessories
8.1 Network Expansion Card (Optional)

8.1

Network Expansion Card (Optional)


CAUTION
Before plugging or unplugging the interface cable connector, be sure to switch off the printer or unplug the power cord from the power outlet. Plugging or unplugging the connector when the printer is on can cause printer failure. If installing the network expansion card to the printer when the printer is used in a network environment, the entire network-related settings on the printer will be initialized to the defaults. Before installing the network expansion card, we suggest you to record the current settings by printing out the [Printer Settings] list. Refer to the User Guide on how to print the [Printer Settings] list..

8.1.1

Checking the Package Contents


The packaging box contains the following items. If you find any items missing, please contact our Customer Support Center or your dealers. Network expansion card 2 screws

Installation guide

8-1

Chapter 8 Accessories
8.1 Network Expansion Card (Optional) 8.1.2 Installation Procedure
The network expansion card goes into the controller board right above additional memory (optional). If you purchased additional memory, install it before installing the network expansion card. For information on how to install additional memory to the printer, refer to the User Guide.

Network expansion card

Additional memory

Follow these steps when installing the network expansion card to the printer.

1.

Switch the power off by pressing the power switch located on the left side of the printer to the <O> position. Unplug the power cord from the power outlet and the printer.

2.

Loosen the screw on the rear cover of the printer and open the cover.

3.

Remove the rear cover from the printer by pulling out the bottom tab of the cover from the slot, tilting the cover, and pulling out the top tab of the cover from the slot.

8-2

Chapter 8 Accessories
8.1 Network Expansion Card (Optional)

4.

Remove the black plastic part (used for the wireless LAN) from the network expansion card.
Important Remove the black plastic part from the network expansion card before installing the card to the printer. Otherwise, the rear cover cannot be closed. The black plastic part cannot be removed after the network expansion card is installed to the printer. Make sure to remove the part in this step.

5.

Align the connector of the network expansion card with the card connector on the printer and insert the card into the connector. Use the following procedure since the opening on the printer is narrow. 1) Insert the left side of the card at an angle into the opening on the printer. 2) Insert the right side of the card into the opening and align the connector of the network expansion card with the card connector on the printer. 3) Push the network expansion card by the part shown in the figure and firmly insert it into the connector.

6.

Check the following to ensure that the connector of the network expansion card is inserted correctly. - There is no gap between the connector of the network expansion card and the card connector on the printer. - The two screw holes on the network expansion card are perfectly aligned with the holes on the printer.

8-3

Chapter 8 Accessories
8.1 Network Expansion Card (Optional)

7.

Secure the network expansion card onto the controller board by tightening the two screws (supplied) from the outside of the printer.

8.

Re-attach the rear cover on the printer by inserting the top tab and then bottom one of the cover into the slots. Then, close the rear cover and tighten the screw loosened in Step 2.

9.

Plug in the power cord and switch the power on by pressing the power switch to the <|> position.

The installation is now complete.

NOTE

You can check whether the network expansion card has been installed correctly by printing out the [Printer Settings] list. Refer to the User Guide on how to print the [Printer Settings] list.

8-4

Chapter 8 Accessories
8.2 Additional Memory (256MB/512MB)

8.2

Additional Memory (256MB/512MB)


In case of the following situations, install additional memory to the printer. - When the [Out of Memory] message appears frequently on the control panel - When using the Secure/Sample Print feature - When using the electronic sort function Additional memory may be required also when printing large data such as complex graphics.

NOTE

For more information about additional memory and how to order it, refer to "A.2 Optional Accessories" (User Guide P. 182).

8.2.1

Checking the Package Contents


The packaging box contains the following items. If you find any items missing, please contact our Customer Support Center or your dealers. Memory card

8.2.2

Installation Procedure
Additional memory goes into the controller board right underneath a network expansion card (optional). If your printer is the DocuPrint 1110 with a network expansion card installed, remove the network expansion card to get an access to the RAM slot. For information on how to uninstall/reinstall the network expansion card, refer to the installation guide included with the printer.

Network expansion card

Additional memory

The following describes how to install additional memory to the printer. The printer has one slot for installing a memory card. If you want to add memory when the slot already has a memory card, replace the memory card with the one with larger capacity.

CAUTION

Before plugging or unplugging the interface cable connector, be sure to switch off the printer or unplug the power cord from the power outlet. Plugging or unplugging the connector when the printer is on can cause printer failure.

8-5

Chapter 8 Accessories
8.2 Additional Memory (256MB/512MB)

1.

Switch the power off by pressing the power switch located on the left side of the printer to the <O> position. Unplug the power cord from the power outlet and the printer.

2.

Loosen the screw on the rear cover of the printer and open the cover.

3.

Remove the rear cover from the printer by pulling out the bottom tab of the cover from the slot, tilting the cover, and pulling out the top tab of the cover from the slot.

4. 5.

If a network expansion card is installed, remove it temporarily. If another memory card is already installed, push the retaining clips on both ends in the outward direction. After the memory card pops up, pull it out at an angle.

8-6

Chapter 8 Accessories
8.2 Additional Memory (256MB/512MB)

6.

Hold the new memory card so that the notch on the card comes below the center of the card.

7.

Use the following steps to install the memory card to the printer.

1)

Align the notch on the new memory card with the projection on the RAM slot, and insert the memory card at an angle into the slot.
Important Make sure to insert the memory card securely until the terminal area cannot be seen.

2)

Check the following points to ensure that the memory card is inserted correctly. - The terminal area of the memory card cannot be seen. - The memory card is not inserted at an angle.

8-7

Chapter 8 Accessories
8.2 Additional Memory (256MB/512MB)

3)

Push the new memory card by the part shown in the figure. When the card is installed correctly, it clicks into place.

8. 9.

If the network expansion card was removed, reinstall it to the printer. Re-attach the rear cover on the printer by inserting the top tab and then bottom one of the cover into the slots. Then, close the rear cover and tighten the screw loosened in Step 2.

10. Plug in the power cord and switch on the power by pressing the power switch to the <|> position. The installation is now complete.

NOTE

You can check whether the memory card is installed correctly by printing out the [Printer Settings] list. [Memory Capacity] under [General] shows the total memory capacity of the printer (which is the memory on the controller board (128 MB) plus the memory you just added). For information on how to print the [Printer Settings] list, refer to " Printing a Report/List" (User Guide P. 138).

8-8

Chapter 8 Accessories
8.2 Additional Memory (256MB/512MB) 8.2.3 Changing the Accessory Configuration on the Print Driver
If you are finished installing additional memory to the printer, change the accessory configuration. This can be done on the [Options] tab on your print driver. The following procedure use the PCL print driver as an example. 1. On the Windows [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes]. Select to highlight the printer, and select [Properties] from the [File] menu. The Properties dialog box appears. In the dialog box, click the [Options] tab. Select [Memory Capacity] from [Items], and then select the total memory capacity of the printer from [Memory Capacity].

2. 3.

4.

Select [RAM Disk] from [Items], and then select [Available] from [RAM Disk].

5.

Click [OK] to close the Properties dialog box.

8-9

Chapter 8 Accessories
8.2 Additional Memory (256MB/512MB)

8-10

Chapter 10 Machine Overview

CONTENTS
10.1 Printing Process .....................................................................................................10-1
10.1.1 Summary of Printing Process ..................................................................................................... 10-1 10.1.2 Schematic Diagram for Printing Processes ................................................................................ 10-2 10.1.3 Description of Printing Process Techniques ............................................................................... 10-3 10.1.3.1 Charging with electricity ...................................................................................................... 10-3 10.1.3.2 Exposure............................................................................................................................. 10-4 10.1.3.3 Development....................................................................................................................... 10-6 10.1.3.4 Transfer (Drum -> Paper) ................................................................................................... 10-8 10.1.3.5 Cleaning............................................................................................................................ 10-10 10.1.3.6 Excess Toner Collecting ................................................................................................... 10-11 10.1.3.7 Fusing ............................................................................................................................... 10-12

10.2 Paper Path............................................................................................................10-13


10.2.1 Paper Path ................................................................................................................................ 10-13 10.2.2 Layout of Paper Path ................................................................................................................ 10-14

10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components .........................................................10-15


10.3.1 Paper Cassette ......................................................................................................................... 10-15 10.3.1.1 Major functions.................................................................................................................. 10-15 10.3.1.2 Reference diagram ........................................................................................................... 10-16 10.3.1.3 Multiple Sheet Feed Prevention........................................................................................ 10-17 10.3.1.4 Reference diagram ........................................................................................................... 10-17 10.3.2 Paper Feeder ............................................................................................................................ 10-18 10.3.2.1 Major functions.................................................................................................................. 10-18 10.3.2.2 Reference diagram ........................................................................................................... 10-19 10.3.3 SSI & Regi Assy........................................................................................................................ 10-20 10.3.3.1 Major functions.................................................................................................................. 10-20 10.3.3.2 Reference diagram ........................................................................................................... 10-21 10.3.3.3 Lead-edge Registration..................................................................................................... 10-22 10.3.3.4 Reference diagram ........................................................................................................... 10-22 10.3.3.5 Paper detection by the Regi Sensor ................................................................................. 10-23 10.3.4 Transfer Belt & Fuser................................................................................................................ 10-24 10.3.4.1 Major functions.................................................................................................................. 10-24 10.3.4.2 Reference diagram ........................................................................................................... 10-25 10.3.5 ROS ASSY................................................................................................................................ 10-26 10.3.5.1 Major functions.................................................................................................................. 10-26 10.3.5.2 Reference diagram ........................................................................................................... 10-27 10.3.6 TONER CARTRIDGE & DISPENSER ...................................................................................... 10-28 10.3.6.1 Major functions.................................................................................................................. 10-28 10.3.6.2 Reference diagram ........................................................................................................... 10-28 10.3.7 PHD ASSY................................................................................................................................ 10-29 10.3.7.1 Major functions.................................................................................................................. 10-29 10.3.7.2 Reference diagram ........................................................................................................... 10-30 10.3.8 Drive.......................................................................................................................................... 10-31 10.3.8.1 Major functions.................................................................................................................. 10-31 10.3.8.2 Reference diagram ........................................................................................................... 10-33 10.3.9 Electrical ................................................................................................................................... 10-34

10.3.9.1 Major functions.................................................................................................................. 10-34 10.3.9.2 Reference diagram ........................................................................................................... 10-36 10.3.9.3 Data Flow.......................................................................................................................... 10-37

10.4 MODES ................................................................................................................10-38


10.4.1 Operation Modes ...................................................................................................................... 10-38

10.5 Control ..................................................................................................................10-39


10.5.1 Control of Paper Size................................................................................................................ 10-39 10.5.2 ROS Light Quantity Control ...................................................................................................... 10-39 10.5.3 Process Control ........................................................................................................................ 10-40 10.5.3.1 Potential Control ............................................................................................................... 10-40 10.5.3.2 Toner Density Control ....................................................................................................... 10-41 10.5.3.3 High Area Coverage Mode ............................................................................................... 10-42 10.5.3.4 Admix Mode ...................................................................................................................... 10-42 10.5.3.5 LED Light Quantity Control of AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR.................. 10-43 10.5.4 Color Registration Control......................................................................................................... 10-44 10.5.5 Fuser Control ............................................................................................................................ 10-45 10.5.5.1 Fuser temperature control................................................................................................. 10-45 10.5.5.2 Cooling down .................................................................................................................... 10-45 10.5.5.3 Sensor Warm-up............................................................................................................... 10-45

10.6 Drive Transmission Route ....................................................................................10-46


10.6.1 DRIVE ASSY MAIN .................................................................................................................. 10-46 10.6.2 DRIVE ASSY MAIN and DRIVE ASSY SUB DRIVE ................................................................ 10-49 10.6.3 TONER DISPENSER (Y, M, C, K)............................................................................................ 10-54 10.6.4 DRIVE ASSY SUB .................................................................................................................... 10-56

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.1 Printing Process

10.1 Printing Process


10.1.1 Summary of Printing Process
This printer is a "Full-color laser printer" which applies the principle of an electrophotographic recording system. The tandem system comprising the four color PHD ASSY of yellow, magenta, cyan and black (Y, M, C and K) creates the toner image. Printing processes of this printer is composed of the basic steps as follows. (1) Charge: ........................ Drum surface is charged with electricity. (2) Exposure: .................... Image unit is exposed to laser beams. (3) Development:.............. Image is developed with toner. (4) Transfer: ...................... Four-color finished toner image on the Drum is transferred onto the paper. (5) Cleaning: ..................... Remaining toner on the drum is collected. (6) Fusing:......................... Toner on the paper is fixed by heat and pressure. (7) Cleaning: ..................... Remaining toner on the belt is collected.

PHD ASSY

Wsb10001FA

10-1

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.1 Printing Process

10.1.2 Schematic Diagram for Printing Processes


Outline of printing processes is shown in the figure below.

: Laser beam PHD ASSY [(1) Charge] [(3) Development] [(4) Transfer] [(5) Cleaning] : Paper transfer

ROS [(2) Exposure]

FUSER [(6) Fusing]

TRANSFER BELT [(4) Transfer] [(7) Cleaning]

Wsb10002FA

10-2

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.1 Printing Process

10.1.3 Description of Printing Process Techniques


10.1.3.1 Charging with electricity
In the charging process, the drum surface rotating at a constant speed is charged uniformly with negative electricity by the discharge from BCR (Bias Charge Roll). This process is performed in parallel for yellow, magenta, cyan and black colors. The BCR is kept in contact with the drum and rotates following the rotations of the drum. BCR is a conductive roll, receives discharge voltage from the High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) and discharges a negative DC voltage. The drum surface is uniformly and negatively charged with DC bias voltage. The drum surface is a photoreceptor (which is an insulator in the dark and a conductor in the light) and the drum inside is composed of a conductor. The Cleaning Roll is a sponge, which contacts with the BCR to catch the toner.

Wsb06003KA

engine principle0005FA

engine principle0006FA

10-3

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.1 Printing Process 10.1.3.2 Exposure
In the exposure process, the drum surface charged negatively is scanned by laser beams to form invisible electrostatic latent image on the drum surface. This process is performed in parallel for yellow, magenta, cyan and black colors. Laser beams are emitted from the laser diode in the ROS ASSY. By the rotating polygon mirror, fixed mirror and lens attached to the Scanner Motor Assy of the ROS ASSY, the surface of each color drum is scanned from end to end in the axial direction.
: Laser beams (K) : Laser beams (C) : Laser beams (M) : Laser beams (Y) Mirror Mirror Mirror

Drum (K) Lens

Polygon Mirror

Mirror Drum (C) Lens

Mirror Drum (M) Mirror Lens

Lens Mirror Drum (Y)

Mirror

Lens

Mirror

Wsb06004KA

10-4

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.1 Printing Process
The laser beam is irradiated according to the printing data (image data) output from the printer controller. The laser beam is output only when printing data is pixels (micro points composing characters or pictures). (The laser diode lights up for parts to be developed by toner, and not for parts that are not to be developed.) The drum surface irradiated by the laser beam becomes a conductor, and the negative charge on the drum surface flows to the positive side and the charges cancel each other out so that the potential on the drum surface drops. The part on the surface where potential drops becomes the electrostatic latent image.

10-5

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.1 Printing Process 10.1.3.3 Development
In the development process, toner is electrically attached to the invisible electrostatic latent image on the drum surface to form visible toner image on the drum. This process is performed in parallel for yellow, magenta, cyan and black color independently. The toner in the toner cartridge is agitated by the built-in Agitator and fed into the developer. The Auger is driven by the toner motor.The amount of toner to be consumed according to the print count is calculated and that amount is fed into the developer. This is called "toner dispensation", which is controlled by two types of control, "PCDC" and "ADC". (Refer to 10.5.3.2 Toner Density Control) The toner fed into the developer and the carrier in the developer are agitated by the Auger, and supplied to the Magnet Roll arranged in the vicinity of the drum surface. The toner and carrier are charged by friction due to the agitation (toner in negative, carrier in positive), and they are attracted to one another electrically. As the carrier is a magnetic substance, it is attracted to the Magnet Roll having a magnetic force and a homogeneous layer is formed by the Trimmer Rod. The magnet roll is covered by a thin semi-conductive sleeve over the surface. DB (Developing Bias) voltage is supplied to this semiconductor sleeve from the High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS). DB voltage is negative DC voltage combined with AC voltage. The magnet roll is kept at a constant negative voltage against the photoreceptor layer of the drum by DC voltage. Therefore, at the area surface where the negative electric charge on the drum does not decrease, potential is lower than the magnet roll, while the potential is higher than the magnet roll at the area where the negative charge on the drum surface decreases. The AC voltage shakes the developer on the magnet roll surface Stimulating the toner to fly to the drum. Thus, the toner charged negatively is attracted only to the drum surface area where the negative charge has decreased below that of the magnet roll (electrostatic latent image) and the toner image is formed on the drum. Once the toner is adhered on the drum, the negative charge of the toner-bearing portion increases, which decreases the potential and the toner-attracting force of that portion.

10-6

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.1 Printing Process

Toner Cartridge Agitator

: Negative electric charge : Positive electric charge : Toner : Carrier

Paddle Trimmer Rod

Drum

Auger Magnet Roll HVPS

Auger

Wsb06005KA

engine principle0013FA
engine principle0014FA

10-7

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.1 Printing Process 10.1.3.4 Transfer (Drum -> Paper)
In the transfer process, toner image formed on the drum surface is transferred onto the surface of the paper. The toner is transferred onto the paper in the order of Y, M, C, and K. BTR The BTR (Bias Transfer Roll) is a conductive roll, to which the positive voltage is applied from the High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS). The BTR contacts the rear side of the Belt and applies the positive voltage to the Belt. Belt The Belt is a conductive belt, to which the positive voltage is applied from the BTR. After the negatively charged toner image on the drum surface is drawn by the positive charge on the belt, it is transferred from the drum to the paper. The Belt feeds the paper to the direction of FUSER.
Paper

: Negative electric charge : Positive electric charge : Toner

Drum (K)

BTR

Drum surface

Drum (C)

BTR

Drum (M)

BTR

BTR

Drum (Y)

HVPS Transfer Belt

Wsb06007KA

10-8

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.1 Printing Process

Kmy06007KA

10-9

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.1 Printing Process 10.1.3.5 Cleaning
In the cleaning process, excess toner is removed from the drum surfaces, while excess charge is also eliminated from the drum surface. Drum cleaning The cleaning blade contacts the surface of the drum collecting the excess toner by scraping. Cleaning Roll The Cleaning Roll contacts the surface of the BCR collecting the foreign matter. Charge cleaning When the drum is charged by BCR, any excess charge hinders the drum surface from being uniformly charged, which may lead to print quality problems. The excess charge on the surface of the drum is eliminated by irradiating the light of the Erase Lamp (LED ASSEMBLY).

Wsb06008KA

10-10

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.1 Printing Process 10.1.3.6 Excess Toner Collecting
(1) The excess toner is collected by the cleaner blade contacting the drum, and then carried to the AUGER CLNG SIDE by the Auger. (2) The toner is carried by the AUGER CLNG SIDE to the joint to the collection box in the toner cartridge. (3) The toner then falls into the collection box in the toner cartridge.

AUGER CLNG SIDE Collection Box Toner Cartridge 2) 1) 3) Auger Cleaner Blade

Wsb06006KA

10-11

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.1 Printing Process 10.1.3.7 Fusing
In the fusing process, toner is fixed on the paper by heat and pressure. Since the finished toner image transferred from the belt can be easily broken by a finger touch, the toner image must be fixed on the paper with the FUSER (fusing unit). The toner particles are melted by the HEAT ROLL heated by the Heater lamp and is deposited on the paper under pressure given by the belt opposed against the heat roll.

Table 10-1 Conditions to be met to light up the Heater Lamp Warm up Main Heater Lamp ON Stand by ON/OFF Printing ON

Spring Nip Paper

Nip Head

Felt

Belt

Frame Belt

Fixed toner

Heat Roll Heater Lamp Not fixed toner Sheet Wsb06009KA

10-12

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.2 Paper Path

10.2 Paper Path


10.2.1 Paper Path

Wsb06010KA

10-13

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.2 Paper Path

10.2.2 Layout of Paper Path

: Laser beam : Paper transfer : Paper sensors Exit roll [Fuser] Exit Sensor [Fuser] Heat roll [Fuser] Pressure belt [Fuser]

Belt [Transfer Belt]

Regi roll (rubber) [Regi Assembly] Regi roll (metal) [Regi Assembly] SSI No Paper Sensor [Regi Assembly]

Regi Sensor [Regi Assembly] Retard roller [Tray 1] Feed roll [Feeder Assy V] Tray No Paper Sensor [Feeder Assy V] Wsb10011FA

10-14

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components

10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components


Major functional components of the printer are described below with illustrations. These components are classified into the following blocks based on the configuration of the printer. Paper Cassette Paper Feeder SSI & Regi Assy Transfer Belt & Fuser ROS ASSY TONER CARTRIDGE & Dispenser PHD ASSY Drive Electrical

10.3.1 Paper Cassette


10.3.1.1 Major functions
SIDE GUIDE(R/L) The SIDE GUIDE(R/L) can move at a right angle to the paper transfer direction to align the paper width. END GUIDE The END GUIDE can move in the paper transfer direction to determine the paper size. RETARD ROLLER The RETARD ROLLER and the FEED ROLLER pinch the paper to prevent multiple sheet feed. BOTTOM PLATE BOTTOM PLATE is locked to the bottom side when paper cassette is pulled out from the paper feeder and unlocked when paper cassette is installed to the paper feeder. Pushes the paper against the feed roll using a spring tension.

10-15

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components 10.3.1.2 Reference diagram
Bottom Plate

End Guide

Side Guide (L)

Side Guide (R)

Retard Roller Wsb10012FA

10-16

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components 10.3.1.3 Multiple Sheet Feed Prevention
The sheets set in a tray or cassette are occasionally stuck together along the edges. The stuck sheets cause a multiple sheet feed or a jam. The sheets are fed by the Feed Roll to a position between the Feed Roll and the Retard Roll. Normally, when only one sheet is fed, both the Feed Roll and Retard Roll rotate to allow the sheet to pass. However, when two sheets are fed concurrently, only the Feed Roll rotates and the Retard Roll is locked thereby allowing the upper sheet to pass by being separated from the lower sheet that is stopped by the friction with the Retard Roll at rest. The Retard Roll is being pushed toward the Feed Roll by spring pressure, and controlled by the torque limiter (Clutch Assy Friction) with which it is coupled.

10.3.1.4 Reference diagram


Feed Roller

Retard Roller

Clutch Assy Friction

Retard Roller

Wsb10013FA

10-17

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components

10.3.2 Paper Feeder


10.3.2.1 Major functions
SENSOR PHOTO (No Paper Sensor) Detects the presence/absence of paper in the paper tray based on the position of ACTUATOR NO PAPER. (No paper: Sensor beam is intercepted)
SENSOR PHOTO (Tray No Paper Sensor) SENSOR PHOTO (Tray No Paper Sensor)

Paper Bottom Plate

ACTUATOR NO PAPER (No Paper Position)

ACTUATOR NO PAPER

Wsb06014KA

SOLENOID ASSY FEED Transmits the drive from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN to FEED ROLLER. (Refer to 10.6.4 DRIVE ASSY SUB) FEED ROLLER When the SOLENOID ASSY FEED operates, the FEED ROLLER starts rotating and the FEED ROLLER feeds the paper. (Refer to 10.6.4 DRIVE ASSY SUB)

DRIVE ASSY MAIN

DRIVE ASSY PH

FEED ROLLER

SOLENOID ASSY FEED Wsb06015KA

10-18

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components 10.3.2.2 Reference diagram

FEED ROLLER SENSOR PHOTO (Tray No Paper Sensor) SOLENOID ASSY FEED Wsb06016GA

10-19

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components

10.3.3 SSI & Regi Assy


10.3.3.1 Major functions
SENSOR PHOTO (SSI No Paper Sensor) Detects presence/absence of paper in the SSI tray by the change in actuator position. SSI No Paper Sensor Upon detecting the sheet, the Regi Roll rotates for a predetermined duration to feed the sheet. The sheet is fixed between the Rolls so that it may not fall from the SSI. The Rolls stop immediately when the Regi Sensor detects the presence of paper.

SENSOR PHOTO (SSI No Paper Sensor)

SENSOR PHOTO (SSI No Paper Sensor) ACTUATOR SSI

Paper Regi Roll Regi Roll

ACTUATOR SSI (No Paper Position)

Wsb06017GA

SENSOR PHOTO (Regi Sensor) It detects when the paper front end reaches the CHUTE ASSY FDR REGI. When the paper feeds from the SSI, Regi Sensor is measuring the paper length (size). The ON time of Regi Sensor is converted into the paper length. ON: The paper activates the actuator. Regi Clutch CLUTCH ASSY REGI transmits the driving power from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN to ROLL ASSY REGI, and transports the paper from the tray and SSI toward the PHD ASSY direction. The timing of sheet feed from the Regi Assy is adjusted by the duration of the Regi Clutch operation so that the toner image on the drum can be transferred to the appropriate position on the sheet. (Refer to 10.6.4 DRIVE ASSY SUB)

10-20

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components 10.3.3.2 Reference diagram

Rear view illustration ACTUATOR REGI ROLL ACTUATOR REGI OUT

SPRING REGI OUT

SENSOR PHOTO (Regi Sensor) ACTUATOR REGI IN SPRING ACT REGI

ROLL REGI METAL

REGI CLUTCH

SENSOR PHOTO (Regi Sensor) ROLL ASSY REGI(Rubber) Wsb06018GA

10-21

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components 10.3.3.3 Lead-edge Registration
When a sheet is fed from the Tray to the toner transfer position, the registration of the sheet may not be correctly maintained due to such troubles as misalignment of lead edges in the Tray.To avoid this trouble, the lead edge position needs to be aligned at the Regi part before the sheet is fed to the toner transfer position. By thrusting the edge of the sheet coming out of the Tray against the Regi Roll that is at rest, the lead edge of the sheet is registered.

10.3.3.4 Reference diagram

REGI ROLL

Wsb06019KA

REGI ROLL

SKEWED PAPER

Wsb06020KA

10-22

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components 10.3.3.5 Paper detection by the Regi Sensor
Since the paper path from the SSI to the Regi Sensor and that from the Paper Tray to the Regi Sensor are different, the Regi Sensor is provided with the ACTUATOR REGI IN and the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL. The ACTUATOR REGI ROLL detects the sheet from the SSI and detects the tail edge of the paper from the paper tray. The ACTUATOR REGI IN detects the lead edge of the paper from the paper tray. However, the movement of ACTUATOR REGI IN does not affect that of ACTUATOR REGI ROLL.

Rear view illustration ACTUATOR REGI ROLL ACTUATOR REGI OUT

SPRING REGI OUT

SENSOR PHOTO (Regi Sensor) ACTUATOR REGI IN SPRING ACT REGI

SENSOR PHOTO (Regi Sensor)

Normal Position SENSOR PHOTO (Regi Sensor) ACTUATOR REGI ROLL

From Paper Tray ACTUATOR REGI IN

ACTUATOR REGI IN

SENSOR PHOTO (Regi Sensor) PAPER

Detection of paper (Tail Edge) PAPER ACTUATOR REGI ROLL

From SSI ACTUATOR REGI ROLL SENSOR PHOTO (Regi Sensor)

PAPER SENSOR PHOTO (Regi Sensor)

ACTUATOR REGI IN

ACTUATOR REGI IN Wsb06041KA

10-23

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components

10.3.4 Transfer Belt & Fuser


10.3.4.1 Major functions
TRANSFER BELT Belt Belt feeds the paper to the direction of FUSER. Sensor ADC Sensor ADC reads the toner patch on the BELT, and converts it to voltage value. Voltage value is used to control the density of toner. (Refer to 10.5.3.1 Potential Control) FUSER The FUSER fixes toner which was transferred onto the paper but not fixed by the heat and pressure and feeds paper before and after being fixed. The FUSER mainly consists of the following parts: Heat Roll Heater Lamp Thermostat Temp. Sensor Exit Sensor Detects passage of print after fixed based on the change of position of the actuator. Pressure Belt Roll Assy Exit Exit Sensor

10-24

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components 10.3.4.2 Reference diagram

Rear view illustration PRESSURE BELT SENSOR PHOTO (Exit Sensor)

HEAT ROLL

THERMOSTAT TEMP. SENSOR (Un-contacting type) TEMP. SENSOR (Contacted type) ROLL ASSY EXIT FUSER

HEATER LAMP

SENSOR ADC

BLADE ASSY

TRANSFER BELT BELT Wsb06021GA

10-25

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components

10.3.5 ROS ASSY


10.3.5.1 Major functions
ROS ASSY ROS ASSY is an exposure unit that generates laser beams to form electrostatic latent image on the drum surface. In this manual, the ROS ASSY is referred to as ROS. The ROS mainly consists of the following parts: LD PWB Scanner ASSY SOS PWB Lens Mirror Window LD PWB The LD PWB is comprised of four LDs (laser diodes) corresponding to Y, M, C, and K. Each LD converts the electric signals of incoming image data into laser wave or pulse. In order to stabilize the laser light quantity during formation of an electrostatic latent image, the LD PWB always monitors the laser light quantity to adjust it to the appropriate level. This is called "APC (auto power control)". Scanner Assy The Scanner Assy is comprised of the Scanner Motor that rotates at a constant speed and the Polygon Mirror that is mounted on the motor shaft. The laser light output from the LD is irradiated onto the Polygon Mirror via the Mirror. The Polygon Mirror, provided with six reflecting mirror faces, changes the reflection angle of the laser light as it rotates by the Scanner Motor, thereby allowing the laser light to scan the drum along its axial direction. Scanning is performed using one reflecting mirror face for each line. SOS PWB The SOS sensor on the SOS (start of scan) PWB converts an incoming laser beam, upon detection, to an electric signal as the reference signal for starting scanning and transmits this signal to the PWBA MCU. The SOS sensor signals are used to synchronize the starting point of the laser-beam scanning with the starting point of the image writing. Lens Mirror Window The laser light reflected from the Polygon Mirror reaches the drum surface via the Lens, Mirror, and Window. The Lens corrects aberration, the Mirror secures an optical path, and the Window prevents foreign matters from entering the ROS.

10-26

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components 10.3.5.2 Reference diagram

Rear view illustration Polygon Mirror Scanner Assy Mirror

Mirror

LD PWB

Lens Mirror SOS PWB SOS Sensor

Mirror Lens

ROS

Window

Wsb06022GA

10-27

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components

10.3.6 TONER CARTRIDGE & DISPENSER


10.3.6.1 Major functions
CONNECTOR CRUM (CRUM Sensor) The CONNECTOR CRUM reads and writes the data of the CRUM. (CRUM : Customer Replaceable Unit Memory) Printer specific information is stored. DISPENSE MOTOR (Y/M/C/K) The dispense motor supplies the drive to the Agitator and Auger in the TONER CARTRIDGE, and supplies toner to the developer.

10.3.6.2 Reference diagram

DISPENSE MOTOR (K)

TONER CARTRIDGE (K) CONNECTOR CRUM (K) TONER CARTRIDGE (C) CONNECTOR CRUM (C)

DISPENSE MOTOR (C)

DISPENSE MOTOR (M)

DISPENSE MOTOR (Y) TONER CARTRIDGE (M) CONNECTOR CRUM (M) TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) CONNECTOR CRUM (Y)

Wsb06023GA

10-28

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components

10.3.7 PHD ASSY


10.3.7.1 Major functions
PHD ASSY PHD ASSY carries out a series of operation in the print process such as charging, and transfer. PHD ASSY mainly consists of the following parts. Developer is an equipment which develops images in the print process. Drum (Y) Drum (M) Drum (C) Drum (K) CRUM PHD specific information is stored. Erase Lamp (LED ASSEMBLY) The light of the LED is reflected by the HOLDER ASSY ERASE. The light of the LED eliminates the charge on the drum. Developer (Y) Developer (M) Developer (C) Developer (K)

PHD ASSY

HOLDER ASSY ERASE

ERASE LAMP

DRUM

LED ASSEMBLY Wsb10024FA

10-29

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components 10.3.7.2 Reference diagram

Rear view illustration

CRUM

Developer (K)

Developer (C)

Developer (M)

Developer (Y)

PHD ASSY

Drum (K)

Drum (C)

Drum (M)

Drum (Y)

LED ASSEMBLY Wsb10025FA

10-30

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components

10.3.8 Drive
10.3.8.1 Major functions
DRIVE ASSY MAIN Supplies the drive to parts as follows. (Refer to 10.6.1 DRIVE ASSY MAIN) (C/M/Y/K) Drum Transfer Belt Regi Feeder DRIVE ASSY SUB Supplies the drive to parts as follows. Fuser Developer (C/M/Y/K)

10-31

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components
DRIVE ASSY PH DRIVE ASSY PH transmits the driving force from the DRIV ASSY SUB to relevant parts. The transmission channel is changed by the COLOR MODE SWITCHING SOLENOID in the DRIVE ASSY PH to allow the driving force of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN to reach the Black Developer only. This is performed to ensure that the Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan Developers cannot be rotated by the DRIVE ASSY SUB during B/W printing. The COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR detects the status of the transmission route (whether it is set for B/W or full color).

[ FULL COLOR MODE ] CAM C GEAR D3 OUT Drive to Developer (Y, M, C) GEAR D3 IN [ BLACK and WHITE MODE ] CAM C GEAR D3 OUT DRIVE ASSY PH

Drive from Sub Motor

GEAR D3 IN

Drive from Sub Motor

[ FULL COLOR MODE ] COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR CAM C GEAR C

[ BLACK and WHITE MODE ] COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR CAM C GEAR C

COLOR MODE SWITCHING SOLENOID

COLOR MODE SWITCHING SOLENOID Wsb06026KA

10-32

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components 10.3.8.2 Reference diagram

DRIVE ASSY SUB

DRIVE ASSY MAIN

DRIVE ASSY PH

Wsb06027GA

10-33

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components

10.3.9 Electrical
10.3.9.1 Major functions
FAN Disspates heat out of the printer to prevent the printer from overheating. SWITCH The SWITCH turns ON/OFF the AC power supply of the printer. Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS) The LVPS is provided in two types, 120V and 240V. Supplies AC power from the power source to the FUSER heater and generates and supplies stable low voltage DC power used for the logic circuit, etc. LVPS contains control circuit for the heater of the FUSER, in addition to the power circuit. Machine Control Unit (MCU) Controls printing operation based on the communication with the print controller and information from the sensor/ switch. Major functions are as follows: Communication with the ESS. Receive of information from the sensors or switches. Control of Motor in DRIVE ASSY MAIN and DRIVE ASSY SUB. Distributing low voltage DC power output from LVPS to each component Control of ROS High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) Supplies high voltage to the following parts in the Transfer Belt and Developer to perform charging, development, and primary transfer. BCR BTR Developer PWBA EEPROM Information unique to the printer is stored. Electronic Sub System (ESS) The ESS connected to the MCU controls the entire system (Diagnostic, Interface and Image processing). HUMIDITY SENSOR HUMIDITY SENSOR reads the temperature/humidity within the printer and converts the values to voltage values.

10-34

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components
OPERATOR PANEL OPERATOR PANEL displays the state of the printer using LED. INTERLOCK SWITCH INTERLOCK SWITCH is a switch that cuts the +24VDC power supply to the HVPS or Motor, etc. upon the opening of the Front Cover. Network Adaptor A adaptor for enabling the network connectivity of the printer. Connecting the network cable without inserting Network Adaptor does not connect the printer to the network. SIDE COVER SWITCH SIDE COVER SW is a switch that detects the right side cover open. BREAKER GFI Opens the circuit upon detecting any voltage or current or leakage current that exceeds the rating of the AC power supply.

10-35

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components 10.3.9.2 Reference diagram

OPERATOR PANEL SIDE COVER SWITCH INTERLOCK SWITCH

PWBA LVPS FAN

PWBA EEPROM

PWBA ESS PWBA MCU

SENSOR HUM MULTI PROTOCOL CARD BREAKER GFI PWBA HVPS POWER SWITCH Wsb06028GA

10-36

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components 10.3.9.3 Data Flow
Print data (electric signal) from the printer controller flows as shown below until it is turned into a print.

Wsb06042KA

10-37

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.4 MODES

10.4 MODES
10.4.1 Operation Modes
For the operation of the printer, the following four modes are provided. READY mode The printer is ready for printing. PRINTING mode The printer is under printing. Low Power mode The printer is under power saving. Sleep mode The printer is under power saving.

10-38

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.5 Control

10.5 Control
10.5.1 Control of Paper Size
The printer doesn't have switches for detecting paper size, and only length of paper is detected by the Regi Sensor when feeding paper. If printing data and paper size don't match, error is sent to the ESS.

10.5.2 ROS Light Quantity Control


The image data are entered to the laser diodes in the ROS as electric signals (data are expressed with high and low voltage values), and the laser diodes convert the image data from electric signals to optical signals (data are expressed with blinking laser beams). Variations in light quantity of laser beams or variations in optical system (such as lenses) or drum sensitivity cannot attain a proper electrostatic image, therefore, the laser beam light quantity is monitored and controlled by the laser diodes. The ROS in this printer has four laser diodes for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black respectively, and the light quantity is automatically adjusted for each color.

10-39

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.5 Control

10.5.3 Process Control


For a stable printing, the parameters related to the image forming must be corrected as necessary. The control of entire printing process including parameter correction control is called "process control". Mainly, the following two controls are made: Potential control Toner density control To supplement these two controls, the following controls are provided: High Area Coverage Mode Admix Mode AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR LED light quantity setting

10.5.3.1 Potential Control


To attain stable printing image density, the drum charging voltage and the developing DC voltage are adjusted according to the developing capability of each color carrier that varies momentarily. The adjusted drum charging voltage and the developing DC voltage are fed back to keep the printing image density constant. The potential control is made immediately before the start of printing, if either of the following conditions is satisfied: At the first printing after the power on When cumulative print count after the power on exceeds 25 When a cleaning cycle is executed during continuous printing The outline of control is as follows. 1 The AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR (temperature and humidity sensor) detects the temperature and humidity, and sets target values of drum charging voltage and developing DC voltage. 2 The patches of respective colors (yellow, magenta, cyan, and black) for the potential control are generated and transferred on the BTR. (For the shape of patches, see the following figure.)

About 11mm

About 12mm

About 3mm About 57mm

K
engine principle0046FA

3) The AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR (density sensor) detects the density of the area on BTR where no toner is present and the density of patches.

10-40

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.5 Control
4 4) The density measured in step 3) is compared with target value set in step 1) to change the drum charging voltage and the developing DC voltage for each color according to a difference.

10.5.3.2 Toner Density Control


The toner density must be kept constant to attain stable printing image. To keep the toner density constant, the toner should be dispensed exactly by the quantity consumed for the printing. This system is the PCDC. However, the system with only the PCDC generates a difference from target toner density, thus requiring the system to correct this error. This is the toner density control by the AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR. These two control systems are altogether called the toner density control. 1 PCDC (Pixel Count Dispense Control) The toner quantity consumed in the developing process is calculated by counting the video signals entered to the PRINT HEAD. The video signal counting is made by the charging and discharging of the capacitor in the CR circuit arranged in parallel to the video signal line. The consumed toner quantity is calculated by the toner dispense time. The Toner Motor in the TONER DISPENSER ASSEMBLY is driven by the amount of calculated toner dispense time to supply the toner into the developer. 2 ADC (Auto Density Control) The patches of respective colors (yellow, magenta, cyan, and black) for the toner density control are generated under specified potential condition, and transferred on the BTR. The AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR measures this density. The measured value is compared with reference value, and if the toner density is low, the toner dispense quantity is increased at the next printing, or if the toner density is high, the toner dispense quantity is reduced at the next printing. The toner dispense quantity is calculated by the toner dispense time. This calculation is made for each color. ADC is made after the completion of printing, if either of the following conditions is satisfied: - When cumulative print count after the power on exceeds 25 - When a cleaning cycle is executed during continuous printing 3 Example of toner dispensation The Toner Motor revolves for the duration of the specified time per 1-time dispensation. The toner dispense time in 1) and 2) above is calculated with the number of revolutions of Toner Motor. In the following description, this is called the dispense count. The dispense count calculated by the ADC is cancelled in the subsequent 8 prints. If 16 dispense counts were calculated as a lack of toner by the ADC, the toner is dispensed additionally to the dispense count calculated by the PCDC by 2 counts (16/8=2) in the subsequent 8 prints. Or, if 16 dispense counts were calculated as an excess of toner by the ADC, the toner is dispensed by subtracting from the dispense count calculated by the PCDC in the subsequent 8 prints. If the excess amount cannot be subtracted in 8 prints, the remainder is subtracted in 9 and subsequent prints.

10-41

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.5 Control

Total dispense counts

Even allotment in first 8 prints Correction amount by ADC +16

Dispense counts by PCDC

Correction amount by ADC -8 Total dispense counts

engine principle0044FA

10.5.3.3 High Area Coverage Mode


A continuous printing of the image of area coverage exceeding the toner dispense capability causes the toner density in the developer to be lowered. The High Area Coverage Mode extends the next page feed and dispenses the toner during this time, if the toner dispense time reached the specified value during a continuous printing.

10.5.3.4 Admix Mode


Even the High Area Coverage Mode may not be able to cope with the reduction of toner density in the developer. Also, if the machine used in high humidity environment is relocated to the place in low humidity environment, the reference value of toner density is different in respective environments, thus causing large discrepancy between measured value by AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR and reference value of toner density. The Admix Mode dispenses the toner immediately to prevent the reduction of toner density, if the patch density result measured by the AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR is far lower than the reference value when the patches for toner density control are generated.

10-42

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.5 Control 10.5.3.5 LED Light Quantity Control of AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR
The AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR is a reflection type density sensor that radiates the light to an objective from the LED in the sensor and detects the reflected light from the objective to output electric signal according to the light quantity. For exact density measurement, the sensor output value (reflected light quantity) must be the specified value when no toner is put on the BTR as an objective. The reflected light quantity varies depending on the BTR surface condition or dirty condition of AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR surface. The light quantity emitted from the LED is controlled so that the reflected light quantity satisfies the specified value. This control is made in two ways; one to set the light quantity so that the reflected light quantity satisfies the specified value, and one to adjust the subsequent light quantity to be within the tolerance. 1 Light quantity setting The reflected light quantity may vary largely, if the Transfer Roller was replaced or the AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR was cleaned. Assuming this fact, the light quantity is set when the power is turned on, or the front cover is opened and closed. The light quantity of LED is increased gradually, and the set value is fixed when the output of AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR exceeds the specified value. At this time, if the output of AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR does not reach the specified value even though the light quantity is increased to the upper limit, the controller judges the sensor as dirty. Also, the controller judges the sensor as faulty in the event of extremely high output. 2 Light quantity adjustment At the execution of ADC, the light quantity adjustment is made immediately before the patches for toner density control are generated. The light is emitted from the LED with current setting of light quantity to check if the output value of the AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR is within the specified range. If the output value is low, the light quantity is increased by the specified amount at the next ADC, or if high, the light quantity is reduced at the next ADC. At this time, if the output value is less than the first lower limit, the controller judges the sensor as dirty and outputs the warning. Further, if less than the second lower limit, the controller judges the sensor as faulty and stops the printing.

10-43

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.5 Control

10.5.4 Color Registration Control


The printer uses a tandem system where the drums and developers are arranged respectively for each of yellow, magenta, cyan, and black colors. Since the images are formed on the drum of each color to be overlayed one another, a color shift may occur. The color registration control calculates how much the registration is shifted, and adjusts the ROS write timing. The lateral registration control adjusts all of four colors in lateral directions. The color registration control is made from a change in inside temperature and the print count at the execution of the process control. The control is outlined below: 1 2 With no toner on the Belt, the output value of ADC Sensor is measured to determine the threshold value. The patches for color registration control are generated on the Belt. These patches are composed of 10mm lines of K, C, K, M, K, and Y in this order.

3 4

The density of patches generated by the ADC Sensor is read. The shift correction amount is calculated from the threshold value determined in 1) and the patch density measured in 3).

The ROS write timing is changed according to the shift correction amount.

10-44

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.5 Control

10.5.5 Fuser Control


10.5.5.1 Fuser temperature control
As for the fuser temperature control, the target temperature is set, then the Heat Roll surface temperature is controlled so that it can meet the target value by turning on/off the Heater Lamp. Temperature of individual area of the Heat Roll is detected by the Fuser Non-Contact Sensor (NCS) in the middle of the Heat Roll and the Temp Sensor at the edge of it. When the temperature detected is higher than the target value, the Heater Lamp will be turned OFF. When the temperature is below the target value, the Heater Lamp will be turned ON. The target temperature setting varies depending on the time of Warm-up, Printing, or Process Control. The target temperature varies according to such environmental factors as the interior temperature detected by the Sensor Hum Temp.

10.5.5.2 Cooling down


As the printing continues, the temperature distribution in the Heat Roll becomes uneven both in the paper feed and nonpaper feed areas. Cooling Down suspends paper feeling for a certain period of time so that the Heat Roll temperature distribution can be uniform. When the temperature of the Heat Roll edge is high, cooling down is performed to lower the temperature to the target value.

10.5.5.3 Sensor Warm-up


The Fuser NCS (Non Contact Sensor) at the center of the Heat Roll will be lose its accuracy of detecting temperature when the temperature of the Sensor itself is below -5C. Therefore, the Sensor will be warmed up when the temperature is below -5C. This action is called Sensor Warm-up.

10-45

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.6 Drive Transmission Route

10.6 Drive Transmission Route


10.6.1 DRIVE ASSY MAIN
Rotation power of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN is transmitted through the route below.
[ Name of moving parts ] DRIVE ASSY MAIN

GEAR T4

GEAR P2

GEAR DRV

GEAR P3

[ BELT ]

GEAR P4

GEAR P5 TRANSFER BELT DRIVE ASSY PH

REGI CLUTCH

SOLENOID ASSY FEED

GEAR ASSY FEED

[ ROLL ASSY REGI ]

[ FEED ROLLER ]

GEAR REGI RUBBER

GEAR REGI METAL

CHUTE ASSY FDR REGI

[ ROLL REGI METAL ]

GEAR PHD 1

GEAR PHD 2

GEAR PHD 2

[ DRUM (K) ] HSG ASSY XERO (K)

[ DRUM (C) ] HSG ASSY XERO (C)

[ DRUM (M) ] HSG ASSY XERO (M)

[ DRUM (Y) ] HSG ASSY XERO (Y)

PHD ASSY

Wsb10029FA

10-46

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.6 Drive Transmission Route

[ PAPER FEED DRIVE ]

[ Name of moving parts ] : Indicates the engagement of gears.

DRIVE ASSY MAIN

DRIVE ASSY PH GEAR P2

GEAR REGI RUBBER GEAR REGI METAL [ ROLL ASSY REGI ] GEAR P4 GEAR P3 GEAR P5

REGI CLUTCH

[ ROLL REGI METAL ]

FRONT [ FEED ROLLER ]

SOLENOID ASSY FEED GEAR ASSY FEED Wsb10051FA

10-47

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.6 Drive Transmission Route

[ DRUM and BELT DRIVE ]

[ Name of moving parts ] : Indicates the engagement of gears.

PHD ASSY

[ DRUM (K) ] [ DRUM (C) ]

GEAR PHD 2 GEAR PHD 1 DRIVE ASSY MAIN

[ BELT ] [ DRUM (M) ] GEAR PHD 2 [ DRUM (Y) ] GEAR DRV

FRONT GEAR T4 Wsb10052FA

10-48

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.6 Drive Transmission Route

10.6.2 DRIVE ASSY MAIN and DRIVE ASSY SUB DRIVE


Rotation power of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN and DRIVE ASSY SUB are transmitted through the route below.
[ BLACK and WHITE MODE ]
DRIVE ASSY SUB SUB MOTOR DRIVE ASSY MAIN

[ Name of moving parts ]

GEAR D1

GEAR P2

GEAR DK

GEAR D1

GEAR P3

GEAR D5

GEAR D2

GEAR P4

GEAR P4-2

GEAR MAG (K)

GEAR D3 IN

GEAR C

COLOR MODE SWITCHING SOLENOID

CAM C [ MAGNET ROLL (K) ] GEAR D3 OUT FLANGE D3

HSG ASSY DEVE (K)

PHD ASSY

DRIVE ASSY PH

Wsb10031FA

10-49

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.6 Drive Transmission Route

[ BLACK and WHITE MODE ]

[ Name of moving parts ] : Indicates the engagement of gears.

GEAR D5 DRIVE ASSY SUB

GEAR DK

GEAR D1 [ MAGNET ROLL (K) ] GEAR MAG (K) SUB MOTOR

GEAR D1

GEAR D2

DRIVE ASSY PH FRONT FLANGE D3 CAM C

GEAR D4 DRIVE ASSY MAIN

GEAR D2 GEAR D3 OUT GEAR D3 IN FLANGE D3

CAM C

GEAR P2 GEAR P3 GEAR P4 GEAR P4-2 GEAR C DRIVE ASSY PH

COLOR MODE SWITCHING SOLENOID Wsb10053FA

10-50

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.6 Drive Transmission Route

[ DEVELOPMENT and EXCESS TONER COLLECTING ]


DRIVE ASSY MAIN

[ Name of moving parts ] DRIVE ASSY SUB

GEAR PHD 1

GEAR PHD 2

GEAR MAG (Y, M, C, K)

[ DRUM ]

[ MAGNET ROLL ]

GEAR AUGER CLNG

GEAR MAG IDLR

GEAR IDLER AUGER SIDE

GEAR IDLER PADDLE

GEAR AUGER SIDE

GEAR PADDLE

[ AUGER ]

[ AUGER CLNG SIDE ]

[ PADDLE DEVE ]

GEAR AUGER

[ AUGER FRONT ] GEAR AUGER

[ AUGER REAR ] HSG ASSY XERO (Y, M, C, K) PHD ASSY HSG ASSY DEVE (Y, M, C, K)

Wsb10037FA

10-51

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.6 Drive Transmission Route

[ EXCESS TONER COLLECTING DRIVE ]

[ Name of moving parts ] : Indicates the engagement of gears.

[ AUGER CLNG SIDE ] HSG ASSY XERO

[ AUGER ] GEAR AUGER CLNG

GEAR AUGER SIDE

GEAR IDLER AUGER SIDE

[ DRUM ]

GEAR PHD 2 GEAR PHD 1 DRIVE ASSY MAIN

FRONT PHD ASSY GEAR PHD 2

Wsb10054FA

10-52

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.6 Drive Transmission Route

[ DEVELOPMENT DRIVE ]

[ Name of moving parts ] : Indicates the engagement of gears.

[ PADDLE DEVE ] [ AUGER FRONT ] [ AUGER REAR ] GEAR IDLER PADDLE GEAR PADDLE HSG ASSY DEVE

[ MAGNET ROLL ]

GEAR AUGER

GEAR MAG IDLR

GEAR MAG GEAR AUGER

FRONT PHD ASSY DRIVE ASSY SUB

Wsb10055FA

10-53

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.6 Drive Transmission Route

10.6.3 TONER DISPENSER (Y, M, C, K)


Rotation power of the TONER DISPENSER drives the agitator and the auger in the TONER CARTRIDGE. [TONER CARTRIDGE]
[ TONER DISPENSER ]

[ Name of moving parts ]

DISPENSE MOTOR (K)

DISPENSE MOTOR (C)

DISPENSE MOTOR (M)

DISPENSE MOTOR (Y)

GEAR IDLER (K)

GEAR IDLER (C)

GEAR IDLER (M)

GEAR IDLER (Y)

GEAR IDLER AUG (K)

GEAR IDLER AUG (C)

GEAR IDLER AUG (M)

GEAR IDLER AUG (Y)

GEAR AUGER (K)

GEAR AUGER (C)

GEAR AUGER (M)

GEAR AUGER (Y)

[ AUGER (K) ]

[ AUGER (C) ]

[ AUGER (M) ]

[ AUGER (Y) ]

GEAR IDLER AGI (K)

GEAR IDLER AGI (C)

GEAR IDLER AGI (M)

GEAR IDLER AGI (Y)

DISPENSER ASSY

GEAR AGITATOR (K)

GEAR AGITATOR (C)

GEAR AGITATOR (M)

GEAR AGITATOR (Y)

[ AGITATOR (K) ] TONER CARTRIDGE (K)

[ AGITATOR (C) ] TONER CARTRIDGE (C)

[ AGITATOR (M) ] TONER CARTRIDGE (M)

[ AGITATOR (Y) ] TONER CARTRIDGE (Y)

Wsb06039KA

10-54

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.6 Drive Transmission Route
[TONER CARTRIDGE]
[ TONER DISPENSER ]

[ Name of moving parts ] : Indicates the engagement of gears.

TONER CARTRIDGE [ AUGER ]

[ AGITATOR ]

GEAR IDLER AGI GEAR IDLER FRONT

GEAR AGITATOR GEAR AUGER DISPENSE MOTOR GEAR IDLER AUG Wsb10056FA

10-55

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.6 Drive Transmission Route

10.6.4 DRIVE ASSY SUB


Rotation power of the DRIVE ASSY SUB is transmitted through the route below. [PAPER HANDLING]
[ FULL COLOR MODE ]
DRIVE ASSY SUB SUB MOTOR

[ Name of moving parts ] DRIVE ASSY PH

GEAR D1

GEAR D1

GEAR DK

GEAR D2

GEAR D3 IN

GEAR D3 OUT

GEAR D4

GEAR D4

GEAR D5

GEAR D5

GEAR D5

GEAR D5

GEAR MAG (K)

GEAR MAG (C)

GEAR MAG (M)

GEAR MAG (Y)

[ MAGNET ROLL (K) ]

[ MAGNET ROLL (C) ]

[ MAGNET ROLL (M) ]

[ MAGNET ROLL (Y) ]

HSG ASSY DEVE (K)

HSG ASSY DEVE (C)

HSG ASSY DEVE (M)

HSG ASSY DEVE (Y)

PHD ASSY

Wsb10033FA

10-56

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.6 Drive Transmission Route
[PAPER HANDLING]

[ FULL COLOR MODE ]

[ Name of moving parts ] : Indicates the engagement of gears.

DRIVE ASSY SUB GEAR DK GEAR D1

GEAR MAG (K) [ MAGNET ROLL (K) ] GEAR D5 SUB MOTOR GEAR MAG (C) [ MAGNET ROLL (C) ] GEAR D5 GEAR D4 GEAR D1

GEAR MAG (M) [ MAGNET ROLL (M) ] GEAR D5 GEAR D4

GEAR D2 DRIVE ASSY PH

GEAR MAG (Y) [ MAGNET ROLL (Y) ] GEAR D5

FRONT

GEAR D3 OUT

GEAR D4 GEAR D2 GEAR D3 IN Wsb10057FA

10-57

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.6 Drive Transmission Route

[ FUSER DRIVE ]

[ Name of moving parts ] DRIVE ASSY SUB

GEAR IDLER HR

GEAR HR

GEAR IDLER EXIT

[ HEAT ROLL ]

GEAR EXIT

[ ROLL ASSY EXIT ] FUSER

Wsb06035KA

10-58

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.6 Drive Transmission Route

[ FUSER DRIVE ]

[ Name of moving parts ] : Indicates the engagement of gears.

[ ROLL ASSY EXIT ] FUSER

GEAR EXIT

GEAR IDLER EXIT

[ HEAT ROLL ]

GEAR HR GEAR IDLER HR

DRIVE ASSY SUB

FRONT

Wsb10058FA

10-59

Chapter 10 Machine Overview


10.6 Drive Transmission Route

10-60

PUBLICATION COMMENT SHEET Use this feedback sheet to make us aware of the strengths and weaknesses of the material you have received. Please comment on adequacy, quality, usability, format, parts of manual not used, etc. Specific errors or deficiencies should be referenced by page and/or page number. Mail to your Technical Support Department and they will pass to us. (Customer EngineerOpCo Technical Support DepartmentFX/CSS/IBS)
Use black pencil or ink:

Name :

Date :

Publication No. :

Job Title : OpCo (Country) :

Employee No. : Mailing Address :

Title of Publication :

Date and Revision of Publication : Page No. - Figure No. Description of Error or Deficiency (please be specific).

Please check if answer is requested.

No

Yes

If yes, be sure to fill in Name, Job Title, Employee No., OpCo name and Mailing Address

FIRST FOLD

Place Postage Stamp Here

FUJI XEROX Co., Ltd.


Attn: CSS/IBS KSP/R&D Business Park Bldg.6A7 3-2-1,Sakado Takatsu-ku,Kanagawa-ken 213-8508 Japan

SECOND FOLD

CLEAR TAPE

Before sealing, please be sure that all information is completed on reverse side.

CLEAR TAPE